2007 g35 coupe owner's manual - dealer.com us · 2019. 8. 26. · 23. electric steering column...

Foreword

Your INFINITI represents a new way ofthinking about vehicle design. It inte-grates advanced engineering and supe-rior craftsmanship with a simple, refinedaesthetic sensitivity associated with tra-ditional Japanese culture.

The result is a different notion of luxuryand beauty. The car itself is important,but so is the sense of harmony that thevehicle evokes in its driver, and thesense of satisfaction you feel with theINFINITI — from the way it looks anddrives to the high level of retailer service.

To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI tothe fullest, we encourage you to read thisOwner’s Manual immediately. It explainsall of the features, controls and perfor-mance characteristics of your INFINITI; italso provides important instructions andsafety information.

A separate Warranty Information Bookletcan be found in your Owner’s literatureportfolio. The INFINITI Service and Mainte-nance Guide explains details about main-taining and servicing your vehicle. Alwayscarry it with you when you take yourINFINITI to an authorized retailer. Theportfolio contents provide complete infor-mation about all warranties covering thisvehicle, the periodic maintenance re-quired to keep the warranties in effect aswell as the INFINITI Roadside Assistanceprogram.

Additionally, a separate Customer Careand Lemon Law Information Booklet willexplain how to resolve any concerns youmay have with your vehicle, as well asclarify your rights under your state’slemon law.

INFINITI is dedicated to providing a satis-fying ownership experience for as long asyou own your car. Should you have anyquestions regarding your INFINITI or anINFINITI dealer, please contact our Con-sumer Affairs department at:

O INFINITI DivisionNissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 685003Franklin, TN 37068-5003

O Nissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

In U.S. 1-800-662-6200.In Canada 1-800-361-4792.

READ FIRST — THEN DRIVESAFELYBefore driving your vehicle please readyour Owner’s Manual carefully. This willensure familiarity with controls and main-tenance requirements, assisting you inthe safe operation of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATIONREMINDERS FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rules to helpensure a safe and comfortable trip for you andyour passengers!

O NEVER drive under the influence of al-cohol or drugs.

O ALWAYS observe posted speed limits andnever drive too fast for conditions.

O ALWAYS give your full attention to drivingand avoid using vehicle features or takingother actions that could distract you.

O ALWAYS use seat belts and child re-straints. Pre-teen children should beseated in the rear seat.

O ALWAYS provide information about theproper use of vehicle safety features to alloccupants of the vehicle.

O ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual forimportant safety information.

w 06.7.7/V35-D/V5.0 X

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified. Modi-fication could affect its performance,safety or durability, and may even violategovernmental regulations. In addition,damage or performance problems re-sulting from modifications may not becovered under INFINITI warranties.

WHEN READING THE MANUALThis manual includes information for alloptions available on this model. There-fore, you may find some information thatdoes not apply to your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illus-trations in this manual are those in effectat the time of printing. INFINITI reservesthe right to change specifications or de-sign at any time without notice.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUTTHIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in thismanual. They are used in the followingways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of a haz-ard that could cause death or serious per-sonal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, theprocedures must be followed precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of a haz-ard that could cause minor or moderate per-sonal injury or damage to your vehicle. Toavoid or reduce the risk, the procedures mustbe followed carefully.

If you see this symbol, it means Do not dothis or Do not let this happen.

If you see a symbol similar to these in anillustration, it means the arrow points tothe front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similarto these indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similarto these call attention to an item in the il-lustration.

SIC0697

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65WARNING

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, andcertain vehicle components contain or emitchemicals known to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects or other repro-ductive harm. In addition, certain fluids con-tained in vehicles and certain products ofcomponent wear contain or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California to cause can-cer and birth defects or other reproductiveharm.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATEADVISORY

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium bat-teries, may contain perchlorate material.The following advisory is provided: “Per-chlorate Material — special handling mayapply.See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”

BLUETOOTH is a trademarkowned by Bluetooth SIG,Inc., U.S.A. and licenced toVisteon Japan, Ltd.

© 2006 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD.

All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s Manual maybe reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or trans-mitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, me-chanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, withoutthe prior written permission of Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.

w 06.10.12/V35-D/V5.0 X

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Table ofContents

Illustrated table of contents 0

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1

Instruments and controls 2

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4

Starting and driving 5

In case of emergency 6

Appearance and care 7

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8

Technical and consumer information 9

Index 10

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints ........... 0-2Exterior............................................................. 0-3Passenger compartment ................................... 0-4

Instrument panel .............................................. 0-5Meters and gauges........................................... 0-7Engine compartment ........................................ 0-8

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Supplemental front-impact air bags(P.1-35)

2. Front seat belts (P.1-8)3. Front head restraints (P.1-7)4. Supplemental side-impact air bags

(P.1-35)5. Supplemental curtain side-impact air

bags (P.1-35)6. Rear seat belts (P.1-8)7. Child restraint anchor points (for top

tether strap child restraint) (P.1-20)8. Occupant classification sensor (pres-

sure sensor) (P.1-42)9. Front seats (P.1-2)10. Pre-tensioner seat belt system (P.1-49)11. Rear seats

— Child restraints (P.1-16)12. Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil-

dren (LATCH) system (P.1-18)

SSI0246

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILDRESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Engine hood (P.3-24)

2. Headlight and turn signal switch(P.2-20)

3. Windshield wiper and washer switch(P.2-19)

4. Windshield (P.8-21)

5. Sunroof* (P.2-38)

6. Power windows (P.2-36)

7. Recovery hook (P.6-14)

8. Fog light switch (P.2-24)

9. Front side marker light (P.8-30)

10. Tire pressure (P.8-32)

11. Flat tire (P.6-2)

12. Tire chains (P.8-39)

13. Tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) (P.2-12, 5-3)

14. Mirrors (P.3-32)

15. Door locks, keyfob, keys (P.3-3)

16. Trunk lid (P.3-25)17. Interior trunk lid release (P.3-27)18. Rear window defogger switch

(P.2-20)19. Fuel-filler door (P.3-28)20.Rear combination light (P.8-30)

*: if so equippedSSI0156

EXTERIOR

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Automatic anti-glare mirror, HomeLink(P.3-32, 2-42)

2. Sunglasses holder (P.2-30)

3. Interior lights (P.2-40)

4. Sunroof* (P.2-38)

5. Sun visors (P.3-31)

6. Power window switch/Power door lockswitch (P.2-36, 3-4)

7. Front seats (P.1-2)

8. Coat hook (P.2-36)

9. Selector lever or Shift lever— Automatic transmission (P.5-11)— Manual transmission (P.5-15)

10. Parking brake (P.5-18)

11. Automatic drive positioner switches*(P.3-33)

12. Front cup holder (P.2-31)

13. Console box (P.2-34)

14. Walk-in mechanism* (P.1-4)

15. Shoulder belt guide (P.1-15)

16. Rear cup holder (P.2-32)

17. Rear seats

*: if so equipped

SSI0158

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Headlight, fog light and turn signalswitch (P.2-20)

2. Security indicator light (P.2-18)3. Steering wheel switch for audio control

(P.4-27) or steering wheel switch forBluetooth Hands-Free Phone System(if so equipped) (P.4-29)

4. Driver’s supplemental front-impact airbag (P.1-35)/Horn (P.2-25)

5. Meters/gauges (P.2-3)6. Cruise control main/set switch (P.5-19)7. Windshield wiper/washer switch

(P.2-19)8. Center ventilator (P.4-9)

9. Center display - Compass, Air condi-tioner, Ambient temperature, Frontpassenger air bag status light (P.1-44)

10. Rear window and outside mirror de-fogger switch (P.2-20)

11. Heater/air conditioner control (P.4-10)12. Clock (P.2-27)13. Navigation system* (if so equipped)

(P.4-2)14. Passenger’s supplemental front air

bag (P.1-35)15. Upper glove box (except for Naviga-

tion system equipped models)(P.2-33)

16. Side ventilator (P.4-9)17. Hood lock release handle (P.3-24)18. Trunk lid release switch (P.3-25)19. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off

switch (P.2-27)20. Instrument brightness control

(P.2-23)21. Outside mirror remote control switch

(P.3-33)22. Fuse box (P.8-25)23. Electric steering column control (if so

equipped) (P.3-31)24. Manual steering column control

(P.3-30)25. Ignition switch/steering lock (P.5-6)26. Audio system (P.4-14)27. Ashtray/Cigarette lighter (P.2-28)28. Heated seat switch (P.2-25)29. Hazard warning flasher switch

(P.2-24)

SSI0276

INSTRUMENT PANEL


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

30. Glove box (P.2-32)*: Refer to the separate Navigation System

Owner’s Manual.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Warning/Indicator lights (P.2-9)

2. Tachometer (P.2-4)

3. Automatic transmission position indi-cator (AT models) (P.2-14)/Manualtransmission up-shift indicator (MTmodels) (P.5-16)

4. Speedometer (P.2-3)

5. Engine coolant temperature gauge(P.2-4)

6. Trip odometer reset switch (P.2-3)

7. Odometer (Total/Twin trip) (P.2-3)/Up-shift indicator setting (MT models)

8. Fuel gauge (P.2-5)

SSI0075

METERS AND GAUGES


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

VQ35DE

1. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-23)

2. Battery (P.8-16)

3. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-10)

4. Brake fluid reservoir (P.8-14)

5. Clutch fluid reservoir (MT models)(P.8-15)

6. Power steering fluid reservoir (P.8-13)

7. Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-8)

8. Window washer fluid reservoir(P.8-15)

9. Radiator filler cap (P.8-9)

10. Drive belts (P.8-19)

11. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-10)

12. Air cleaner (P.8-20)

SSI0160

ENGINE COMPARTMENT


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

1 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplementalrestraint system

Seats ................................................................ 1-2Front power seat adjustment ....................... 1-2Rear seat folding ......................................... 1-5Head restraint adjustment ........................... 1-7Active head restraint (front seats) ................ 1-7

Seat belts ......................................................... 1-8Precautions on seat belt usage.................... 1-8Child safety ................................................ 1-11Pregnant women ........................................ 1-12Injured persons .......................................... 1-12Three-point type seat belt with retractor..... 1-12Seat belt extenders .................................... 1-15Seat belt maintenance ............................... 1-16

Child restraints................................................ 1-16Precaution on child restraints..................... 1-16Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildrensystem (LATCH) .......................................... 1-18

Top tether strap child restraint .................. 1-20Child restraint installation using LATCH...... 1-21Child restraint installation using the seatbelts .......................................................... 1-25

Booster seats .................................................. 1-31Precautions on booster seats .................... 1-31Booster seat installation ............................ 1-33

Supplemental restraint system ........................ 1-35Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem ....................................................... 1-35INFINITI advanced air bag system (frontseats) ........................................................ 1-42Supplemental side air bag and curtainside-impact air bag systems ...................... 1-47Supplemental air bag warning labels......... 1-50Supplemental air bag warning light ........... 1-50Repair and replacement procedure ............. 1-51

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

O Do not ride in a moving vehicle when theseatback is reclined. This can be dan-gerous. The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. In an accident, youcould be thrown into it and receive neckor other serious injuries. You could alsoslide under the lap belt and receive seri-ous internal injuries.

O For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back in theseat with both feet on the floor and ad-just the seat belt properly. See “Precau-tions on seat belt usage” later in thissection.

O Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls. Unattendedchildren could become involved in se-

rious accidents.

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT

Operating tips

O The seat motor has an auto-reset over-load protection circuit. If the motorstops during operation, wait 30 sec-onds, then reactivate the switch.

O Do not operate the power seat for along period of time when the engine isoff. This will discharge the battery.

See “Automatic drive positioner” in the“3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments”for automatic seat positioner operation (ifso equipped).

SSS0133C

SEATS

1-2 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Forward and backward

Moving the switch q1 forward or back-ward will slide the seat forward or back-ward to the desired position.

Reclining

Move the recline switch q2 backwarduntil the desired angle is obtained. Tobring the seatback forward again, movethe switch forward. The seatback willmove forward.

The reclining feature allows adjustment ofthe seatback for occupants of differentsizes for added comfort and to help ob-tain proper seat belt fit. See “Precautionson seat belt usage” later in this section.The seatback may also be reclined toallow occupants to rest when the vehicleis parked.

Seat lifter (Driver’s seat)

Pull the switch up or push it down to ad-just the angle and height of the seat.

SSS0182C SSS0183

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Lumbar support (Driver’s seat)

The lumbar support feature provideslower back support to the driver. Movethe lever forward or backward to adjustthe seat lumbar area.

Walk-in mechanism

This feature makes it easier to get in andout of the rear seat.Use the following procedure when gettingin and out of the rear seat.

1. Pull the seatback lever upward q1 orpull the walk-in lever q2 on the side ofthe front seat upward to fold the frontseatback down.

2. To slide the front seat forward, pushthe seatback switch q3 below theseatback lever. The front seat willmove forward.

3. Get in or out of the vehicle.

4. Push the seatback switch q3 again toreturn the front seat to its original po-sition and raise the seatback.

O The front passenger seat will stop at 7in (175 mm) from its front most posi-tion to retain space for the rear pas-senger.

CAUTION

O Do not raise the seatback before re-

SSS0669 SSS0577


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

turning the front seat to its original posi-tion.

O When returning the seat to its originalposition, confirm the seat and seatbackare locked properly.

O Be careful not to pinch your hand or footor bump your head when operating thewalk-in seat. The seatback will folddown rapidly.

O Do not place any objects near the seat-back of the front seats. They may bepinched and damaged.

O Remove the seat belt from the seat beltguide when operating the walk-inmechanism to prevent the belt frombeing stretched along with the seatmovement.

The automatic forwarding and reversingwill not work or stop under the followingconditions:

O When the vehicle speed is above 4MPH (7 km/h).

O When the seat belt is fastened.

O When the selector lever is not in the P(Park) position (Automatic transmis-sion model’s driver’s seat) or theparking brake is not applied (Manualtransmission model’s driver’s seat).

O When the door is closed.

O When the seat is raised before or dur-ing automatic operation.

REAR SEAT FOLDING

The rear seatback can be folded to allowaccess to the trunk from the inside of thevehicle.

Be sure to remove anything from the rearcup holder and the rear center tray beforefolding the rear seat.

To access the trunk:

1. Open the trunk lid.

2. Pull the handle located on the left sideof the trunk. The rear seatback will beunlatched.

SSS0220


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

3. Fold the rear seatback down.

WARNING

Properly secure all cargo to help prevent itfrom sliding or shifting. Do not place cargohigher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stopor collision, unsecured cargo could causepersonal injury.

To return the seatback:

1. Fold up the rear seatback.

2. Securely lock the seatback in position.

When the seatback is latched, the seatlock indicator qA on the seatback willbe lowered.

SSS0219 SSS0553


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT

To raise the head restraint, just pull it up.To lower, push the lock knob q1 and pushthe head restraint down.

Adjust the head restraints so the center islevel with the center of your ears.

WARNING

Head restraints should be adjusted properlyas they may provide significant protectionagainst injury in an accident. Do not removethem. Check the adjustment after someoneelse uses the seat.

ACTIVE HEAD RESTRAINT (frontseats)

WARNING

O Always adjust the head restraints prop-erly as specified in the previous section.Failure to do so can reduce the effective-ness of the active head restraint.

O Active head restraints are designed tosupplement other safety systems. Al-ways wear seat belts. No system can

SSS0288 SSS0178A SSS0508


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

prevent all injuries in any accident.

O Do not attach anything to the head re-straint stalks. Doing so could impair ac-tive head restraint function.

The active head restraint moves forwardutilizing the force that the seatback re-ceives from the occupant in a rear-endcollision. The movement of the head re-straint helps support the occupant’s headby reducing its backward movement andhelping absorb some of the forces thatmay lead to whiplash type injuries.

Active head restraints are effective for col-lisions at low to medium speeds in whichit is said that whiplash injury occursmost.

Active head restraints operate only in cer-tain rear-end collisions. After the colli-sion, the head restraints return to theiroriginal positions.

Properly adjust the active head restraintsas described in the previous section.

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELTUSAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properlyadjusted, and you are sitting upright andwell back in your seat with both feet onthe floor, your chances of being injured orkilled in an accident and/or the severityof injury may be greatly reduced. INFINITIstrongly encourages you and all of yourpassengers to buckle up every time youdrive, even if your seating position in-cludes a supplemental air bag.

Most states, provinces or territories re-quire that seat belts be worn at all timeswhen a vehicle is being driven.

SEAT BELTS


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

O Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes. Children should be properly re-strained in the rear seat and, if appropri-ate, in a child restraint.

O The seat belt should be properly ad-justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so mayreduce the effectiveness of the entire re-straint system and increase the

chance or severity of injury in an acci-dent. Serious injury or death can occur ifthe seat belt is not worn properly.

O Always route the shoulder belt over yourshoulder and across your chest. Neverrun the belt behind your back, underyour arm or across your neck. The beltshould be away from your face and neck,but not falling off your shoulder.

O Position the lap belt as low and snug aspossible around the hips, not the waist.A lap belt worn too high could increasethe risk of internal injuries in an acci-dent.

O Be sure the seat belt tongue is securelyfastened to the proper buckle.

O Do not wear the seat belt inside out ortwisted. Doing so may reduce its effec-tiveness.

O Do not allow more than one person touse the same seat belt.

O Never carry more people in the vehiclethan there are seat belts.

O If the seat belt warning light glows con-tinuously while the ignition is turned ONwith all doors closed and all seat beltsfastened, it may indicate a malfunctionin the system. Have the system checkedby an INFINITI dealer.

O Once the pre-tensioner seat belt has ac-tivated, it cannot be reused and must bereplaced together with the retractor. Seean INFINITI dealer.

SSS0136B


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

O Removal and installation of the pre-tensioner seat belt system componentsshould be done by an INFINITI dealer.

O All seat belt assemblies, including re-tractors and attaching hardware, shouldbe inspected after any collision by anINFINITI dealer. INFINITI recommendsthat all seat belt assemblies in useduring a collision be replaced unless thecollision was minor and the belts showno damage and continue to operateproperly. Seat belt assemblies not in

use during a collision should also be in-spected and replaced if either damage orimproper operation is noted.

O All child restraints and attaching hard-ware should be inspected after any colli-sion. Always follow the restraint manu-facturer’s inspection instructions and re-placement recommendations. The childrestraints should be replaced if they aredamaged.

SSS0134B SSS0016

SSS0014


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

CHILD SAFETY

Children need adults to help protect them.They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information inthis manual, child safety information isavailable from many other sources, in-cluding doctors, teachers, governmenttraffic safety offices, and community orga-nizations. Every child is different, so besure to learn the best way to transportyour child.

There are three basic types of child re-straint systems:

O Rear-facing child restraint

O Front-facing child restraint

O Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on thechild’s size. Generally, infants (up toabout 1 year and less than 20 lb (9 kg)should be placed in rear-facing child re-straints. Front-facing child restraints areavailable for children who outgrow rear-facing child restraints and are at least 1year old. Booster seats are used to helpposition a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on achild who can no longer use a front-facingchild restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special protection.The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit themproperly. The shoulder belt may come tooclose to the face or neck. The lap belt maynot fit over their small hip bones. In an acci-dent, an improperly fitting seat belt couldcause serious or fatal injury. Always use ap-propriate child restraints.

All US states and provinces of Canada re-quire the use of approved child restraintsfor infants and small children. (See “Childrestraints” later in this section.)

Also, there are other types of child re-straints available for larger children foradditional protection.

INFINITI recommends that all pre-teensand children be restrained in the rear seatif possible. According to accident statis-tics, children are safer when properly re-strained in the rear seat than in the frontseat.

This is especially important because yourvehicle has a supplemental restraintsystem (air bag system) for the front pas-

senger. See “Supplemental RestraintSystem” later in this section for precau-tions.

Infants

Infants up to at least 1 year old should beplaced in a rear-facing child restraint.INFINITI recommends that infants beplaced in child restraints that comply withFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards orCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.You should choose a child restraint thatfits your vehicle and always follow themanufacturer’s instructions for installa-tion and use.

Small children

Children that are over 1 year old andweigh at least 20 lb (9 kg) can be placedin a forward facing child restraint. Refer tothe manufacturer’s instructions forminimum and maximum weight andheight recommendations. INFINITI recom-mends that small children be placed inchild restraints that comply with FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standards or Cana-dian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Youshould choose a child restraint that fitsyour vehicle and always follow the manu-facturer’s instructions for installation anduse.


w 06.7.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Larger children

Children who are too large for child re-straints should be seated and restrainedby the seat belts which are provided. Theseat belt may not fit properly if the childis less than 4 ft 9 in (142.5 cm) tall andweighs between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb(36 kg). A booster seat should be used toobtain proper seat belt fit.

INFINITI recommends that a child beplaced in a commercially availablebooster seat if the shoulder belt in thechild’s seating position fits close to theface or neck or if the lap portion of theseat belt goes across the abdomen. Thebooster seat should raise the child sothat the shoulder belt is properly posi-tioned across the top, middle portion ofthe shoulder and the lap belt is low onthe hips. A booster seat can only be usedin seating positions that have a three-point type seat belt. The booster seatshould fit the vehicle seat and have alabel certifying that it complies with Fed-eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standards orCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.Once the child has grown so the shoulderbelt is no longer on or near the face andneck, use the shoulder belt without thebooster seat.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on any seatand do not allow a child in the cargo areaswhile the vehicle is moving. The child couldbe seriously injured or killed in an accidentor sudden stop.

PREGNANT WOMEN

INFINITI recommends that pregnantwomen use seat belts. The seat beltshould be worn snug, and always positionthe lap belt as low as possible around thehips, not the waist. Place the shoulderbelt over your shoulder and across yourchest. Never run the lap/shoulder beltover your abdominal area. Contact yourdoctor for specific recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

INFINITI recommends that injured personsuse seat belts, depending on the injury.Check with your doctor for specific recom-mendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELTWITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

O Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes.

O Do not ride in a moving vehicle when theseatback is reclined. This can be danger-ous. The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. In an accident, youcould be thrown into it and receive neckor other serious injuries. You could alsoslide under the lap belt and receive se-rious internal injuries.

O For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back in theseat with both feet on the floor and ad-just the seat belt properly.


w 06.7.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier inthis section.

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the re-tractor and insert the tongue into thebuckle until it clicks.

• The retractor is designed to lock dur-ing a sudden stop or on impact. Aslow pulling motion will permit thebelt to move, and allow you somefreedom of movement in the seat.

• If the seat belt cannot be pulled fromits fully retracted position, firmly pullthe belt and release it. Thensmoothly pull the belt out of the re-tractor.

3. Position the lap belt portion low andsnug on the hips as shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion towardthe retractor to take up extra slack. Besure the shoulder belt is routed overyour shoulder and across your chest.

The front passenger and rear seat beltshave a locking mechanism for child re-straint installation. It is referred to as theautomatic locking mode.

When the locking mechanism is activatedthe seat belt cannot be extended againuntil the seat belt tongue is detached

SSS0292Front seat

SSS0293Rear seat

SSS0290Front seat


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

from the buckle and fully retracted. Foradditional information, see “Child re-straints” later in this section.

The automatic locking mode should beused only for child restraint installation.During normal seat belt use by a pas-senger, the locking mode should not be ac-tivated. If it is activated it may cause un-comfortable seat belt tension. It can alsochange the operation of the front pas-senger air bag. See “Front passenger airbag and status light” later in this section.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certainthat the seatbacks are completely securedin the latched position. If they are not com-pletely secured, passengers may be injuredin an accident or sudden stop.

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the belt, push the button onthe buckle. The seat belt will automati-cally retract.

Checking seat belt operation

Your seat belt retractors are designed tolock belt movement using two separatemethods:

O when the belt is pulled quickly fromthe retractor.

O when the vehicle slows down rapidly.

SSS0291ARear seat

SSS0326


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

You can check their operation as follows:

O grasp the shoulder belt and pull for-ward quickly. The retractor should lockand restrict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during thischeck or if you have any questions aboutbelt operation, see an INFINITI dealer.

Shoulder belt guide

The shoulder belt guides are attached onthe shoulders of the front seats to helpfront occupants use the seat belts.

To use the shoulder belt guides, threadthe seat belt into the slot of the guide.

When you enter or exit the rear seat, re-lease the seat belt from the shoulder beltguide. Replace the seat belt in the guideafter rear seat access.

Always adjust the seat belt webbingsnugly. The shoulder belt guide can alsohelp assist proper fit and comfort. Always

make sure that the belt webbing is nottwisted and runs freely through the guidewhen using it.

WARNING

Always route the shoulder belt over yourshoulder and across your chest. Never runthe belt behind your back, under your arm oracross your neck. The belt should be awayfrom your face and neck, but not falling offyour shoulder. Use the shoulder belt guideto help position the belt. Failure to properlyposition the belt may reduce the effective-ness of the entire restraint system and in-crease the chance or severity of injury in anaccident.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving posi-tion, it is not possible to properly fit thelap-shoulder belt and fasten it, an ex-tender is available. The extender adds ap-proximately 8 in (200 mm) of length andmay be used for either the driver or frontpassenger seating position. See an IN-FINITI dealer for assistance if the extenderis required.

SSS0578


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

O Only INFINITI seat belt extenders, madeby the same company which made theoriginal equipment seat belts, should beused with INFINITI seat belts.

O Adults and children who can use thestandard seat belt should not use an ex-tender. Such unnecessary use could re-sult in serious personal injury in theevent of an accident.

O Never use seat belt extenders to installchild restraints. If the child restraint isnot secured properly, the child could beseriously injured in a collision or asudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

O To clean the seat belt webbings, applya mild soap solution or any solutionrecommended for cleaning upholsteryor carpets. Then brush the seat beltwebbing, wipe it with a cloth andallow it to dry in the shade. Do not al-low the seat belts to retract until theyare completely dry.

O If dirt builds up in the shoulder beltguide of the seat belt anchors, theseat belts may retract slowly. Wipe theshoulder belt guide with a clean, drycloth.

O Periodically check that the seat beltand all the metal components, such asbuckles, tongues, retractors, flexiblewires and anchors, work properly. Ifloose parts, deterioration, cuts orother damage on the seat belt web-bing is found, the entire belt assemblyshould be replaced.

PRECAUTION ON CHILDRESTRAINTS

WARNING

O Infants and small children should al-ways be placed in an appropriate childrestraint while riding in the vehicle. Fail-ure to use a child restraint can result inserious injury or death.

O Infants and small children should neverbe carried on your lap. It is not possible

SSS0099

CHILD RESTRAINTS


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

for even the strongest adult to resist theforces of a severe accident. The childcould be crushed between the adult andparts of the vehicle. Also, do not put thesame seat belt around both your childand yourself.

O Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air BagSystem, never install a rear-facing childrestraint in the front seat. An inflatingsupplemental front air bag could seri-ously injure or kill your child. A rear-facing child restraint must only be usedin the rear seat.

O INFINITI recommends that the child re-straint be installed in the rear seat. Ac-cording to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained in therear seat than in the front seat. If youmust install a front facing child restraintin the front seat, see “Child restraint in-stallation using the seat belts” in thissection.

O Improper use or improper installation ofa child restraint can increase the risk orseverity of injury for both the child andother occupants of the vehicle and canlead to serious injury or death in an acci-dent.

O Follow all of the child restraint manufac-turer’s instructions for installation anduse. When purchasing a child restraint,be sure to select one which will fit yourchild and vehicle. It may not be possibleto properly install some types of child re-straints in your vehicle.

O If the child restraint is not anchoredproperly, the risk of a child being injuredin a collision or a sudden stop greatly in-creases.

O Child restraint anchor points are de-signed to withstand only those loads im-posed by correctly fitted child restraints.Under no circumstances are they to beused for adult seat belts or harnesses.

O Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-tioned to fit the child restraint, but asupright as possible.

O After attaching the child restraint, test itbefore you place the child in it. Push itfrom side to side while holding the seatnear the LATCH attachment or by theseat belt path. Try to tug it forward andcheck to see if the belt holds the re-straint in place. The child restraintshould not move more than 1 in (25 mm).If the restraint is not secure, tighten thebelt as necessary, or put the restraint inanother seating position and test itagain. You may need to try a differentchild restraint. Not all child restraints fitin all types of vehicles.

O When your child restraint is not in use,keep it secured with the LATCH Systemor a seat belt to prevent it from beingthrown around in case of a sudden stopor accident.

SSS0100


w 06.7.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

CAUTION

Remember that a child restraint left in aclosed vehicle can become very hot. Checkthe seating surface and buckles beforeplacing your child in the child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universalchild restraint lower anchor system, re-ferred to as the Lower Anchors andTethers for CHildren System or LATCH.Some child restraints include two rigid orwebbing-mounted attachments that canbe connected to these lower anchors. Fordetails, see “Lower Anchors and Tethersfor CHildren System (LATCH)” in this sec-tion.

If you do not have a LATCH compatiblechild restraint, the vehicle seat belts canbe used. See “Child restraint installationusing the seat belts” later in this section.In general, child restraints are also de-signed to be installed with the lap portionof a lap/shoulder seat belt.

Several manufacturers offer child re-straints for infants and small children ofvarious sizes. When selecting any child

restraint, keep the following points inmind:

O Choose only a restraint with a labelcertifying that it complies with FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 orCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-dard 213.

O Check the child restraint in your ve-hicle to be sure it is compatible withthe vehicle’s seat and seat beltsystem.

O If the child restraint is compatible withyour vehicle, place your child in thechild restraint and check the variousadjustments to be sure the child re-straint is compatible with your child.Choose a child restraint that is de-signed for your child’s height andweight. Always follow all recom-mended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require that infants and smallchildren be restrained in an approved childrestraint at all times while the vehicle isbeing operated.

Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren SYSTEM (LATCH)

Your vehicle is equipped with special an-chor points that are used with Lower An-chors and Tethers for CHildren System(LATCH) compatible child restraints. Thissystem may also be referred to as theISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. Withthis system, you do not have to use a ve-hicle seat belt to secure the child re-straint.

The LATCH anchor points are provided toinstall child restraints in the rear out-board seating positions only. Do not at-tempt to install a child restraint in thecenter position using the LATCH anchors.


w 06.10.12/V35-D/V5.0 X

LATCH lower anchor pointlocations

The LATCH anchors are located at the rearof the seat cushion near the seatback. Alabel is attached to the seatback to helpyou locate the LATCH anchors.

WARNING

O Attach LATCH compatible child re-straints only at the locations shown inthe illustration. If a child restraint is notsecured properly, your child could be se-riously injured or killed in an accident.

O Do not secure a child restraint in thecenter rear seating position using theLATCH anchors. The child restraint willnot be secured properly.

O Child restraint anchor points are de-signed to withstand only those loads im-posed by correctly fitted child restraints.Under no circumstance are they to beused for adult seat belts or harnesses.

SSS0369BLATCH label location

SSS0670LATCH lower anchor location


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Installing child restraint LATCHanchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints includetwo rigid or webbing-mounted attach-ments that can be connected to two an-chors located at certain seating positionsin your vehicle. With this system, you donot have to use a vehicle seat belt to se-cure the child restraint. Check your childrestraint for a label stating that it is com-patible with LATCH. This information mayalso be in the instructions provided bythe child restraint manufacturer.

LATCH child restraints generally requirethe use of a top tether strap. See “Toptether strap child restraint” in this sectionfor installation instructions.

When installing a child restraint, carefullyread and follow the instructions in thismanual and those supplied with the childrestraint. See “Child restraint installationusing LATCH” in this section.

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILDRESTRAINT

If the manufacturer of your child restraintrequires the use of a top tether strap, itmust be secured to an anchor point.

WARNING

Child restraint anchor points are designed towithstand only those loads imposed by cor-rectly fitted child restraints. Under no cir-cumstances are they to be used for adult

SSS0643LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

SSS0644LATCH rigid attachment

SSS0282


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

seat belts or harnesses.

Top tether anchor point locations

Anchor points are located on the rear par-cel shelf.

Installing top tether strap

First, secure the child restraint with theseat belt or LATCH (rear outboard seat po-sitions only), as applicable.

Remove the anchor cover from the anchorpoint which is located directly behind thechild seat. Keep the removed cover in asecure place to prevent loss or damage.Position the top tether strap over the topof the seatback and secure it to the tetheranchor bracket that provides the straight-est installation. Tighten the strap ac-cording to the manufacturer’s instructionsto remove any slack.

If you have any questions when installinga top tether strap child restraint on therear seat, consult your INFINITI dealer fordetails.

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATIONUSING LATCH

WARNING

O Attach LATCH compatible child re-straints only at the locations shown. Forthe LATCH lower anchor locations, see“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildrenSystem (LATCH)” in this section. If achild restraint is not secured properly,your child could be seriously injured orkilled in an accident.

O The LATCH anchors are designed towithstand only those loads imposed bycorrectly fitted child restraints. Under nocircumstance are they to be used foradult seat belts or harnesses.

O Inspect the lower anchors by insertingyour fingers into the lower anchor areaand feeling to make sure there are no ob-structions over the LATCH anchors, suchas seat belt webbing or seat cushion ma-terial. The child restraint will not be se-cured properly if the LATCH anchors areobstructed.

Front-facing

Follow these steps to install a front-facingchild restraint using LATCH:

1. Position the child restraint on theseat. Always follow the child restraintmanufacturer’s instructions.

SSS0645Front facing — step 2


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-tachments to the LATCH lower an-chors.

3. The back of the child restraint shouldbe secured against the vehicle seat-back. If the seating position does nothave an adjustable head restraint andit is interfering with the proper childrestraint fit, try another seating posi-tion or a different child restraint.

4. For child restraints that are equippedwith webbing mounted attachments,remove any additional slack from theanchor attachments. Press downwardand rearward firmly in the center ofthe child restraint with your knee tocompress the vehicle seat cushion andseatback while tightening the webbingof the anchor attachments.

5. If the child restraint is equipped witha top tether strap, route the top tetherstrap and secure the tether strap tothe tether anchor point. See “Toptether strap child restraint” in thissection.

6. Before placing the child in the childrestraint, hold child restraint near theLATCH attachment and use force topush the child restraint from side toside, and tug it forward to make surethat it is securely held in place. Itshould not move more than 1 in (25mm). If it does move more than 1 in(25 mm), pull again on the anchor at-tachments to further tighten the childrestraint. If you are unable to properlysecure the restraint, move the re-straint to another seating position andtry again, or try a different child re-





w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

straint. Not all child restraints fit in alltypes of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure the child restraintis properly secured prior to each use.If the child restraint is loose, repeatsteps 3 through 6.

Rear-facing

Follow these steps to install a rear-facingchild restraint using LATCH:

1. Position the child restraint on theseat. Always follow the child restraintmanufacturer’s instructions.

2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-tachments to the LATCH lower an-chors.

SSS0648Rear facing — step 2



w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

3. For child restraints that are equippedwith webbing mounted attachments,remove any additional slack from theanchor attachments. Press downwardand rearward firmly in the center ofthe child restraint with your hand tocompress the vehicle seat cushion andseatback while tightening the webbingof the anchor attachments.

4. Before placing the child in the childrestraint, hold the child restraint nearthe LATCH attachment and use force topush the child restraint from side toside, and tug it forward to make surethat it is securely held in place. Itshould not move more than 1 in (25mm). If it does move more than 1 in(25 mm), pull again on the anchor at-tachments to further tighten the childrestraint. If you are unable to properlysecure the restraint, move the re-straint to another seating position andtry again, or try a different child re-


5. Check to make sure the child restraintis properly secured prior to each use.If the child restraint is loose, repeatsteps 3 through 4.




w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATIONUSING THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

O Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air BagSystem, never install a rear-facing childrestraint in the front passenger seat.Supplemental front air bags inflate withgreat force. A rear-facing child restraintcould be struck by the supplementalfront air bag in a crash and could seri-

ously injure or kill your child.

O INFINITI recommends that child re-straints be installed in the rear seat.However, if you must install a forwardfacing child restraint in the front pas-senger seat, move the passenger seat tothe rearmost position. Also, be sure thefront passenger air bag status light is il-luminated to indicate the passenger airbag is OFF. See “Front passenger air bagand status light” in this section for de-tails.

O The three-point seat belt in your vehicleis equipped with an automatic lockingmode retractor which must be usedwhen installing a child restraint.

O Failure to use the retractor’s lockingmode will result in the child restraint notbeing properly secured. The restraintcould tip over or otherwise be unsecuredand cause injury to the child in a suddenstop or collision. Also, it can change theoperation of the front passenger air bag.See “Front passenger air bag and statuslight” in this section.

O A child restraint with a top tether strapshould not be used in the front pas-senger seat.

The instructions in this section apply tochild restraint installation using the ve-hicle seat belts in the rear seat or thefront passenger seat.

SSS0100


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Front-facing

Follow these steps to install a front-facingchild restraint using the vehicle seat beltin the rear seat or in the front passengerseat:

1. If you must install a child restraint inthe front seat, it should be placed in afront-facing direction only. Move theseat to the rearmost position. Child re-straints for infants must be used in therear-facing direction and thereforemust not be used in the front seat.

2. Position the child restraint on the

seat. Always follow the child restraintmanufacturer’s instructions.

The back of the child restraint shouldbe secured against the vehicle seat-back. If necessary, adjust or removethe head restraint (front passengerseat only) to obtain the correct childrestraint fit. See “Head restraint ad-justment” in this section.

If the head restraint is removed, storeit in a secure place. Be sure to installthe head restraint when the child re-straint is removed. If the seating posi-tion does not have an adjustable headrestraint and it is interfering with theproper child restraint fit, try anotherseating position or a different child re-straint.

3. Route the seat belt tongue through thechild restraint and insert it into thebuckle until you hear and feel thelatch engage. Be sure to follow thechild restraint manufacturer’s instruc-tions for belt routing.

SSS0640Front facing (front passenger seat) — step 1

SSS0360BFront facing — step 3


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt isfully extended. At this time, the seatbelt retractor is in the automatic lock-ing mode (child restraint mode). It re-verts to emergency locking modewhen the seat belt is fully retracted.

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull upon the shoulder belt to remove anyslack in the belt.

6. Remove any additional slack from theseat belt; press downward and rear-ward firmly in the center of the childrestraint with your knee to compressthe vehicle seat cushion and seatbackwhile pulling up on the seat belt.

7. If the child restraint is equipped witha top tether strap, route the top tetherstrap and secure the tether strap tothe tether anchor point (rear seat in-stallation only). See “Top tether strapchild restraint” in this section. Do notinstall child restraints equipped with atop tether strap to seating positionsthat do not have a top tether anchor.





w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

8. Before placing the child in the childrestraint, hold the child restraint nearthe seat belt path and use force topush the child restraint from side toside, and tug it forward to make surethat it is securely held in place. Itshould not move more than 1 in (25mm). If it does move more than 1 in(25 mm), pull again on the shoulderbelt to further tighten the child re-straint. If you are unable to properlysecure the restraint, move the re-straint to another seating position andtry again, or try a different child re-


9. Check that the retractor is in the auto-matic locking mode (child restraintmode) by trying to pull more seat beltout of the retractor. If you cannot pullany more belt webbing out of the re-tractor, the retractor is in the auto-matic locking mode (child restraintmode).

10. Check to make sure the child restraintis properly secured prior to each use.If the seat belt is not locked, repeatsteps 3 through 8.

11. If the child restraint is installed in thefront passenger seat, turn the ignitionswitch to the ON position. The frontpassenger air bag status light

should illuminate. If this light isnot illuminated, see “Front passengerair bag and status light” in this sec-tion. Move the child restraint to an-other seating position. Have thesystem checked by an INFINITI dealer.

After the child restraint is removed andthe seat belt is fully retracted, the auto-matic locking mode (child restraint mode)is canceled.




w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Rear-facing

Follow these steps to install a rear-facingchild restraint using the vehicle seat beltin the rear seat:

1. Child restraints for infants must beused in the rear-facing direction andtherefore must not be used in the frontseat. Position the child restraint onthe seat. Always follow the restraintmanufacturer’s instructions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through thechild restraint and insert it into thebuckle until you hear and feel thelatch engage. Be sure to follow thechild restraint manufacturer’s instruc-tions for belt routing.

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt isfully extended. At this time, the seatbelt retractor is in the automatic lock-ing mode (child restraint mode). It re-verts to emergency locking modewhen the seat belt is fully retracted.

SSS0100 SSS0654Rear facing — step 2



w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull upon the shoulder belt to remove anyslack in the belt.

5. Remove any additional slack from thechild restraint; press downward andrearward firmly in the center of thechild restraint with your hand to com-press the vehicle seat cushion andseatback while pulling up on the seatbelt.

6. Before placing the child in the childrestraint, hold the child restraint nearthe seat belt path and use force topush the child restraint from side toside, and tug it forward to make surethat it is securely held in place. Itshould not move more than 1 in (25mm). If it does move more than 1 in(25 mm), pull again on the shoulderbelt to further tighten the child re-straint. If you are unable to properlysecure the restraint, move the re-straint to another rear seating positionand try again, or try a different childrestraint. Not all child restraints fit in





w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

all types of vehicles.

7. Check that the retractor is in the auto-matic locking mode (child restraintmode) by trying to pull more seat beltout of the retractor. If you cannot pullany more seat belt webbing out of theretractor, the retractor is in the auto-matic locking mode (child restraintmode).

8. Check to make sure that the child re-straint is properly secured prior toeach use. If the belt is not locked, re-peat steps 3 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed andthe seat belt fully retracted, the automaticlocking mode (child restraint mode) iscanceled.

PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTER SEATS

WARNING

O Infants and small children should al-ways be placed in an appropriate childrestraint while riding in the vehicle. Fail-ure to use a child restraint or boosterseat can result in serious injury or death.

O Infants and small children should neverbe carried on your lap. It is not possiblefor even the strongest adult to resist the

forces of a severe accident. The childcould be crushed between the adult andparts of the vehicle. Also, do not put thesame seat belt around both your childand yourself.

O INFINITI recommends that the boosterseat be installed in the rear seat. Ac-cording to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained in therear seat than in the front seat. If youmust install a booster seat in the frontseat, see “Booster seat installation” inthis section.

O A booster seat must only be installed ina seating position that has alap/shoulder belt. Failure to use a three-point type seat belt with a booster seatcan result in a serious injury in suddenstop or collision.

O Improper use or improper installation ofa booster seat can increase the risk orseverity of injury for both the child andother occupants of the vehicle and canlead to serious injury or death in anaccident.

SSS0099

BOOSTER SEATS


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

O Do not use towels, books, pillows orother items in place of a booster seat.Items such as these may move duringnormal driving or a collision and resultin serious injury or death. Booster seatsare designed to be used with alap/shoulder belt. Booster seats are de-signed to properly route the lap andshoulder portions of the seat belt overthe strongest portions of a child’s bodyto provide the maximum protectionduring a collision.

O Follow all of the booster seat manufac-turer’s instructions for installation anduse. When purchasing a booster seat, besure to select one which will fit yourchild and vehicle. It may not be possibleto properly install some types of boosterseats in your vehicle.

O If the booster seat and seat belt is notused properly, the risk of a child beinginjured in a collision or a sudden stopgreatly increases.

O Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-tioned to fit the booster seat, but as up-

right as possible.

O After placing the child in the boosterseat and fastening the seat belt, makesure the shoulder portion of the belt isaway from the child’s face and neck andthe lap portion of the belt does not crossthe abdomen.

O Do not put the shoulder belt behind thechild or under the child’s arm. If youmust install a booster seat in the frontseat, see “Booster seat installation”later in this section.

O When your booster seat is not in use,keep it secured with a seat belt to pre-vent it from being thrown around in caseof a sudden stop or accident.

CAUTION

Remember that a booster seat left in aclosed vehicle can become very hot. Checkthe seating surface and buckles before plac-ing your child in the booster seat.

Booster seats of various sizes are offeredby several manufacturers. When selectingany booster seat, keep the followingpoints in mind:

O Choose only a booster seat with alabel certifying that it complies withFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213.

LRS0455


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

O Check the booster seat in your vehicleto be sure it is compatible with the ve-hicle’s seat and seat belt system.

O Make sure the child’s head will beproperly supported by the boosterseat or vehicle seat. The seat backmust be at or above the center of thechild’s ears. For example, if a low backbooster seat q1 is chosen, the vehicleseat back must be at or above thecenter of the child’s ears. If the seatback is lower than the center of thechild’s ears, a high back booster seatq2 should be used.

O If the booster seat is compatible withyour vehicle, place your child in thebooster seat and check the variousadjustments to be sure the boosterseat is compatible with your child. Al-ways follow all recommended proce-dures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require that infants and smallchildren be restrained in an approved childrestraint at all times while the vehicle isbeing operated.

The instructions in this section apply tobooster seat installation in the rear seats

or the front passenger seat.

BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION

WARNING

INFINITI recommends that booster seat beinstalled in the rear seat. However, if youmust install a booster seat in the front pas-senger seat, move the passenger’s seat tothe rearmost position.

CAUTION

Do not use the lap/shoulder belt automaticlocking mode when using a booster seatwith the seat belts.

Follow these steps to install a boosterseat in the rear seat or in the front pas-senger seat:

LRS0453 LRS0464


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. If you must install a booster seat in thefront seat, move the seat to the rear-most position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat.Only place it in a front facing direc-tion. Always follow the booster seatmanufacturer’s instructions.

3. The booster seat should be positionedon the vehicle seat so that it is stable.If necessary, adjust or remove thehead restraint to obtain the correctbooster seat fit. See “Head restraintadjustment” earlier in this section. Ifthe head restraint is removed, store itin a secure place. Be sure to installthe head restraint when the boosterseat is removed. If the seating posi-tion does not have an adjustable headrestraint and it is interfering with theproper booster seat fit, try anotherseating position or a different boosterseat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seatbelt low and snug on the child’s hips.Be sure to follow the booster seatmanufacturer’s instructions for ad-justing the belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of theseat belt toward the retractor to takeup extra slack. Be sure the shoulderbelt is positioned across the top,middle portion of the child’s shoulder.Be sure to follow the booster seatmanufacturer’s instructions for ad-justing the belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in-

SSS0640 LRS0452Outboard position

LRS0454Front seat


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

structions for properly fastening a seatbelt shown in the “Three-point seatbelt with retractor” earlier in this sec-tion.

7. If the booster seat is installed in thefront passenger seat, turn the ignitionswitch to the ON position. The frontpassenger air bag status light

may or may not illuminate de-pending on the size of the child andthe type of booster seat used. See“Front passenger air bag and statuslight” in this section.

PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINT SYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)section contains important informationconcerning the driver and passenger frontimpact supplemental air bags (INFINITI ad-vanced air bag system), front seat side-impact supplemental air bags, curtainside-impact air bags and front seat pre-tensioner seat belts.Supplemental front-impact air bag system:The INFINITI advanced air bag system canhelp cushion the impact force to the headand chest of the driver and front pas-senger in certain frontal collisions.Supplemental side-impact air bag system:This system can help cushion the impactforce to the chest area of the driver andfront passenger in certain side impact col-lisions. The front seat side-impact supple-mental air bags are designed to inflate onthe side where the vehicle is impacted.Supplemental curtain side-impact air bagsystem: This system can help cushion theimpact force to the head of occupants infront and rear outboard seating positionsin certain side impact collisions. The cur-tain side-impact air bags are designed toinflate on the side where the vehicle isimpacted.

SSS0367

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

These supplemental restraint systems aredesigned to supplement the crash protec-tion provided by the driver and passengerseat belts and are not a substitute forthem. Seat belts should always be cor-rectly worn and the occupant seated asuitable distance away from the steeringwheel, instrument panel and door fin-ishers. (See “Seat belts” earlier in thissection for instructions and precautionson seat belt usage.)

The supplemental air bags operate onlywhen the ignition switch is in the ON orSTART position.

After turning the ignition switch to the ONposition, the supplemental air bagwarning light illuminates. The supple-mental air bag warning light will turn offafter about 7 seconds if the systems areoperational.

WARNING

O The supplemental front air bags ordi-narily will not inflate in the event of aside impact, rear impact, rollover, orlower severity frontal collision. Alwayswear your seat belts to help reduce therisk or severity of injury in various kindsof accidents.

O The front passenger air bag will not in-flate if the passenger air bag status light

is lit or if the front passenger seat is un-occupied. See “Front passenger air bagand status light” later in this section.

O The seat belts and the supplemental frontair bags are most effective when you aresitting well back and upright in the seat.The front air bags inflate with great force.Even with the INFINITI advanced air bagsystem, if you are unrestrained, leaningforward, sitting sideways or out of positionin any way, you are at greater risk of

SSS0131D


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

injury or death in a crash. You may alsoreceive serious or fatal injuries from thesupplemental front air bag if you are upagainst it when it inflates. Always sitback against the seat back and as faraway as practical from the steeringwheel or instrument panel. Always usethe seat belts.

O The driver and front passenger seat beltbuckles are equipped with sensors thatdetect if the seat belts are fastened. Theadvanced air bag system monitors theseverity of a collision and seat beltusage then inflates the air bags. Failureto properly wear seat belts can increasethe risk or severity of injury in an acci-dent.

O The front passenger seat is equippedwith an occupant classification sensor(pressure sensor) that turns the frontpassenger air bag OFF under some con-ditions. This sensor is only used in thisseat. Failure to be properly seated andwearing the seat belt can increase therisk or severity of injury in an accident.

See “Front Passenger air bag and statuslight” later in this section.

O Keep hands on the outside of thesteering wheel. Placing them inside thesteering wheel rim could increase therisk that they are injured when thesupplemental front air bag inflates.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

SSS0132D SSS0006

SSS0007


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

O Never let children ride unrestrained orextend their hands or face out of thewindow. Do not attempt to hold them inyour lap or arms. Some examples of dan-gerous riding positions are shown in theprevious illustrations.

O Children may be severely injured orkilled when the supplemental front airbags, side air bags or curtain side-impact air bags inflate if they are notproperly restrained. Pre-teens and chil-dren should be properly restrained inthe rear seat, if possible.

O Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air BagSystem, never install a rear-facing childrestraint in the front seat. An inflatingsupplemental front air bag could seri-ously injure or kill your child. See “Childrestraints” earlier in this section for de-tails.

SSS0008

SSS0009

SSS0099

SSS0100


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

Supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag:

O The supplemental side air bag and cur-tain side-impact air bag ordinarily willnot inflate in the event of a frontal im-pact, rear impact, rollover or lower se-verity side collision. Always wear yourseat belts to help reduce the risk or se-verity of injury in various kinds ofaccidents.

O The seat belts, the supplemental side airbags and curtain side-impact air bagsare most effective when you are sittingwell back and upright in the seat. Theside air bag and curtain side-impact airbag inflate with great force. Do not allowanyone to place their hand, leg or facenear the side air bag on the side of theseatback of the front seat or near theside roof rails. Do not allow anyone sit-ting in the front seats or rear outboardseats to extend their hand out of thewindow or lean against the door. Some

examples of dangerous riding positionsare shown in the previous illustrations.

O When sitting in the rear seat, do not holdonto the seatback of the front seat. If theside air bag inflates, you may be seri-ously injured. Be especially careful withchildren, who should always be properlyrestrained.

O Do not use seat covers on the front seat-backs. They may interfere with supple-mental side air bag inflation.

SSS0059A SSS0188A SSS0140


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

SSS0159 SSS0162


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Crash zone sensor2. Supplemental front air bag modules3. Supplemental side air bag modules4. Occupant classification sensor (pres-

sure sensor)

5. Supplemental curtain side-impact airbags

6. Supplemental curtain side-impact airbag modules

7. Diagnosis sensor unit

8. Seat belt pre-tensioner9. Satellite sensors10. Occupant classification system control

unit

INFINITI ADVANCED AIR BAGSYSTEM (front seats)

This vehicle is equipped with the INFINITIadvanced air bag system for the driverand front passenger seats. This system isdesigned to meet certification require-ments under U.S. regulations. It is alsopermitted in Canada. However, all of theinformation, cautions and warnings in thismanual still apply and must be followed.

The driver supplemental air bag is locatedin the center of the steering wheel. Thefront passenger supplemental air bag ismounted in the dashboard above theglove box. The supplemental front airbags are designed to inflate in higher se-verity frontal collisions, although theymay inflate if the forces in another type ofcollision are similar to those of a higherseverity frontal impact. They may not in-flate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicledamage (or lack of it) is not always an in-dication of proper supplemental air bagoperation.

SSS0418


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

The INFINITI advanced air bag system hasdual stage inflators. The system monitorsinformation from the crash zone sensor,the diagnosis sensor unit, seat beltbuckle switches, occupant classificationsensor (pressure sensor) and passengerseat belt tension sensor. Inflator opera-tion is based on the severity of a collisionand seat belt usage for the driver. For thefront passenger, it additionally monitorsthe weight of an occupant or object onthe seat and seat belt tension. Based oninformation from the sensors, only onefront air bag may inflate in a crash, de-pending on the crash severity andwhether the front occupants are belted orunbelted. Additionally, the front pas-senger air bag may be automaticallyturned OFF under some conditions, de-pending on the weight detected on thepassenger seat and how the seat belt isused. If the front passenger air bag isOFF, the passenger air bag status lightwill be illuminated (if the seat is unoccu-pied, the light will not be illuminated, butthe air bag will be off). See “Front pas-senger air bag and status light” later inthis section for further details. One frontair bag inflating does not indicate im-proper performance of the system.

If you have any questions about your air

bag system, contact INFINITI or an INFINITIdealer. If you are considering modificationof your vehicle due to a disability, youmay also contact INFINITI. Contact infor-mation is contained in the front of thisOwner’s Manual.

When a supplemental front air bag in-flates, a fairly loud noise may be heard,followed by the release of smoke. Thissmoke is not harmful and does not indi-cate a fire. Care should be taken not to in-hale it, as it may cause irritation andchoking. Those with a history of a breath-ing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

Supplemental front air bags, along withthe use of seat belts, help to cushion theimpact force on the head and chest of thefront occupants. They can help save livesand reduce serious injuries. However, aninflating front air bag may cause facialabrasions or other injuries. Front air bagsdo not provide restraint to the lowerbody.

Even with INFINITI advanced air bags, seatbelts should be correctly worn and thedriver and passenger seated upright asfar as practical away from the steeringwheel or instrument panel. The supple-

mental front air bags inflate quickly in or-der to help protect the front occupants.Because of this, the force of the front airbag inflating can increase the risk of in-jury if the occupant is too close to, or isagainst, the air bag module during infla-tion.

The air bag will deflate quickly after a col-lision.

The supplemental front air bags operateonly when the ignition switch is in the ONor START position.

After turning the ignition switch to the ONposition, the supplemental air bagwarning light illuminates. The supple-mental air bag warning light will turn offafter about 7 seconds if the system is op-erational.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Front passenger air bag andstatus light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed toautomatically turn OFF under some condi-tions. Read this section carefully to learnhow it operates. Proper use of the seat, seatbelt and child restraints is necessary formost effective protection. Failure to follow

all instructions in this manual concerningthe use of seats, seat belts and child re-straints can increase the risk or severity ofinjury in an accident.

Status light:

The front passenger air bag status lightis located in the center display. The

light operates as follows:

O Unoccupied passenger seat: The isOFF and the front passenger air bag isOFF and will not inflate in a crash.

O Passenger seat occupied by a smalladult, child or child restraint as out-lined in this section: The illumi-nates to indicate that the front pas-senger air bag is OFF and will not in-flate in a crash.

O Occupied passenger seat and the pas-senger meets the conditions outlinedin this section: The light is OFF toindicate that the front passenger airbag is operational.

Front passenger air bag:

The front passenger air bag is designed toautomatically turn OFF when the vehicle is

operated under some conditions as de-scribed below in accordance with U.S.regulations. If the front passenger air bagis OFF, it will not inflate in a crash. Thedriver air bag and other air bags in yourvehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to helpreduce the risk of injury or death from aninflating air bag to certain front passengerseat occupants, such as children, by re-quiring the air bag to be automaticallyturned OFF. Certain sensors are used tomeet the requirements.

One sensor used is the occupant classifi-cation sensor (pressure sensor). It is inthe bottom of the front passenger seatcushion and is designed to detect an oc-cupant and objects on the seat by weight.It works together with seat belt sensorsdescribed later. For example, if a child isin the front passenger seat, the advancedair bag system is designed to turn thepassenger air bag OFF in accordance withthe regulations. Also, if a child restraint ofthe type specified in the regulations is onthe seat, its weight and the child’s weightcan be detected and cause the air bag toturn OFF. Occupant classification sensoroperation can vary depending on the frontpassenger seat belt sensors.

SSS0367Front passenger air bag status light


w 06.10.26/V35-D/V5.0 X

The front passenger seat belt sensors aredesigned to detect if the seat belt isbuckled and the amount of tension on theseat belt, such as when it is in the auto-matic locking mode (child restraint mode).Based on the weight on the seat detectedby the occupant classification sensor andthe belt tension detected on the seat belt,the INFINITI advanced air bag system de-termines whether the front passenger airbag should be automatically turned OFFas required by the regulations.

Front passenger seat adult occupants whoare properly seated and using the seatbelt as outlined in this manual should notcause the passenger air bag to be auto-matically turned OFF. For small adults itmay be turned OFF, however, if the occu-pant takes his/her weight off the seatcushion (for example, by not sitting up-right, by sitting on an edge of the seat, orby otherwise being out of position), thiscould cause the sensor to turn the air bagOFF. In addition, if the occupant improp-erly uses the seat belt in the automaticlocking mode (child restraint mode), thiscould cause the air bag to be turned OFF.Always be sure to be seated and wearingthe seat belt properly for the most effec-tive protection by the seat belt andsupplemental air bag.

INFINITI recommends that pre-teens andchildren be properly restrained in a rearseat. INFINITI also recommends that ap-propriate child restraints and boosterseats be properly installed in a rear seat.If this is not possible, the occupant clas-sification sensor and seat belt sensorsare designed to operate as describedabove to turn the front passenger air bagOFF for specified child restraints as re-quired by the regulations. Failing to prop-erly secure child restrains and to use theautomatic locking mode (child restraintmode) may allow the restraint to tip ormove in an accident or sudden stop. Thiscan also result in the passenger air baginflating in a crash instead of being OFF.See “Child restraints” earlier in this sec-tion for proper use and installation.

If the front passenger seat is not occu-pied, the passenger air bag is designednot to inflate in a crash. However, heavyobjects placed on the seat could result inair bag inflation, because of the object’sweight detected by the occupant classifi-cation sensor. Other conditions could alsoresult in air bag inflation, such as if achild is standing on the seat, or if twochildren are on the seat, contrary to theinstructions in this manual. Always be

sure that you and all vehicle occupantsare seated and restrained properly.

Using the passenger air bag status light,you can monitor when the front pas-senger air bag is automatically turned OFFwith the seat occupied. The light will notilluminate when the front passenger seatis unoccupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but thepassenger air bag status light is illumi-nated (indicating that the air bag is OFF),it could be that the person is a smalladult, or is not sitting on the seat prop-erly or is not using the seat belt properly.

If a child restraint must be used in thefront seat, the passenger air bag statuslight may or may not be illuminated, de-pending on the size of the child and thetype of child restraint being used. If theair bag status light is not illuminated (in-dicating that the air bag might inflate in acrash), it could be that the child restraintor seat belt is not being used properly.Make sure that the child restraint is in-stalled properly, the seat belt is usedproperly and the occupant is positionedproperly. If the air bag status light is stillnot illuminated, reposition the occupantor child restraint in a rear seat.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

If the passenger air bag status light willnot illuminate even though you believethat the child restraint, the seat belts andthe occupant are properly positioned, thesystem may be sensing an unoccupiedseat (in which case the air bag is OFF).Your INFINITI dealer can check that thesystem is OFF by using a spacial tool.However, until you have confirmed withyour dealer that your airbag is workingproperly, reposition the occupant or childrestraint in a rear seat.

If a malfunction occurs in the front pas-senger air bag system, the supplementalair bag warning light , located in themeter and gauges area will blink. Havethe system checked by an INFINITI dealer.

Other supplemental front air bagprecautions

WARNING

O Do not place any objects on the steeringwheel pad or on the instrument panel.Also, do not place any objects betweenany occupant and the steering wheel orinstrument panel. Such objects may be-come dangerous projectiles and causeinjury if the supplemental front air baginflates.

O Immediately after inflation, several frontair bag system components will be hot.Do not touch them; you may severelyburn yourself.

O No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring of thesupplemental air bag system. This is toprevent accidental inflation of thesupplemental air bag or damage to thesupplemental air bag system.

O Do not make unauthorized changes toyour vehicle’s electrical system, suspen-

sion system or front end structure.

This could affect proper operation of thesupplemental front air bag system.

O Tampering with the supplemental frontair bag system may result in serious per-sonal injury. Tampering includeschanges to the steering wheel and theinstrument panel assembly by placingmaterial over the steering wheel pad andabove the instrument panel or by install-ing additional trim material around theair bag system.

O Modifying or tampering with the frontpassenger seat may result in seriouspersonal injury. For example, do notchange the front seats by placing mate-rial on the seat cushion or by installingadditional trim material, such as seatcovers, on the seat that is not specifi-cally designed to assure proper air bagoperation. Additionally, do not stow anyobjects under the front passenger seator the seat cushion and seatback. Suchobjects may interfere with the proper op-eration of the occupant classification


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

sensor (pressure sensor).

O No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring of theseat belt system. This may affect thesupplemental front air bag system. Tam-pering with the seat belt system may re-sult in serious personal injury.

O Work on and around the supplementalfront air bag system should be done byan INFINITI dealer. Installation of electri-cal equipment should also be done by anINFINITI dealer. The Supplemental Re-straint System (SRS) wiring should notbe modified or disconnected. Unautho-rized electrical test equipment and prob-ing devices should not be used on the airbag system.

O A cracked windshield should be re-placed immediately by a qualified repairfacility. A cracked windshield could af-fect the function of the supplemental airbag system.

O The SRS wiring harness connectors areyellow and orange for easy

identification.

When selling your vehicle, we requestthat you inform the buyer about thesupplemental front air bag system andguide the buyer to the appropriate sec-tions in this Owner’s Manual.

SUPPLEMENTAL SIDE AIR BAG ANDCURTAIN SIDE-IMPACT AIR BAGSYSTEMS

The supplemental side air bags are lo-cated in the outside of the seatback ofthe front seats. The supplemental curtainside-impact air bags are located in theside roof rails. These systems are de-signed to meet voluntary guidelines tohelp reduce the risk of injury to out-of-position occupants. However, all of the in-formation, cautions and warnings in thismanual still apply and must be followed.The supplemental side air bags and cur-

SSS0190


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

tain side-impact air bags are designed toinflate in higher severity side collisionson the side of the vehicle impacted, al-though they may inflate if the forces inanother type of collision are similar tothose of a higher severity side impact.They are designed to inflate on the sidewhere the vehicle is impacted. They maynot inflate in certain side collisions.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not al-ways an indication of proper supple-mental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag operation.

When the supplemental side air bag andcurtain side-impact air bag inflate, a fairlyloud noise may be heard, followed by re-lease of smoke. This smoke is not harmfuland does not indicate a fire. Care shouldbe taken not to inhale it, as it may causeirritation and choking. Those with a his-tory of a breathing condition should getfresh air promptly.

Supplemental side air bags, along with theuse of seat belts, help to cushion the im-pact force on the chest of the front occu-pants. Curtain side-impact air bags help tocushion the impact force to the head of oc-cupants in the front and rear outboardseating positions. They can help save livesand reduce serious injuries. However, aninflating side air bag, or curtain side-

impact air bag may cause abrasions orother injuries. Supplemental side air bagsand curtain side-impact air bags do notprovide restraint to the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly wornand the driver and passenger seated up-right as far as practical away from thesupplemental side air bag. Rear seat pas-sengers should be seated as far away aspractical from the door finishers and sideroof rails. The side air bags and curtainside-impact air bag inflate quickly inorder to help protect the front occupants.Because of this, the force of the side airbag and curtain side-impact air bag inflat-ing can increase the risk of injury if theoccupant is too close to, or is against,these air bag modules during inflation.The side air bag and curtain side-impactair bag will deflate quickly after the colli-sion is over.

The supplemental side air bags and cur-tain side-impact air bags operate onlywhen the ignition switch is in the ON orSTART position.

After turning the ignition switch to the ONposition, the supplemental air bagwarning light illuminates. The air bagwarning light will turn off after about 7 sec-onds if the systems are operational.

WARNING

O Do not place any objects near the seat-back of the front seats. Also, do notplace any objects (an umbrella, bag,etc.) between the front door finisher andthe front seat. Such objects may becomedangerous projectiles and cause injury ifthe side air bag inflates.

O Right after inflation, several side air bagand curtain side-impact air bag systemcomponents will be hot. Do not touchthem; you may severely burn yourself.

O No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring of theside air bag and curtain side-impact airbag system. This is to prevent accidentalinflation of the side air bag and curtainside-impact air bag or damage to theside air bag and curtain side-impact airbag system.

O Do not make unauthorized changes toyour vehicle’s electrical system, suspen-sion system or side panel. This


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

could affect proper operation of thesupplemental side air bag and curtainside-impact air bag system.

O Tampering with the supplementalsystem may result in serious personalinjury. For example, do not change thefront seats by placing material near theseatback or by installing additional trimmaterial, such as seat covers, aroundthe side air bag.

O Work around and on the side air bag andcurtain side-impact air bag systemshould be done by an INFINITI dealer. In-stallation of electrical equipment shouldalso be done by an INFINITI dealer. TheSRS wiring harnesses* should not bemodified or disconnected. Unauthorizedelectrical test equipment and probingdevices should not be used on the sideair bag system.

* The SRS wiring harness connectors areyellow and orange for easy identifica-tion.

When selling your vehicle, we requestthat you inform the buyer about the sideair bag and curtain side-impact air bagsystem and guide the buyer to the appro-priate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

Pre-tensioner seat belt system(front seats)

WARNING

O The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot be re-used after activation. It must be replacedtogether with the retractor and buckleas a unit.

O If the vehicle becomes involved in a fron-tal collision but the pre-tensioner is notactivated, be sure to have the pre-tensioner system checked and, if neces-sary, replaced by an INFINITI dealer.

O No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring of thepre-tensioner seat belt system. This is toprevent accidental activation of the pre-tensioner seat belt or damage to the pre-tensioner seat belt operation. Tam-pering with the pre-tensioner seat

belt system may result in serious per-sonal injury.

O Work around and on the pre-tensionersystem should be done by an INFINITIdealer. Installation of electrical equip-ment should also be done by an INFINITIdealer. Unauthorized electrical testequipment and probing devices shouldnot be used on the pre-tensioner seatbelt system.

O If you need to dispose of the pre-tensioner or scrap the vehicle, contactan INFINITI dealer. Correct pre-tensionerdisposal procedures are set forth in theappropriate INFINITI Service Manual. In-correct disposal procedures could causepersonal injury.

The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt sys-tem activates in conjunction with the frontsupplemental air bag systems. Workingwith the seat belt retractor, it helpstighten the seat belt when the vehicle be-comes involved in certain types of colli-sions, helping to restrain front seat occu-pants.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

The pre-tensioner is encased with theseat belt’s retractor. These seat belts areused the same as conventional seat belts.

When the pre-tensioner seat belt acti-vates, smoke is released and a loud noisemay be heard. This smoke is not harmfuland does not indicate a fire. Care shouldbe taken not to inhale it, as it may causeirritation and choking. Those with a his-tory of a breathing condition should getfresh air promptly.

If any abnormality occurs in the pre-tensioner seat belt system, the supple-mental air bag warning light will notcome on, will flash intermittently or willturn on for 7 seconds and remain on afterthe ignition switch has been turned to theON or START position. In this case, thepre-tensioner seat belt may not functionproperly. They must be checked and re-paired. Take your vehicle to an INFINITIdealer.

When selling your vehicle, we requestthat you inform the buyer about the pre-tensioner seat belt system and guide thebuyer to the appropriate sections in thisOwner’s Manual.

q1 SRS air bag warning labelsThe warning labels are located on thesurface of the sun visors.

q2 SRS side-impact air bag warning labelThe warning label is located on theside of the passenger’s side centerpillar.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNINGLABELS

Warning labels about the supplementalfront air bag and supplemental side airbag systems are placed in the vehicle asshown in the illustration.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNINGLIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,displaying in the instrument panel,monitors the circuits of the supplementalfront air bag, supplemental side air bagand curtain side-impact air bag and pre-tensioner seat belt systems. The circuitsmonitored by the air bag warning light arethe diagnosis sensor unit, satellite sen-sors, crash zone sensor, front air bagmodules, side air bag modules, curtainside-impact air bag modules, pre-tensioner seat belts and all related wiring.

SSS0330 SPA1097


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

When the ignition key is in the ON orSTART position, the supplemental air bagwarning light illuminates for about 7 sec-onds and then turns off. This means thesystem is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur,the supplemental front air bag, supple-mental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag, and pre-tensioner seatbelt systems need servicing:

O The supplemental air bag warninglight remains on after approximately 7seconds.

O The supplemental air bag warninglight flashes intermittently.

O The supplemental air bag warninglight does not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the supplementalfront air bags, supplemental side airbags, curtain side-impact air bag or pre-tensioner seat belt systems may not oper-ate properly. They must be checked andrepaired. Take your vehicle to the nearestINFINITI dealer.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light ison, it could mean that the supplementalfront air bag, supplemental side air bag, cur-tain side-impact air bag systems and/or pre-tensioner seat belt systems will not operatein an accident. To help avoid injury to your-self or others, have your vehicle checked byan INFINITI dealer as soon as possible.

REPAIR AND REPLACEMENTPROCEDURE

The supplemental front air bags, supple-mental side air bags, curtain side-impactair bags and pre-tensioner seat belts aredesigned to activate on a one-time-onlybasis. As a reminder, unless it is dam-aged, the supplemental air bag warninglight remains illuminated after inflationhas occurred. Repair and replacement ofthese systems should be done only by anINFINITI dealer.

When maintenance work is required onthe vehicle, the supplemental front airbags, side air bags, curtain side-impactair bags, pre-tensioner seat belts and re-

lated parts should be pointed out to theperson performing the maintenance. Theignition switch should always be in theLOCK position when working under thehood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING

O Once a supplemental front air bag,supplemental side air bag or curtainside-impact air bag has inflated, the airbag module will not function again andmust be replaced. Additionally, if any ofthe supplemental front air bags inflate,the activated pre-tensioner seat beltsmust also be replaced. The air bagmodule and pre-tensioner seat beltsystem should be replaced by anINFINITI dealer. The air bag module andpre-tensioner seat belt system cannotbe repaired.

O The supplemental front air bag, side airbag and curtain side-impact air bag sys-tems, and the pre-tensioner seat beltsystem should be inspected by anINFINITI dealer if there is any damage tothe front end or side portion of thevehicle.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

O If you need to dispose of these supple-mental systems or scrap the vehicle,contact an INFINITI dealer.

Correct disposal procedures are setforth in the appropriate INFINITI ServiceManual. Incorrect disposal procedurescould cause personal injury.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

MEMO


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel .............................................. 2-2Meters and gauges........................................... 2-3

Speedometer and odometer ........................ 2-3Tachometer ................................................. 2-4Engine coolant temperature gauge .............. 2-4Fuel gauge .................................................. 2-5

Compass display .............................................. 2-6Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders......................................................... 2-9

Checking bulbs ........................................... 2-9Warning lights ........................................... 2-9Indicator lights .......................................... 2-14Audible reminders ..................................... 2-16

Security systems............................................. 2-16Vehicle security system ............................. 2-16INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System .......... 2-18

Windshield wiper and washer switch .............. 2-19Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch ............................................................ 2-20Headlight and turn signal switch .................... 2-20

Xenon headlights ...................................... 2-20Headlight switch ........................................ 2-21Turn signal switch ..................................... 2-24Fog light switch......................................... 2-24

Hazard warning flasher switch........................ 2-24Horn ............................................................... 2-25Heated seats................................................... 2-25Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch ....... 2-27Clock .............................................................. 2-27

Adjusting the time..................................... 2-27Power outlet ................................................... 2-28Cigarette lighter and ashtray .......................... 2-28

Front ......................................................... 2-28Rear .......................................................... 2-29

Storage........................................................... 2-29Instrument pocket (except for navigationsystem equipped models) ......................... 2-29Sunglasses holder ................................... 2-30Cup holder ................................................ 2-30Glove box.................................................. 2-32Upper glove box (except for navigationsystem equipped models).......................... 2-33Console box .............................................. 2-34Card holder (driver’s side) ......................... 2-35Coat hook ................................................. 2-36Stowing golf bags ..................................... 2-36

Windows......................................................... 2-36Power windows ......................................... 2-36

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Automatic adjusting function..................... 2-38Sunroof (if so equipped)................................. 2-38

Automatic sunroof ..................................... 2-38Interior lights ................................................. 2-40

Room light ................................................ 2-40Map lights ................................................. 2-41

Vanity mirror light........................................... 2-41Trunk light...................................................... 2-42HomeLink Universal Transceiver (if soequipped) ....................................................... 2-42

Programming HomeLink ........................... 2-43Programming HomeLink for Canadiancustomers ................................................. 2-44Operating the HomeLink UniversalTransceiver................................................ 2-44Programming trouble-diagnosis................. 2-44Clearing the programmed information ....... 2-45Reprogramming a single HomeLinkbutton ....................................................... 2-45If your vehicle is stolen ............................. 2-45

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Headlight, fog light and turn signalswitch

2. Security indicator light3. Steering wheel switch for audio control

and/or steering wheel switch for

Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System(if so equipped)

4. Driver supplemental air bag/Horn5. Meters/gauges6. Cruise control main/set switch7. Windshield wiper/washer switch

8. Center ventilator9. Center display - Compass, Air condi-

tioner, Ambient temperature, Frontpassenger air bag status light

10. Rear window and outside mirror de-fogger switch

11. Heater/air conditioner control12. Clock13. Navigation system* (if so equipped)14. Passenger supplemental air bag15. Upper glove box (except for Naviga-

tion system equipped models)16. Side ventilator17. Hood lock release handle18. Trunk lid release switch19. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off

switch20. Instrument brightness control21. Outside mirror remote control switch22. Fuse box23. Electric steering column control (if so

equipped)24. Manual steering column control25. Ignition switch/steering lock26. Audio system27. Ashtray/Cigarette lighter28. Heated seat switch29. Hazard warning flasher switch30. Glove box*: Refer to the separate Navigation System

Owner’s Manual.

SSI0276

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Warning/Indicator lights2. Tachometer3. Automatic transmission position indi-

cator (AT models)/Manual transmis-sion up-shift indicator (MT models)

4. Speedometer

5. Engine coolant temperature gauge

6. Trip odometer reset switch

7. Odometer (Total/Twin trip)/Up-shift in-dicator setting (MT models)

8. Fuel gauge

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

Odometer/Twin trip odometer/Up-shift indicator setting (MTmodels)

The odometer q1 /twin trip odometer orup-shift indicator setting (MT models) q2are displayed when the ignition switch isin the ON position.

SSI0075

SIC2559

METERS AND GAUGES

Instruments and controls 2-3

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

The odometer records the total distancethe vehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the dis-tance of individual trips.

Changing the display:

Pushing the trip odometer reset switch q3changes the display as follows.

AT models:

TRIP A → TRIP B → TRIP A

MT models:

TRIP A → TRIP B → Up-shift indicator set-ting mode → TRIP A

See “Driving the vehicle” in the “5. Start-ing and driving” section for the use of theup-shift indicator.

Resetting the trip odometer:

Pushing the trip odometer reset switch formore than 1 second resets the trip odom-eter to zero.

TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed inrevolutions per minute (rpm). Do not revthe engine into the red zone qA .

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the redzone, shift to a higher gear. Operating theengine in the red zone may cause serious en-gine damage.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREGAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolanttemperature.

The engine coolant temperature is withinthe normal range qA when the gaugeneedle points within the zone shown inthe illustration.

The engine coolant temperature will varywith the outside air temperature and driv-ing conditions.

SIC2560 SIC2561


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates engine coolant tem-perature near the hot (H) of the normalrange, reduce vehicle speed to decreasetemperature. If gauge is over the normalrange, stop the vehicle as soon as safelypossible. If the engine is overheated, contin-ued operation of the vehicle may seriouslydamage the engine. See “If your vehicleoverheats” in the “6. In case of emergency”section for immediate action required.

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuellevel in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during brak-ing, turning, acceleration, or going up ordown hill.

The gauge needle is designed to move tothe E (Empty) position when the ignitionkey is turned to the OFF position.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-ters the E (Empty) position.

The low fuel warning light comes on whenthe fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soonas it is convenient, preferably before thegauge reaches the E (Empty) position.There will be a small reserve of fuel in thetank when the fuel gauge needle reachesthe E (Empty) position.

The indicates that the fuel-filler dooris located on the passenger’s side of thevehicle.

CAUTION

O If the vehicle runs out of fuel, themalfunction indicator light (MIL)

may come on. Refuel as soon as pos-sible. After a few driving trips, the

light should turn off. If the light re-

mains on after a few driving trips, havethe vehicle inspected by an INFINITIdealer.

O For additional information, see “Mal-function indicator light (MIL)” later inthis section.

SIC2562


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

The compass is located in the center dis-play.

Push COMP switch qA to turn the displayon or off when the ignition switch is inthe ON position. The heading directionwill be displayed.

N: north

E: east

S: south

W: west

C: vehicle direction

The above example shows the displaychanges from “East” to “East-southeast”.

If the compass unit does not receive anycorrect signal for 10 minutes, the com-pass will display the bar “-- -- --”. Havethe vehicle checked by an INFINITI dealer.

SIC2563

COMPASS DISPLAY


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Zone variation change procedure

The difference between magnetic northand geographical north is known as vari-ance. In some areas, this difference cansometimes be great enough to causefalse compass readings. Follow these in-structions to set the variance for your par-ticular location if this happens:

1. Establish your location on the zonemap qA . Record your zone number.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON po-sition while pushing the COMP switch.

3. Continue to push the COMP switch formore than 5 seconds until the currentzone entry number is displayed on thecompass display.

If any operations are not carried outfor more than 5 seconds, the displayshows direction as normal.

4. Push the COMP switch repeatedly untilthe new zone entry number is dis-played.

Once the desired zone number is dis-played, stop pushing the COMP switchand the display will show compass direc-tion within a few seconds.

SIC2243A


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

If a magnet is located near the driver sideinstrument panel (the sensor is located in-side) or the vehicle is driven where the ter-restrial magnetism is disturbed, the com-pass display may not indicate the correctdirection.

O The compass may not display correctlyat the following places:

— under a bridge

— among buildings

— on an iron bridge

— inside a tunnel

— above a subway

— on a railway crossing

— in an underground parking lot

— near a huge vehicle

— near a transformer substationIf you carry out correction procedureat one of the above places, the proce-dure may not be completed correctly.

O If air conditioner fan speed ismaximum, the compass display mayshake. This is normal. Reduce the fanspeed to avoid shaking the display.

Correction functions of thecompass display

If the direction is not shown correctly,carry out the correction procedure below.

1. Push the COMP switch for about 10seconds. The direction bar startsblinking.

2. Turn off electrical equipment such aslights, hazard indicator, air condi-tioner, etc. Then drive the vehicleslowly (less than 3 MPH (5 km/h)) andturn the vehicle one or more times inan open and safe area. When the com-pass displays the direction, the proce-dure is completed.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

or Anti-lock Braking System(ABS) warning light

Low tire pressure warning light Cruise set switch indicator light

Automatic transmission check warninglight

Low washer fluid warning light Front passenger air bag status light

or Brake warning lightP position selecting warning light (forIntelligent Key system)

High beam indicator light (Blue)

Charge warning lightRear Active Steer (RAS) warning light (ifso equipped)

Malfunction indicator light (MIL)

Door open warning light Seat belt warning light Slip indicator light

Engine oil pressure warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Intelligent Key warning light (for Intelli-gent Key system)

Automatic transmission position indicatorlight

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indica-tor light

Low fuel warning light Cruise main switch indicator light

CHECKING BULBSApply the parking brake and turn the igni-tion key to ON without starting the en-gine. The following lights will come on:

, or , , ,

The following lights come on briefly andthen go off:

, or , , , ,, ,

If any light fails to come on, it may indi-cate a burned-out bulb or an open circuitin the electrical system. Have the systemrepaired promptly.

WARNING LIGHTS

or Anti-lock BrakingSystem (ABS)warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON po-sition, the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)warning light illuminates and then turnsoff. This indicates the ABS is operational.

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS ANDAUDIBLE REMINDERS


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

If the ABS warning light illuminates whilethe engine is running, or while driving, itmay indicate the ABS is not functioningproperly. Have the system checked by anINFINITI dealer.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock function is turned off. The brake sys-tem then operates normally, but withoutanti-lock assistance. See “Brake system”in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

Automatic transmissioncheck warning light

When the ignition switch is turned to theON position, the automatic transmissioncheck warning light comes on and thenturns off. This indicates that the auto-matic transmission system is operational.

If the light comes on while the engine isrunning or while driving, it may indicatethat the automatic transmission system isnot functioning properly. Have an INFINITIdealer check and repair the transmission.

or Brake warninglight

The brake warning light indicates theparking brake system operation and lowbrake fluid level of the brake system.

Parking brake indicator:

When the ignition switch is in the ON po-sition, the light comes on when the park-ing brake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light:

The light warns of a low brake fluid level.If the light comes on while the engine isrunning with the parking brake not ap-plied, stop the vehicle and perform thefollowing:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brakefluid as necessary. See “Brake fluid”in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, havethe warning system checked by anINFINITI dealer.

WARNING

O Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the warning light is on.Driving could be dangerous. If you judgeit to be safe, drive carefully to thenearest service station for repairs. Oth-

erwise, have your vehicle towed becausedriving it could be dangerous.

O Pressing the brake pedal with the en-gine stopped and/or a low brake fluidlevel may increase your stopping dis-tance and braking will require greaterpedal effort as well as pedal travel.

O If the brake fluid level is below the MINI-MUM or MIN mark on the brake fluid res-ervoir, do not drive until the brakesystem has been checked by an INFINITIdealer.

Charge warning light

If the light comes on while the engine isrunning, it may indicate that the chargingsystem is not functioning properly. Turnthe engine off and check the alternatorbelt. If the belt is loose, broken, missingor if the light remains on, see an INFINITIdealer immediately.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving if the generator belt


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

is loose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of thedoors are not closed securely while theignition switch is in the ON position.

Engine oil pressure warninglight

This light warns of low engine oil pres-sure. If the light flickers or comes on dur-ing normal driving, pull off the road in asafe area, stop the engine immediatelyand call an INFINITI dealer or other autho-rized repair shop.

The engine oil pressure warning light isnot designed to indicate a low oil level.Use the dipstick to check the oil level. See“Engine oil” in the “8. Maintenance anddo-it-yourself” section.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oil pres-sure warning light on could cause serious

damage to the engine almost immediately.Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to doso.

Intelligent Key warning light(for Intelligent Key system)

This light comes on in green when it ispossible to turn the ignition switch.

When the light comes on in red, it is notpossible to turn the switch.

O The warning light blinks in red whenthe Intelligent Key is outside the ve-hicle with the ignition switch in theACC or ON position. Confirm the loca-tion of the key as soon as possiblewhen the warning light blinks in red.Be sure to carry the Intelligent Keywith you while driving the vehicle.

O The warning light goes off about 10seconds after the Intelligent Key isbrought inside the vehicle.

Low fuel warning light

This light comes on when the fuel in thetank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it isconvenient, preferably before the fuelgauge reaches the E (Empty) position.

There will be a small reserve of fuel re-maining in the fuel tank when the fuelgauge needle reaches the E (Empty) posi-tion.

Low tire pressure warninglight

Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pres-sure monitoring system (TPMS) that moni-tors the tire pressure of all tires exceptthe spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warnsof low tire pressure or indicates that theTPMS is not functioning properly.

After the ignition switch is turned ON, thislight illuminates for about 1 second andturns off.

Low tire pressure warning:

If the vehicle is being driven with low tirepressure, the warning light will illuminate.

When the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates, you should stop and adjustthe tire pressure to the recommendedCOLD tire pressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. The low tirepressure warning light does not automati-cally turn off when the tire pressure is ad-justed. After the tire is inflated to the rec-


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

ommended pressure, the vehicle must bedriven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)to activate the TPMS and turn off the lowtire pressure warning light. Use a tirepressure gauge to check the tire pressure.

For additional information, see “Tire pres-sure monitoring system (TPMS)” in the “5.Starting and driving” section and in the“6. In case of emergency” section.

TPMS malfunction:

If the TPMS is not functioning properly,the low tire pressure warning light willflash for approximately 1 minute when theignition switch is turned ON. The light willremain on after the 1 minute. Have thesystem checked by an INFINITI dealer.

For additional information, see “Tire pres-sure monitoring system (TPMS)” in the “5.Starting and driving” section.

WARNING

O If the light does not illuminate with theignition switch turned ON, have the ve-hicle checked by an INFINITI dealer assoon as possible.

O If the light illuminates while driving,avoid sudden steering maneuvers orabrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,pull off the road to a safe location andstop the vehicle as soon as possible. Se-rious vehicle damage could occur andmay lead to an accident and could resultin serious personal injury. Check the tirepressure for all four tires. Adjust the tirepressure to the recommended COLD tirepressure shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label to turn the low tirepressure warning light OFF. If the lightstill comes on while driving after adjust-ing the tire pressure, a tire may be flat. Ifyou have a flat tire, replace it with aspare tire as soon as possible.

O When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel isreplaced, the TPMS will not function and thelow tire pressure warning light will flash forapproximately 1 minute and remain on afterthe 1 minute. Contact your INFINITI dealer assoon as possible for tire replacement and/orsystem resetting.

O Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by INFINITI could affect theproper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

O The TPMS is not a substitute for theregular tire pressure check. Be sure tocheck the tire pressure regularly.

O If the vehicle is being driven at speeds ofless than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the TPMSmay not operate correctly.

O Be sure to install the specified size oftires to the four wheels correctly.

Low washer fluid warninglight

This light comes on when the washer tankfluid is at a low level. Add washer fluid asnecessary. See “Window washer fluid” inthe “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

P position selecting warninglight (for Intelligent Keysystem)

The light blinks in red when the selectorlever is not in the P (Park) position andyou are outside the vehicle with the Intel-ligent Key.

When the warning light blinks, move theselector lever to P position and return theignition switch to the LOCK position.

Rear Active Steer (RAS)warning light (if soequipped)

If the light comes on while the engine isrunning, it may indicate that there is amalfunction with the Rear Active Steer(RAS) portion of the steering system. Havethe system checked by an INFINITI dealer.

For further information about the RAS sys-tem, see “Rear Active Steer (RAS) system”in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, theRAS function will cease but driving can becontinued.

If the light comes on while you are driving,contact an INFINITI dealer for repair.

Seat belt warning light andchime

The light and chime remind you to fastenthe driver’s seat belt. The light illuminateswhenever the ignition switch is pushed tothe ON position, and will remain illumi-nated until the driver’s seat belt is fas-tened. At the same time, the chime willsound for about 6 seconds unless thedriver’s seat belt is securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light may also illu-minate if the front passenger’s seat beltis not fastened when the front passen-ger’s seat is occupied. For 5 seconds afterthe ignition switch is in the ON position,the system does not activate the warninglight for the front passenger.

See “Seat belts” in the “1. Safety —Seats, seat belts and supplemental re-straint system” section for precautions onseat belt usage.

Supplemental air bagwarning light

After turning the ignition switch to the ONposition, the supplemental air bagwarning light will illuminate. The supple-mental air bag warning light will turn off

after about 7 seconds if the system is op-erational.

If any of the following conditions occur,the supplemental front air bag, supple-mental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag systems, and pre-tensionerseat belt need servicing and your vehiclemust be taken to the nearest INFINITIdealer.

O The supplemental air bag warninglight remains on after approximately 7seconds.

O The supplemental air bag warninglight flashes intermittently.

O The supplemental air bag warninglight does not come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the Supple-mental Restraint System and/or the pre-tensioner seat belt may not function prop-erly. For additional information, see“Supplemental restraint system” in the“1. Safety — Seats, restraints and supple-mental restraint system” section.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light ison, it could mean that the supplementalfront air bag, supplemental side air bag, cur-tain side-impact air bag systems and/or pre-tensioner seat belt systems will not operatein an accident. To help avoid injury to your-self or others, have your vehicle checked byan INFINITI dealer as soon as possible.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

Automatic transmissionposition indicator light

When the ignition switch is turned to theON position, the indicator in the instru-ment panel shows the automatic trans-mission selector lever position. See auto-matic transmission in the “5. Starting anddriving” section.

Cruise main switchindicator light

The light comes on when the cruise con-trol main switch is pushed. The light goesout when the main switch is pushed

again. When the cruise main switch indi-cator light comes on, the cruise controlsystem is operational.

Cruise set switch indicatorlight

The light comes on while the vehiclespeed is controlled by the cruise controlsystem. If the light blinks while the en-gine is running, it may indicate the cruisecontrol system is not functioning prop-erly. Have the system checked by anINFINITI dealer.

Front passenger air bagstatus light

The front passenger air bag status light,located on the center display, will be litand the passenger front air bag will be offdepending on how the front passengerseat is being used.

For front passenger air bag status lightoperation, see “INFINITI advanced air bagsystem” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seatbelts and supplemental restraint system”section of this manual.

High beam indicator light(Blue)

This light comes on when the headlighthigh beam is on and goes out when thelow beam is selected.

Malfunction indicator light(MIL)

If the malfunction indicator light (MIL)comes on steady or blinks while the en-gine is running, it may indicate a poten-tial emission control malfunction.

The malfunction indicator light may alsocome on steady if the fuel-filler cap isloose or missing, or if the vehicle runs outof fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-fillercap is installed and closed tightly, andthat the vehicle has at least three gallons(14 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the lightshould turn off if no other potential emis-sion control system malfunction exists.

If this indicator light comes on steady for20 seconds and then blinks for 10 sec-onds when the engine is not running, itindicates that the vehicle is not ready foran emission control system inspection/maintenance test. See “Readiness for


w 06.10.12/V35-D/V5.0 X

inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the“9. Technical and consumer information”section of this manual.

Operation

The malfunction indicator light will comeon in one of two ways:

O Malfunction indicator light on steady— An emission control system mal-function has been detected. Check thefuel-filler cap. If the fuel-filler cap isloose or missing, tighten or install thecap and continue to drive the vehicle.The light should turn off after afew driving trips. If the light doesnot turn off after a few driving trips,have the vehicle inspected by anINFINITI dealer. You do not need tohave your vehicle towed to the re-tailer.

O Malfunction indicator light blinking —An engine misfire has been detectedwhich may damage the emission con-trol system. To reduce or avoid emis-sion control system damage:

a) Do not drive at speeds above 45MPH (72 km/h).

b) Avoid hard acceleration or decel-eration.

c) Avoid steep uphill grades.d) If possible, reduce the amount of

cargo being hauled or towed.

The malfunction indicator light maystop blinking and come on steady.

Have the vehicle inspected by anINFINITI dealer. You do not need tohave your vehicle towed to the re-tailer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without havingthe emission control system checked and re-paired as necessary could lead to poor drive-ability, reduced fuel economy, and possibledamage to the emission control system.

Slip indicator light

The light will blink when the Vehicle Dy-namic Control (VDC) system is operating,thus alerting the driver to the fact that theroad surface is slippery and the vehicle isnearing its traction limits.

This light also comes on when the igni-tion switch is turned to the ON position.

The light will turn off if the VDC is opera-tional.

Turn signal/hazard indicatorlights

The light flashes when the turn signalswitch lever or hazard switch is turnedon.

Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) off indicator light

The light comes on when the Vehicle Dy-namic Control (VDC) off switch is pushedto OFF. This indicates that the VDC systemis not operating.

This light also comes on when the igni-tion switch is turned to the ON position.The light will turn off if the VDC system isoperational.

When the VDC off indicator light and slipindicator light come on with the VDC sys-tem turned on, this light alerts the driverto the fact that the VDC system fail-safemode is operating and the system maynot be functioning properly. Have the sys-tem checked by an INFINITI dealer. If amalfunction occurs in the system, the VDCsystem function will be canceled but thevehicle is still driveable. For additional in-


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

formation, see “Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) system” in the “5. Starting anddriving” section of this manual.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Key reminder chime

The chime will sound if the driver’s sidedoor is opened while the key is left in theignition switch (ignition switch is turnedoff). Remove the key and take it with youwhen leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder chime

The chime will sound when the front dooris opened with the headlight switch onunless the ignition switch is in the ON po-sition.

Make sure to turn the light switch offwhen you leave the vehicle.

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wearwarnings. When a brake pad requires re-placement, it will make a high pitchedscraping sound when the vehicle is in mo-tion whether or not the brake pedal is de-pressed. Have the brakes checked assoon as possible if the warning sound isheard.

Your vehicle has two types of securitysystems, as follows:

O Vehicle Security System

O INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System

The security condition will be shown bythe security indicator light.

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides vi-sual and audible alarm signals ifsomeone opens the doors, hood, or trunklid when the system is armed. It is not,however, a motion detection type system

that activates when a vehicle is moved orwhen a vibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft butcannot prevent it, nor can it prevent thetheft of interior or exterior vehicle compo-nents in all situations. Always secure yourvehicle even if parking for a brief period.Never leave your keys in the vehicle, andalways lock it when unattended. Be awareof your surroundings, and park in secure,well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protec-tion, such as component locks, identifica-tion markers, and tracking systems, areavailable at auto supply stores and spe-cialty shops. An INFINITI dealer may alsooffer such equipment. Check with your in-surance company to see if you may be eli-gible for discounts for various theft pro-tection features.

SIC2132

SECURITY SYSTEMS


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

How to arm the vehicle securitysystem

1. Close all windows.

The system can be armed even if the win-dows are open.

2. O Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

O Turn the ignition switch to the LOCKposition or remove the mechanicalkey from the ignition switch (Intelli-gent Key equipped model).

3. Close and lock all doors, hood andtrunk lid.

Lock all doors by pushing the LOCKbutton on the keyfob, the Intelli-

gent Key or by pushing any front doorhandle request switch or turning thedoor key. When using the remote key-less entry, the hazard indicators willoperate as shown in “Remote keylessentry system” or “Intelligent Keysystem” in the “3. Pre-driving checksand adjustments” section.

4. Confirm that the security indicatorlight qA comes on. The security indica-tor light glows for about 30 secondsand then blinks. The system is nowarmed. If, during this 30-second timeperiod, the door is unlocked by thekey, the remote keyless entry or thefront door request switch, or the igni-tion switch is turned to the ACC or ONposition, the system will not bearmed.

Even when the driver and/or passengersare in the vehicle, the system will bearmed with all doors, hood and trunk lidlocked and ignition switch off. Turn the ig-nition switch to the ACC position to turn offthe system.

Vehicle security system activationThe security system will give the followingalarm:

O The headlights blink and the hornsounds intermittently.

O The alarm automatically turns off afterapproximately 50 seconds. However,the alarm reactivates if the vehicle istampered with again. The alarm canbe shut off by unlocking a door withthe key, by pushing any front doorhandle request switch or by pushingthe UNLOCK button on the keyfobor Intelligent Key.

The alarm is activated by:

O Opening the door without using thekey or keyfob or Intelligent Key.

O Opening the trunk lid without usingthe keyfob or Intelligent Key.

O Opening the hood.

How to stop an activated alarmThe alarm will stop only by unlocking adoor with the key, by pushing any doorhandle request switch or by pushing theUNLOCK button on keyfob or Intelli-gent Key. The alarm will not stop if the ig-

SIC2564


w 06.7.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

nition switch is turned to the ACC or ONposition.

If the system does not operate as de-scribed above, have it checked by anINFINITI dealer.

INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM

The INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer Systemwill not allow the engine to start withoutthe use of the registered key.

If the engine fails to start using the regis-tered key (for example, when interferenceis caused by another registered key, anautomated toll road device or automatedpayment device on the key ring), restartthe engine using the following proce-dures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON po-sition for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF orLOCK position and wait approximately10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding thedevice (which may have caused the in-

terference) separate from the regis-tered key.

If this procedure allows the engine tostart, INFINITI recommends placing theregistered key on a separate key ringto avoid interference from other de-vices.

Statement related to section 15 of FCCrules for INFINITI Vehicle ImmobilizerSystem (CONT ASSY-BCM, ANT ASSY-IMMOBILIZER)

This device complies with part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmful in-terference, and (2) this device must acceptany interference received, including inter-ference that may cause undesired opera-tion of the device.

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE-SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD VOIDTHE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPERATE THEEQUIPMENT.

Security indicator light

If INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System ismalfunctioning, indicator light qA will re-main on while the ignition switch is in theON position.

If the light still remains on and/or the en-gine will not start, see an INFINITI dealerfor INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer Systemservice as soon as possible. Bring all reg-istered keys that you have when visitingan INFINITI dealer for service.

SIC2564


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

The windshield wiper and washer oper-ates when the ignition switch is in the ONposition.

Push the lever down to operate the wiperat the following speed:

q1 Intermittent — intermittent operationcan be adjusted by turning the knobtoward qA (Slower) or qB (Faster). Also,the intermittent operation speed variesin accordance with the vehicle speed.(For example, when the vehicle speedis high, the intermittent operationspeed will be faster.)

q2 Low — continuous low speed opera-tion

q3 High — continuous high speed opera-tion

Push the lever up q4 to have one sweepoperation of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you q5 to operatethe washer. Then the wiper will also oper-ate several times.

CAUTION

O Do not operate the washer continuouslyfor more than 30 seconds.

O Do not operate the washer if the reser-voir tank is empty.

O Do not fill the window washer reservoirtank with washer fluid concentrates atfull strength. Some methyl alcoholbased washer fluid concentrates maypermanently stain the grille if spilledwhile filling the window washer reser-voir tank.

O Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates withwater to the manufacturer’s recom-

mended levels before pouring the fluidinto the window washer reservoir tank.Do not use the window washer reservoirtank to mix the washer fluid concentrateand water.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-tion may freeze on the windshield and ob-scure your vision which may lead to an acci-dent. Warm the windshield with the de-froster before you wash the windshield.

SIC2821

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

To defog/defrost the rear window glassand outside mirrors, start the engine andpush the switch q1 on. The indicator lightqA will come on. Push the switch again toturn the defroster off.

It will automatically turn off in approxi-mately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rear win-dow, be careful not to scratch or damage therear window defroster.

XENON HEADLIGHTS

WARNING

HIGH VOLTAGE

O When xenon headlights are on, they pro-duce a high voltage. To prevent an elec-tric shock, never attempt to modify ordisassemble. Always have your xenonheadlights replaced at an INFINITIdealer.

O Xenon headlights provide considerablymore light than conventional head-lights. If they are not correctly aimed,they might temporarily blind an on-coming driver or the driver ahead of youand cause a serious accident. If head-lights are not aimed correctly, immedi-ately take your vehicle to an INFINITIdealer and have the headlights adjustedcorrectly.

When the xenon headlight is initiallyturned on, its brightness or color variesslightly. However, the color and bright-ness will soon stabilize.

O The life of xenon headlights will beshortened by frequent on-off opera-tion. It is generally desirable not toturn off the headlights for short inter-vals (for example, when the vehiclestops at a traffic signal). Even when thedaytime running lights are active(Canada only), the xenon headlights donot turn on. This way the life of thexenon headlights is not reduced.

O If a xenon headlight bulb is close toburning out, the brightness will drasti-cally decrease, the light will startblinking, or the color of the light willbecome reddish. If one or more of theabove signs appear, contact an INFINITIdealer.

SIC2565

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRRORDEFROSTER SWITCH

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

HEADLIGHT SWITCH

Lighting

q1 Turn the switch to the position:

The front park, side marker, tail, li-cense plate and instrument lights willcome on.

q2 Turn the switch to the position:

Headlights will come on and all theother lights remain on.

CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine runningto avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

Autolight system

The autolight system allows the head-lights to be set so they turn on and offautomatically.

To set the autolight system:

1. Make sure the headlight switch is inthe AUTO q1 position.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON po-sition.

3. The autolight system automaticallyturns the headlights on and off.

SIC2227 SIC2229


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

To turn the autolight system off, turn theswitch to the OFF, or position.

The autolight system can turn on theheadlights automatically when it is dark,and turn off the headlights when it islight, and keep the headlights on for 45seconds after you turn the ignition switchto the OFF position and open any doorthen close all the doors.

If the ignition switch is turned off and oneof the doors is opened and this conditionis continued, the headlights remain on for5 minutes.

Be sure not to put anything on top of thephoto sensor qA located on the top left-hand side of the instrument panel. Thephoto sensor controls the autolight; if it iscovered, the photo sensor reacts as if it isdark and the headlights will illuminate.

Headlight beam select

q1 To select the low beam, put the leverin the neutral position as shown.

q2 To select the high beam, push thelever forward while the switch is in the

position. Pull it back to select thelow beam.

q3 Pulling the lever toward you will flashthe headlight high beam even whenthe headlight switch is in the OFF posi-tion.

SIC1699A SIC2230


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Battery saver system

O When the headlight switch is in theor position while the igni-

tion switch is in the ON position, thelights (including the front fog light)will automatically turn off 5 minutesafter the ignition switch has beenturned to the OFF position.

O When the headlight switch remains inthe or position after thelights automatically turn off, the lightswill turn on when the ignition switch ispushed to the ON position.

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature auto-matically turns off the headlights after a pe-riod of time, you should turn the headlightswitch to the OFF position when the engineis not running to avoid discharging the ve-hicle battery.

Daytime running light system(Canada only)

The headlights automatically illuminate ata reduced intensity when the engine isstarted with the parking brake released.The daytime running lights operate withthe headlight switch in the OFF positionor in the position. Turn the headlightswitch to the position for full illumi-nation when driving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before theengine is started, the daytime runninglights do not illuminate. The daytime run-ning lights illuminate once the parkingbrake is released. The daytime runninglights will remain on until the ignitionswitch is turned off.

WARNING

When the daytime running light system isactive, tail lights on your vehicle are not on.It is necessary at dusk to turn on your head-lights. Failure to do so could cause an acci-dent injuring yourself and others.

Instrument brightness control

The instrument brightness control oper-ates when the light switch is in the AUTO(when lighting), or position.Turn the control to the darkening direc-tion qA or the brightening direction qB toadjust the brightness of the instrumentpanel.

When the control is turned to the upperend, the light intensity will be atmaximum. When the control is turned tothe lower end, the light will be turned off.

SIC2566


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

q1 Turn signal

Move the lever up or down to signal theturning direction. When the turn is com-pleted, the turn signals cancel automati-cally.

q2 Lane change signal

To indicate a lane change, move the leverup or down to the point where lightsbegin flashing.

FOG LIGHT SWITCH

To turn the fog lights on, turn the head-light switch to the position, thenturn the switch to the position. Toturn them off, turn the switch to the OFFposition.

The headlights must be on and the lowbeams selected for the fog lights to oper-ate. The fog lights automatically turn offwhen the high beam headlights are se-lected.

Push the switch on to warn other driverswhen you must stop or park under emer-gency conditions. All turn signal lightswill flash.

Some state or provincial laws may prohibitthe use of the hazard warning flasherswitch while driving.

WARNING

O If stopping for an emergency, be sure tomove the vehicle well off the road.

SIC2231 SIC1836A SIC2574

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

O Do not use the hazard warning flasherswhile moving on the highway unless un-usual circumstances force you to driveso slowly that your vehicle might be-come a hazard to other traffic.

O Turn signals do not work when thehazard warning flasher lights are on.

The flasher can be actuated with the igni-tion switch either off or on.

To sound the horn, push on or near thehorn marks of the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so couldaffect proper operation of the supplementalfront air bag system. Tampering with thesupplemental front air bag system may re-sult in serious personal injury.

The front seats are warmed by built-inheaters. The switches located on the cen-ter console can be operated indepen-dently (driver side seat qA and front pas-senger seat qB ) of each other.

1. Start the engine.

2. Select heat range.

q1 For low heat, push the (Low)side of the switch.

q2 For high heat, push the(High) side of the switch.

q3 For no heat, the switch has a cen-

SIC1838 SIC2793AT models

HORN HEATED SEATS


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

ter OFF position between low andhigh.

The indicator light in the switch qC willilluminate when low or high is se-lected.

The heater is controlled by a thermo-stat, automatically turning the heateron and off. The indicator light will re-main on as long as the switch is on.

3. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed,or before you leave the vehicle, besure to turn the switch to the off posi-tion (center) q3 .

CAUTION

O The battery could run down if the seatheater is operated while the engine isnot running.

O Do not use the seat heater for extendedperiods or when no one is using the seat.

O Do not put anything on the seat whichinsulates heat, such as a blanket,cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, theseat may become overheated.

O Do not place anything hard or heavy onthe seat or pierce it with a pin or similarobject. This may result in damage to theheater.

O Any liquid spilled on the heated seatshould be removed immediately with adry cloth.

O When cleaning the seat, never use gaso-line, benzine, thinner, or any similarmaterials.

O If any abnormalities are found or theheated seat does not operate, turn theswitch off and have the system checkedby an INFINITI dealer.

SIC2672MT models


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

The vehicle should be driven with the Ve-hicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system on formost driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, theVDC system reduces the engine output toreduce wheel spin. The engine speed willbe reduced even if the accelerator is de-pressed to the floor. If maximum enginepower is needed to free a stuck vehicle,turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) system, push the VDC OFF switch (lo-cated on the lower side of the instrumentpanel). The indicator will come on.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restartthe engine to turn on the system. See“Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system”in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

If the power supply is disconnected, theclock will not indicate the correct time. Re-adjust the time.

ADJUSTING THE TIME

To move the time forward, push thebutton q1 .

To move the time backward, push thebutton q2 .

Push and hold each adjusting switch tomove the time forward or backward con-tinuously.

SIC1881 SIC2568

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFFSWITCH

CLOCK


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

The power outlet is for powering electricalaccessories such as cellular telephones.

CAUTION

O The outlet and plug may be hot during orimmediately after use.

O This power outlet is not designed for usewith a cigarette lighter unit.

O Do not use with accessories that exceed a12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw. Do notuse double adapters or more than oneelectrical accessory.

O Use power outlets with the engine runningto avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

O Avoid using power outlets when the airconditioner, headlights or rear window de-froster is on.

O Before inserting or disconnecting a plug,be sure the electrical accessory being usedis turned OFF.

O Push the plug in as far as it will go. If goodcontact is not made, the plug may overheator the internal temperature fuse may open.

O When not in use, be sure to close the cap.Do not allow water to contact the outlet.

FRONT

To open the ashtray, push q1 .

To take out the ashtray, pull out q2 .

The cigarette lighter operates when theignition switch is in the ACC or ON posi-tion. To heat the cigarette lighter, push inq3 until it latches. When the lighter isheated, it will spring out automatically.

Return the cigarette lighter to its originalposition after use.

SIC1840BAutomatic transmission model

SIC2673Manual transmission models

SIC2569

POWER OUTLET CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND ASHTRAY


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

REAR

To open the ashtray, pull q1 .

To take out the ashtray, push down q2 ,and pull out.

CAUTION

The cigarette lighter socket is a powersource for the cigarette lighter element only.The use of the cigarette lighter socket as apower source for any other accessory is notrecommended. Do not use any other power

outlet for an accessory lighter.

INSTRUMENT POCKET (except fornavigation system equipped models)

WARNINGO The instrument pocket should not be

used while driving so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.

O Keep the pocket lid closed while drivingto help prevent injury in an accident or asudden stop.

To open the instrument pocket, pull thelid up.

To close, push the lid down.

SIC2570 SIC2815

STORAGE


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

SUNGLASSES HOLDERThe sunglasses holder can be opened bypushing the button qA . To close, push theholder up until the lock latches.

WARNING

Keep the sunglasses holder closed whiledriving to prevent an accident.

CAUTION

O Do not use for anything other than sun-glasses.

O Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-glasses holder while parking in directsunlight. The heat may damage the sun-glasses.

CUP HOLDER

CAUTION

O Avoid abrupt starting and braking whenthe cup holder is being used to preventspilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, itcan scald you or your passenger.

O Use only soft cups in the cup holder.Hard objects can injure you in an acci-dent.

SIC1971


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Front (Automatic transmission models):

To open the cup holder, push the lid q1 .

The flap will be folded down when insert-ing a large container.

To remove the inner tray for cleaning, pullit up as illustrated q2 .

Front (Manual transmission models):

To open the cup holder, slide the lid q1 .

Install the partition plate into the slit q2 .

To open the console boxes, push theknob qA and pull up the lid.

To close, push the lid down until the locklatches.

SIC2571Automatic transmission models — Front

SIC2674Manual transmission models — Front

SIC2675AManual transmission models — Console box


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

To open the cup holder, pull the lid. Soft bottle holder

CAUTION

O Do not use bottle holder for any otherobjects that could be thrown about inthe vehicle and possibly injure peopleduring sudden braking or an accident.

O Do not use bottle holder for open liquidcontainers.

GLOVE BOX

To open the glove box, pull the handle q1 .

To close, push the lid in until the locklatches.

To lock q2 /unlock q3 the glove box, usethe master key.

The glove box light illuminates when theglove box is opened with the headlightswitch on.

SIC1846BRear

SIC2572 SIC2573


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving tohelp prevent injury in an accident or asudden stop.

UPPER GLOVE BOX (except fornavigation system equippedmodels)

To open the upper glove box, push thebutton qA .

To close, push the lid down until the locklatches.

The upper glove box light illuminateswhen the upper glove box is opened withthe headlight switch on.

WARNING

Keep upper glove box lid closed whiledriving to help prevent injury in an accidentor a sudden stop.

SIC1848A


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

CONSOLE BOX

To open the console boxes, push theknob qA and pull up the lid.

To close, push the lid down until latched.

SIC2575Automatic transmission model

SIC2676Manual transmission model

SIC2677Manual transmission model


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Manual transmission model

To remove the console lid:

1. Remove the original hinge mask. At-tach a cloth when using a screwdriver.

2. Loosen 3 screws, and remove the lid.

3. Install the replacement hinge maskand latch cover equipped with manualtransmission model.

CARD HOLDER (driver’s side)

Type A

Insert a card in the holder.

Type B

Pull the sun visor down q1 and slide acard qA in the card holder.

SIC2332Type A

SIC2154AType B


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

COAT HOOK

To use the coat hook, push the hook qA

to release it.

CAUTION

Avoid hanging heavy goods on the hook.

STOWING GOLF BAGS

Normally, two standard golf bags can bestowed in the trunk. Insert the top of thegolf bag into left side of the trunk roomq1 then put the bag forward q2 . Insertthe top of the 2nd golf bag into right sideof the trunk room q3 and pull it in all theway q4 .

In some cases, you may not be able tostow two golf bags in your vehicle, de-pending on their sizes or types.

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

O Make sure that all passengers have theirhands, etc. inside the vehicle while it isin motion and before closing the win-dows. Use the window lock switch toprevent unexpected use of the powerwindows.

O Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls and becometrapped in a window. Unattended chil-dren could become involved in seriousaccidents.

The power windows operate when the ig-nition key is in the ON position and forabout 45 seconds, after the ignitionswitch is turned to the OFF position. If thedriver’s door or the passenger’s door isopened during this period of about 45seconds, power to the windows is can-celed.

SIC2077A SIC2209

WINDOWS


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Main power window switch(driver’s side)

1. Driver side window2. Passenger side window3. Window lock button

To open or close the window, push downqA or pull up qB the switch and hold it.

Locking passenger’s windows

When the lock button qC is pushed in,only the driver side window can beopened or closed. Push it in again to can-cel.

Passenger side power windowswitch

The passenger side switch will open orclose only the corresponding window. Toopen or close the window, hold the switchdown or up.

Automatic operation

To fully open or close the window, com-pletely push down or pull up the switchand release it; it need not be held. Thewindow will automatically open or closeall the way. To stop the window, just pushor lift the switch in the opposite direction.

Auto reverse function (Automaticoperation equipped model)

If the control unit detects somethingcaught in a window as it moves up, thewindow will be immediately lowered.The auto reverse function can be acti-

SIC3286 SIC3287Passenger side

SIC3288


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

vated when a window is closed by auto-matic operation when the ignition switchis in the ON position, or for about 45 sec-onds after the ignition switch is turned tothe OFF position.

Depending on the environment or drivingconditions, the auto reverse function maybe activated if an impact or load similar tosomething being caught in the window oc-curs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immediatelybefore the closed position which cannot bedetected. Make sure that all passengershave their hands, etc., inside the vehicle be-fore closing the window.

AUTOMATIC ADJUSTING FUNCTION

CAUTION

When the battery cable is removed from thebattery terminal, do not close either of thefront doors. The automatic window adjustingfunction will not work, and the side roofpanel may be damaged.

The power window has an automatic ad-justing function. When the door is beingopened, the window is automatically low-ered slightly to avoid contact between thewindow and the side roof panel. When thedoor is closed, the window is automati-cally raised slightly.

AUTOMATIC SUNROOF

The sunroof will only operate when the ig-nition switch is in the ON position.

The automatic sunroof is operational forabout 45 seconds, even if the ignitionswitch is turned to the OFF position. If thedriver’s door or the passenger’s door isopened during this period of about 45seconds, power to the sunroof is can-celed.

Sliding the sunroof

To fully open or close the sunroof, pushthe switch to the CLOSE q1 or OPEN q2

SIC1854B

SUNROOF (if so equipped)


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

side for less than 1 second and release it;it need not be held. The roof will auto-matically open or close all the way. Tostop the roof, push the switch once morewhile it is opening or closing.

To open or close the sunroof and stop onthe way, push the switch to the CLOSE q1or OPEN q2 side for more than 1 second.The roof will stop when releasing theswitch.

Auto reverse function (Whenclosing the sunroof)

If the control unit detects somethingcaught in the sunroof when it is closing,the sunroof will immediately move back-ward.

The auto reverse function can be acti-vated when the sunroof is closed by auto-matic operation when the ignition switchis in the ON position or for about 45 sec-onds after the ignition switch is turned tothe OFF position.

Depending on the environment or drivingconditions, the auto reverse function maybe activated if an impact or load similar tosomething being caught in the sunroof oc-curs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immediatelybefore the closed position which cannot bedetected. Make sure that all passengershave their hands, etc., inside the vehicle be-fore closing the sunroof.

Tilting the sunroof

To tilt up, first close the sunroof, thenpush the UP q1 side of the switch and re-lease it; it need not be held. To tilt downthe sunroof, push the DOWN q2 side.

Sun shade

Open or close the sun shade by sliding itbackward or forward.

The shade will open automatically whenthe sunroof is opened. However, it mustbe closed manually.

WARNING

O In an accident you could be thrown fromthe vehicle through an open sunroof. Al-ways use seat belts and child restraints.

O Do not allow anyone to stand up or ex-tend any portion of their body out of thesunroof opening while the vehicle is inmotion or while the sunroof is closing.

CAUTION

O Remove water drops, snow, ice or sandfrom the sunroof before opening.

O Do not place any heavy object on thesunroof or surrounding area.

If the sunroof does not close

If the sunroof does not close or open au-tomatically, use the following procedureto return sunroof operation to normal.

1. Push the switch to the CLOSE/UP q1side to tilt up the sunroof.

2. Release the switch when the sunroof


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

is in the fully tilted up position.

3. Push and hold the switch to theCLOSE/UP q1 side for approximately10 seconds until the sunroof automati-cally closes.

4. Release the switch when the sunroofstops.

5. Push and hold the switch to theCLOSE/UP q1 side for approximately 4seconds until the sunroof moves auto-matically.Continue to push and hold the switchwhile the sunroof operates automati-cally. Do not release the switch.

6. Release the switch when the sunroofstops.

7. If the sunroof does not operate prop-erly after step 6, repeat the procedurestarting with step 1.

Have an INFINITI dealer check and repairthe sunroof.

ROOM LIGHT

The room light has a two-position switch.

When the switch is in the door positionq1 , the room light will illuminate when adoor is opened.

The light will stay on for about 30 sec-onds when:

O The doors are unlocked by the keyfob,a key, power door lock switch or usingthe Intelligent Key system while alldoors are closed.

O The driver’s door is opened and thenclosed while the key is removed fromthe ignition switch or the ignition isturned to the LOCK position (Intelli-gent Key system).

O The key is removed from the ignitionswitch or the ignition is turned to theLOCK position (Intelligent Key system)while all doors are closed.

The light will turn off while the 30 secondtimer is activated, when:

O The driver’s door is locked either withthe keyfob, a key or the power doorlock switch.

O The ignition switch is turned to the ONposition.

When the switch is in the OFF positionq2 , the room light does not illuminate, re-gardless of any condition.

SIC2580

INTERIOR LIGHTS


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

MAP LIGHTS

When the switch is pushed in, the lightwill turn on. When the switch is pushedagain, the light will turn off.

When the map light switch is in the ON po-sition, it will automatically turn off 30 min-utes after the ignition switch has beenturned to the OFF position. To turn on thelight again, turn the ignition switch to theON position.

The map, personal, and vanity mirrorlights will automatically turn off 30 min-utes after the latest operation of the fol-

lowing with the ignition switch in the ACCor OFF position:

O Opening or closing any door

O Locking or unlocking with the keyfob,a key, the power door lock switch orthe ignition is turned to the LOCK po-sition (Intelligent Key system)

O Inserting or removing a key from theignition switch

These lights will turn on again when anyof the above operations is performed afterthe lights have turned off automatically.(The lights will turn off 30 minutes afterthe latest operation of the above as well.)

CAUTION

O Turn off the map, personal and vanitymirror lights when you leave the vehicle.

O Do not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This could re-sult in a discharged battery.

The light on the vanity mirror will turn onwhen the cover on the vanity mirror isopened.

When the vanity mirror light stays on, itwill automatically turn off 30 minutes afterthe ignition switch has been turned to theOFF position. To turn on the light again,turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

SIC2581 SIC1859

VANITY MIRROR LIGHT


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

The light illuminates when the trunk lid isopened. When the trunk lid is closed, thelight will go off.

When the trunk light stays on, it will auto-matically turn off 30 minutes after the ig-nition switch has been turned to the OFFposition. To turn on the light again, turnthe ignition switch to the ON position.

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver pro-vides a convenient way to consolidate thefunctions of up to three individual hand-held transmitters into one built-in device.

HomeLink Universal Transceiver:

O Will operate most Radio Frequency(RF) devices such as garage doors,gates, home and office lighting, entrydoor locks and security systems.

O Is powered by your vehicle’s battery.No separate batteries are required. Ifthe vehicle’s battery is discharged oris disconnected, HomeLink will retainall programming.

Once the HomeLink Universal Transceiveris programmed, retain the original trans-mitter for future programming procedures(i.e., new vehicle purchases). Upon sale ofthe vehicle, the programmed HomeLinkUniversal Transceiver buttons should beerased for security purposes. For addi-tional information, refer to “ProgrammingHomeLink ” later in this section.

WARNING

O Do not use the HomeLink UniversalTransceiver with any garage door openerthat lacks safety stop and reverse fea-tures as required by federal safety stan-dards. (These standards became effectivefor opener models manufactured afterApril 1, 1982.) A garage door opener whichcannot detect an object in the path of aclosing garage door and then automati-cally stop and reverse, does not meet cur-rent federal safety standards. Using a ga-rage door opener without these featuresincreases the risk of serious injury ordeath.

O During the programming procedure, yourgarage door or security gate will open orclose (if the transmitter is within range).Make sure that people or objects are clearof the garage door, gate, etc. that you areprogramming.

O Your vehicle’s engine should be turnedoff while programming the HomeLinkUniversal Transceiver.

TRUNK LIGHT HomeLink UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER (ifso equipped)


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

PROGRAMMING HomeLink

To program your HomeLink Transceiverto operate a garage door, gate, or entrydoor opener, home or office lighting, youneed to be at the same location as thedevice. Note: Garage door openers (manu-factured after 1996) have “rolling codeprotection”. To program a garage dooropener equipped with “rolling code pro-tection”; you will need to use a ladder toget up to the garage door opener motor tobe able to access the “training” programbutton.

1. To begin, push and hold the 2 outerHomeLink buttons (to clear thememory) until the indicator light qA

blinks (after 20 seconds). Release bothbuttons.

2. Position the end of the hand-held trans-mitter 1 to 3 in (26 to 76 mm) away fromthe HomeLink surface.

3. Using both hands, simultaneouslypush and hold both the HomeLinkbutton you want to program and thehand-held transmitter button.DO NOT release the buttons until step4 has been completed.

4. Hold down both buttons until the indi-cator light on the HomeLink flashes,changing from a “slow blink” to a“rapid blink”. When the indicator lightflashes rapidly, both buttons may bereleased. The rapidly flashing light in-dicates successful programming. Toactivate the garage door or other pro-grammed device, push and hold the

SIC3012 SIC3011


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

programmed HomeLink button - re-leasing when the device begins to ac-tivate.

5. If the indicator light on the HomeLinkblinks rapidly for two seconds and thenturns solid, HomeLink has picked up a“rolling code” garage door opener sig-nal. You will need to proceed with thenext steps to train the HomeLink tocomplete the programming which mayrequire a ladder and another person forconvenience.

6. Push and release the training buttonlocated on the garage door opener’smotor to activate the “training mode”.This button is usually located near theantenna wire that hangs down fromthe motor. If the wire originates fromunder a light lens, you will need to re-move the lens to access the trainingbutton.

NOTE:

Once you have pushed and released thetraining button on the garage door open-er’s motor and the “training light” is lit,you have 30 seconds in which to performstep 7. Use the help of a second person forconvenience to assist when performingthis step.

7. Quickly within 30 seconds of pushingand releasing the garage door openerprogram button, firmly push and re-lease the HomeLink button you’vejust programmed. Push and releasethe HomeLink button up to threetimes to complete the training.

8. Your HomeLink button should now beprogrammed.To program the remaining HomeLinkbuttons for additional door or gateopeners, follow steps 2 through 8only.

NOTE:

Do not repeat step one unless you want to“clear” all previously programmedHomeLink buttons.

If you have any questions or are havingdifficulty programming your HomeLinkbuttons, refer to the HomeLink web siteat: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

PROGRAMMING HomeLink FORCANADIAN CUSTOMERS

Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations requiredhand-held transmitters to stop transmit-ting after 2 seconds. To program your

hand-held transmitter to HomeLink , con-tinue to push and hold the HomeLinkbutton (note steps 2 through 4 under“Programming HomeLink ”) while youpush and re-push (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter every 2 seconds until theindicator light flashes rapidly (indicatingsuccessful programming).

NOTE:If programming a garage door opener, etc.,it is advised to unplug the device duringthe “cycling” process to prevent possibledamage to the garage door opener compo-nents.

OPERATING THE HomeLinkUNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVERThe HomeLink Universal Transceiver(once programmed) may now be used toactivate the garage door, etc. To operate,simply push the appropriate programmedHomeLink Universal Transceiver button.The red indicator light will illuminatewhile the signal is being transmitted.

PROGRAMMINGTROUBLE-DIAGNOSISIf the HomeLink does not quickly learnthe hand-held transmitter information:

O replace the hand-held transmitter bat-


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

teries with new batteries.

O position the hand-held transmitterwith its battery area facing away fromthe HomeLink surface.

O push and hold both the HomeLinkand hand-held transmitter buttonswithout interruption.

O position the hand-held transmitter 2to 5 in (50 to 127 mm) away from theHomeLink surface. Hold the transmit-ter in that position for up to 15 sec-onds. If HomeLink is not pro-grammed within that time, try holdingthe transmitter in another position -keeping the indicator light in view atall times.

If you continue to have programming diffi-culties, please contact the INFINITI Con-sumer Affairs Department. The phonenumbers are located in the Foreword ofthis Owner’s Manual.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMEDINFORMATION

Individual buttons cannot be cleared,however to clear all programming, pushand hold the two outside buttons and re-lease when the indicator light begins to

flash (approximately 20 seconds).

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLEHomeLink BUTTON

To reprogram a HomeLink UniversalTransceiver button, complete the fol-lowing.

1. Push and hold the desired HomeLinkbutton. Do not release the button untilstep 4 has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins toflash slowly (after 20 seconds), posi-tion the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5in (50 to 127 mm) away from theHomeLink surface.

3. Push and hold the hand-held trans-mitter button.

4. The HomeLink indicator light willflash, first slowly and then rapidly.When the indicator light begins toflash rapidly, release both buttons.

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver but-ton has now been reprogrammed. Thenew device can be activated by pushingthe HomeLink button that was just pro-grammed. This procedure will not affectany other programmed HomeLink but-tons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should changethe codes of any non-rolling code devicethat has been programmed into HomeLink .Consult the Owner’s Manual of each deviceor call the manufacturer or dealer of thosedevices for additional information.

When your vehicle is recovered, you willneed to reprogram the HomeLink Uni-versal Transceiver with your new transmit-ter information.

FCC Notice:

This device complies with FCC rules part15. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions: (1) This device may notcause harmful interference and (2) This de-vice must accept any interference that maybe received, including interference thatmay cause undesired operation.

The transmitter has been tested and com-plies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible for com-pliance could void the user’s authority tooperate the device.

DOC: ISTC 1763K1313

FCC I.D.: CB2V67690


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

MEMO


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys ................................................................. 3-2INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System keys.... 3-2

Doors ............................................................... 3-3Locking with key ......................................... 3-3Locking with inside lock knob ..................... 3-4Locking with power door lock switch........... 3-4

Remote keyless entry system (models withoutIntelligent Key system) ..................................... 3-5

How to use remote keyless entry system .... 3-6Intelligent Key system (if so equipped)............. 3-9

Door locks/unlocks precaution .................. 3-11Intelligent Key operation ............................ 3-11Opening and closing windows ................... 3-13Operating the engine ................................. 3-13Intelligent Key operating range ................. 3-15Warning signals ......................................... 3-17Trouble-shooting guide .............................. 3-19Operation with intelligent remote keylessentry system ............................................. 3-20Operation with the mechanical key andvalet key ................................................... 3-23

Hood .............................................................. 3-24Trunk lid ......................................................... 3-25

Opener operation ...................................... 3-25Interior trunk lid release............................ 3-27Secondary trunk lid release....................... 3-27

Fuel-filler door ................................................ 3-28Opening the fuel-filler door ....................... 3-28Fuel-filler cap ............................................ 3-28

Steering wheel ............................................... 3-30Manual operation ...................................... 3-30Electric operation (if so equipped) ............. 3-31

Sun visors....................................................... 3-31Mirrors............................................................ 3-32

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror (if soequipped).................................................. 3-32Outside mirrors ......................................... 3-33

Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) .... 3-34Automatic drive positioner operation......... 3-34Entry/exit function (if so equipped) ........... 3-34Memory storage function........................... 3-35System operation ...................................... 3-36

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Master key 2 sets (With built-in tran-sponder chip), INFINITI MARK: silver

2. Valet key (With built-in transponderchip), INFINITI MARK: Black

3. Wallet key and Key case (Card type)4. Key number plate

1. Intelligent Key 2 sets*2. Mechanical key (metal key)* 2 sets3. Valet key (metal key)4. Wallet key and key case (card type)

(metal key)5. Key number plate

*: Refer to “Intelligent Key system” laterin this section.

A key number plate is supplied with yourkeys. Record the key number and keep itin a safe place (such as your wallet), notin the vehicle. If you lose your keys, seean INFINITI dealer for duplicates by usingthe key number.

A key number is necessary when you havelost all keys and do not have one to dupli-cate from. If you still have a key, anINFINITI dealer can duplicate it.

INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM KEYS

You can only drive your vehicle using themaster or valet keys which are registeredto the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer Systemcomponents in your vehicle. These keyshave a transponder chip in the key head.

The master key can be used for all thelocks.

The valet key cannot be used for glovebox lock and the trunk access window lidlock.

To protect belongings when you leave akey with someone, give them the valetkey only.

SPA2105Model without Intelligent Key system

SPA2179Model with Intelligent Key system

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys:If you still have a key, the key number isnot necessary when you need extraINFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System keys.An INFINITI dealer can duplicate it. Asmany as 5 INFINITI Vehicle ImmobilizerSystem keys can be used with one ve-hicle. You should bring all registered keysthat you have to an INFINITI dealer for reg-istration. This is because the registrationprocess will erase the memory of all keycodes previously registered into theINFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System. Afterthe registration process, these compo-nents will only recognize keys coded intothe INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer Systemduring registration. Any key that is notgiven to your dealer at the time of regis-tration will no longer be able to start yourvehicle.

Do not allow the immobilizer system key,which contains an electrical transponder,to come into contact with salt water. Thiscould affect system function.

WARNING

O Always have the doors locked whiledriving. Along with the use of seat belts,this provides greater safety in the eventof an accident by helping to prevent per-sons from being thrown from the ve-hicle. This also helps keep children andothers from unintentionally opening thedoors, and will help keep out intruders.

O Before opening any door, always look forand avoid oncoming traffic.

O Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls. Unattendedchildren could become involved in se-rious accidents.

LOCKING WITH KEY

Power

The power door lock system allows you tolock or unlock all doors, trunk lid and thefuel-filler door.

O Turning the door key cylinder to thefront of the vehicle q1 will lock alldoors, trunk lid and fuel-filler door.

O Turning the door key cylinder to therear of the vehicle q2 once will unlockthe driver’s door.Turning the door key cylinder to therear of the vehicle again within 5 sec-

SPA1884

DOORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

onds will unlock all doors, the trunklid and the fuel-filler door.

Opening and closing windows

To open the door windows, turn the doorkey cylinder to the rear of the vehicle andhold the key for about 1 second.

To stop opening, return the door key cyl-inder to the neutral position by turningthe key.

To close the door windows, turn the doorkey cylinder to the front of the vehicleand hold the key for about 1 second.

To stop closing, return the door key cylin-der to the neutral position by turning thekey.

In the event of an obstruction, such as ahand, in the way of door windows, theauto reverse function will activate.

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB

To individually lock the doors, push theinside lock knob down to the LOCK posi-tion q1 , then close the door.

When locking the door using inside lockknob, be sure not to leave the key inside ofthe vehicle.

To unlock, pull the inside lock knob up tothe UNLOCK position q2 .

LOCKING WITH POWER DOORLOCK SWITCH

All doors will be locked when the powerdoor lock switch is pushed to the LOCKposition q1 with the driver’s or passen-ger’s door open. Then close the door andall doors will be locked.

When locking the door this way, be certainnot to leave the key inside the vehicle.

To unlock, push the power door lockswitch to the UNLOCK position q2 .

SPA1814 SPA2330


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Lockout protection

When the power door lock switch (driveror passenger) is moved to the LOCK posi-tion with the key in the ignition and anydoor open, all doors will lock and unlockautomatically. This helps to prevent thekeys from being accidentally locked in-side the vehicle.

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors,trunk lid and fuel-filler door and activatethe panic alarm by using the keyfob fromoutside the vehicle.Before locking the doors, make sure thekey is not left in the vehicle.The keyfob can operate at a maximumdistance of approximately 33 ft (10 m)away from the vehicle. (The operating dis-tance depends upon the conditionsaround the vehicle.)As many as 5 keyfobs can be used withone vehicle. For information about pur-chase and use of additional keyfobs, con-tact an INFINITI dealer.

The keyfob will not function when:

O the battery is completely discharged,

O the distance between the vehicle andthe keyfob is more than 33 ft (10 m).

The panic alarm will not activate when thekey is in the ignition switch.

CAUTION

The following conditions or occurrences maydamage the keyfob.

O Do not allow the keyfob to become wet.

O Do not drop the keyfob.

O Do not strike the keyfob sharply againstanother object.

O Do not place the keyfob for an extendedperiod in an area where temperaturesexceed 140°F (60°C).

If a keyfob is lost or stolen, INFINITI recom-mends erasing the ID code of that keyfob.This will prevent the keyfob from unautho-rized use to unlock the vehicle. For informa-tion regarding the erasing procedure, pleasecontact an INFINITI dealer.

For information regarding the replacementof a battery, see “Keyfob battery replace-ment” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (modelswithout Intelligent Key system)


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

q1 LOCK button

q2 UNLOCK button

q3 TRUNK button

q4 PANIC button

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESSENTRY SYSTEM

Locking doors and fuel-filler door

1. Remove the ignition key.*1,*2

2. Close all doors.*3

3. Push the LOCK button on the key-fob.

4. All doors, the trunk lid and the fuel-filler door will lock.

All doors will lock when the LOCKbutton on the keyfob is pushed even

though a door remains open and/or the ig-nition switch is in any position.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice andthe horn chirps once.

O When the LOCK button is pushedwith all doors locked, the hazard indi-cator flashes twice and the hornchirps once as a reminder that thedoors are already locked.

*1: Doors lock with the keyfob while akey is in the ignition switch. However,the panic alarm will not activate whenthe key is in the ignition switch.

*2: Doors lock with the keyfob while theignition switch is in the ON position.However, the switching indicators willnot function.

*3: Doors lock with the keyfob while anydoor is open. However, the switchingindicators will not function.

Unlocking doors and fuel-fillerdoor

1. Push the UNLOCK button on thekeyfob once.

O The driver’s door and fuel-filler doorunlock

O The hazard indicator flashes once if alldoors are completely closed with theignition switch in any position exceptin the ON position.

O The interior light timer activates andthe interior light comes on for 30 sec-onds when the interior light switch isat the DOOR position with the ignitionswitch in any position except in theON position.

2. Push the UNLOCK button on thekeyfob again within 5 seconds.

O All doors and trunk lid unlock

O The hazard indicator flashes once if alldoors are completely closed.

All doors will be locked automatically un-less one of the following operations isperformed within 1 minute of pushing theUNLOCK button.

O opening any door.

SPA1918


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

O opening trunk lid.

O turning the ignition switch to the ONposition

The interior light can be turned offwithout waiting for 30 seconds by turningthe ignition switch to the ON position orby locking the doors with the keyfob.

Opening the windows

Push the UNLOCK button on thekeyfob.

The driver’s door and fuel-filler door willunlock.

Continue to push the UNLOCK buttonfor more than 3 seconds. The door win-dows will start to lower.

Continue to push the UNLOCK buttonuntil windows are fully open.

To stop the windows lowering operation,release the UNLOCK button.

To start the windows lowering operation,push the UNLOCK button again formore than 3 seconds.

Releasing the trunk lid

1. Push the TRUNK button on thekeyfob for longer than 0.5 seconds

when the ignition switch is in any po-sition except the ON position.

2. The trunk lid opens.

The trunk lid cannot be opened by operat-ing the keyfob when the ignition switch isin the ON position.

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feelthreatened, you may activate the alarm tocall attention as follows:

1. Push the PANIC button on thekeyfob for longer than 0.5 secondswith the key removed from the ignitionswitch.

2. The theft warning alarm and head-lights will stay on for 25 seconds.

3. The panic alarm stops when:

O It has run for 25 seconds, or

O The LOCK button or the UNLOCKbutton on keyfob is pushed, or

O The TRUNK button or the PANICbutton on the keyfob is pushed

for longer than 0.5 second.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Setting hazard indicator and hornmode

The factory setting of the remote keylessentry system is in hazard indicator andhorn mode.

In hazard indicator and horn mode, whenthe LOCK button is pushed, thehazard indicator flashes twice and thehorn chirps once. When the UNLOCK

button is pushed, the hazard indica-tor flashes once.

If horn chirps are not necessary, thesystem can be switched to hazard indica-tor mode.

In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCKbutton is pushed, the hazard indica-

tor flashes twice. When the UNLOCKbutton is pushed, neither the hazard

indicator nor the horn operates.

Switching procedure:

Push the LOCK button and UNLOCKbutton on the keyfob simultaneously

for more than 2 seconds to switch fromone mode to the other.

When pushing the buttons to set hazardindicator only mode, the hazard indicatorflashes 3 times.

When pushing the buttons to set hazardindicator and horn mode, the hazard indi-cator flashes once and the horn chirpsonce.

SPA2180


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

The Intelligent Key uses coded radio sig-nals to communicate with the vehicle.When the Intelligent Key is near the ve-hicle, such as in your pocket or purse, itallows the vehicle to be locked, unlocked,or started without inserting the ignitionkey. It is also possible to use the remotecontrol entry function.

CAUTION

O Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key withyou.

O Do not leave the vehicle with the Intelli-gent Key inside.

O The Intelligent Key may not functioncorrectly depending on the environ-ment or operating conditions. It couldalso malfunction if you do not use itcorrectly.

O The Intelligent Key transmits faintradio waves.

In the following situations, the Intelli-gent Key and remote control entry func-tions may not operate correctly, andyou may have to use the metal key (me-chanical key, valet key or wallet key):

— when there are strong signalscoming from a television tower,power station or broadcasting sta-tion.

— when you have wireless equipmentor a cellular phone with you.

— when the Intelligent Key is in con-tact with or covered by a metallicmaterial.

— when radio wave-type remote con-trol entry is used nearby.

— when the Intelligent Key is placednear an electric appliance such as apersonal computer.

O The Intelligent Key continually con-sumes battery power as the key re-ceives a signal to communicate withthe vehicle. Battery life is about 2years, although it varies depending onthe operating conditions. When thebattery of the Intelligent Key is low, thegreen blinking key warning light goesout about 30 seconds after the ignitionswitch is turned to the ON position. Ifthe battery runs down, replace it with anew one.

O If the Intelligent Key receives strongsignal over an extended period of time,

the battery could quickly run down. Donot place the Intelligent Key near anelectric appliance such as a televisionset or personal computer.

O Because the ignition switch is elec-tronically controlled, if the battery iscompletely discharged when the igni-tion switch is in the LOCK position, thesteering lock cannot be released andthe ignition switch cannot be turned(including the mechanical key). Becareful not to completely discharge thebattery.

O In case the battery is completely dis-charged, make sure to recharge thebattery immediately.

For information regarding the replacementof a battery, see “Keyfob battery replace-ment” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM (if so equipped)


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Intelligent Key 2 sets2. Mechanical key (metal key)* 2 sets3. Valet key (metal key)*4. Wallet key and key case (card type)

(metal key)5. Key number plate

*: Refer to “INFINITI Vehicle ImmobilizerSystem keys” earlier in this section.

WARNING

O The Intelligent Key transmits radiowaves that can adversely affect medicalelectric equipment.

O If you have a pacemaker, you shouldcontact the medical equipment manufac-turer to ask if it will be affected by the In-telligent Key signal.

The valet key cannot be used for the glovebox lock and the trunk access window lidlock.

To protect belongings when you leave akey with someone, give them the valetkey only.

Record the key number on the keynumber plate/metal tag and keep it in asafe place (such as your wallet), NOT INTHE VEHICLE. A key number plate is sup-plied with your key. Keep the plate in asafe place. INFINITI does not record keynumbers so it is very important to keeptrack of your key number plate.

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be usedwith one vehicle. For information concern-ing the purchase and use of additional re-mote controllers, contact an INFINITIdealer.

It is possible that the Intelligent Key func-tions can become cancelled. Please con-tact an INFINITI dealer.

CAUTION

Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with youwhen driving. The Intelligent Key is a preci-sion device with a built-in transmitter. Toavoid damaging it, please note the fol-lowing.

O The Intelligent Key is water resistant,wetting may damage the Intelligent Key.If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immedi-ately wipe until it is completely dry.

O Do not bend, drop or strike it against an-other object.

O Do not place the Intelligent Key for anextended period in a place where tem-peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

SPA2179


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

O Do not change or modify the IntelligentKey.

O Do not use a magnet key holder.

O Do not place the Intelligent Key near anelectric appliance such as a televisionset or personal computer.

O Do not place the Intelligent Key in astorage area (for example, a door pocketor glove box). It could be damaged or ac-tivated unexpectedly.

O Do not allow the Intelligent Key to comeinto contact with water or salt water,and do not wash it in a washing ma-chine. This could affect the system func-tion.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, INFINITIrecommends erasing the ID code of that In-telligent Key. This will prevent the Intelli-gent Key from unauthorized use to unlockthe vehicle. For information regarding theerasing procedure, please contact anINFINITI dealer.

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKSPRECAUTION

O After locking with the door handle re-quest switch, make sure the doors aresecurely locked.

O To prevent the Intelligent Key from be-ing left inside the vehicle, make sureyou carry the key with you and thenlock the doors.

O To prevent the Intelligent Key from be-ing left inside the trunk, make sureyou carry the key with you and thenclose the trunk.

O You can lock or unlock the doors usingonly the door handle, which detectsthe Intelligent Key.

O When you try to unlock the door whilepulling the door handle, the door maynot unlock. In this case, release thedoor handle and the door will unlock.Pull the door handle again and thedoor will open.

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION

You can lock or unlock the doors withouttaking the key out from your pocket orpurse.

When you carry the Intelligent Key withyou, you can lock or unlock all doors bypushing the door handle request switchqA within the range of operation.

Locking doors and fuel-filler door

1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCKposition and remove the ignition key ifany metal key is in the ignitionswitch.*1, *2

SPA2293


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

2. Close all the doors.*3

3. Push any door handle request switchwhile carrying the Intelligent Key withyou.*4

4. All the doors and fuel-filler door willlock.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice andoutside buzzer sounds twice.

*1: Doors lock with the Intelligent Keywhile a mechanical key or valet key isin the ignition switch.

*2: Doors lock with the Intelligent Keywhile the ignition switch is not in theLOCK position.

*3: Doors do not lock by pushing thedoor handle request switch or theLOCK button on the IntelligentKey while any door is open. Outsidebuzzer sounds to warn you. However,doors lock with the metal key even ifany door is open.

*4: Doors do not lock with door handlerequest switch with the IntelligentKey inside the vehicle and outsidebuzzer sounds to warn you.However, when an Intelligent Key isinside the vehicle, doors can belocked with another Intelligent Key.

Unlocking doors and fuel-fillerdoor

1. Push the door handle request switchonce.

Driver’s side:

O The driver door and fuel-filler doorunlock.

Passenger side:

O Only corresponding door unlocks.

2. The hazard indicator flashes twice andoutside buzzer sounds once if alldoors are completely closed with theignition switch in any position exceptthe ON position.

3. Push the door handle request switchagain within 5 seconds.

O All doors (and the fuel-filler door) un-lock.

O The hazard indicator flashes once andoutside buzzer sounds once if alldoors are completely closed.

All doors will be locked automaticallyafter pushing the door handle requestswitch unless one of the following opera-tions is performed within 1 minute.

O any door is opened

O the ignition switch is pushed

O the mechanical key or the valet key isinserted into the ignition switch

The interior light, ceiling light (if soequipped) and step light can be turned offwithout waiting for 30 seconds by turningthe ignition switch to the ON position orby locking the doors.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Opening trunk lid

1. Push the trunk open request switchqA .

2. The trunk will be unlatched and buzzersounds four times.

3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.

Lockout protection:

To prevent the Intelligent Key from beingaccidentally locked in the trunk, lockoutprotection is equipped with the IntelligentKey system.

When the trunk lid is closed with the In-telligent Key inside the trunk, the outsidebuzzer will sound and the trunk will open.

OPENING AND CLOSING WINDOWS

O To open the windows, push the UN-LOCK button on the IntelligentKey for about 3 seconds or turn thedoor key cylinder with the metal keyto the rear of the vehicle for about 2seconds after the door is unlocked.

To stop opening, release the UNLOCKbutton or turn the key to the neu-

tral position.

O To close the windows, turn the doorkey cylinder to the front of the vehiclefor about 2 seconds after the door islocked.

To stop closing, turn the key to theneutral position.

The door windows will open or closewhile turning the metal key. See “Doors”earlier in this section.

OPERATING THE ENGINE

Ignition switch positions

Push in the ignition switch in the qB

range when you turn it.

LOCK (Normal parking position) qA :

The ignition switch can only be locked inthe qA position.

The ignition switch will be unlocked whenit is pushed in, and turned to the ACC po-sition qD while carrying the IntelligentKey.

SPA2294 SPA1628


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

ACC (Accessories) qD :

This position activates electrical accesso-ries such as the radio, when the engine isnot running.

ON (Normal operating position) qE :

This position turns on the ignition systemand electrical accessories.

START qF :

This position starts the engine. As soonas the engine has started, release theswitch immediately. It will automaticallyreturn to the ON position.

For important safety information, see “Ig-nition switch” in the “5. Starting and driv-ing” section.

The ignition switch cannot be turned backto the LOCK position unless the shift leveris in P position. (It can be turned to onlyqC .)

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the ignitionswitch in ACC or ON position when the en-gine is not running for an extended period.

This can discharge the battery.

Starting the engine

When driving the vehicle, be sure to carrythe Intelligent Key with you.

1. Securely depress the brake pedal.

2. Slowly push the ignition switch in.When the Intelligent Key warning lightqA in the instrument panel comes onin green, the ignition switch can beturned.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the STARTposition and the engine will bestarted.

SPA1891


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

4. When the engine starts, release the ig-nition switch.

WARNING

Do not start the engine from outside the ve-hicle through the window. Doing so couldlead to an accident and injury. Be sure to sitin the driver’s seat to use the key.

For important safety information, see“Starting the engine” in the “5. Startingand driving” section.

O When the ignition switch is pushedunder the following conditions, the In-telligent Key warning light in the in-strument panel comes on in red. It isnot possible to turn the ignition switchwhen:

— you do not have the Intelligent Keywith you

— the Intelligent Key battery has rundown

— you have an Intelligent Key for an-other vehicle with you

O Slowly turn the ignition switch afterthe Intelligent Key warning lightcomes on in green. If it is turnedquickly, it may stick and be difficult toturn.

O The engine may not start if the Intelli-gent Key is placed:

— inside the glove box or the doorpocket

— on the instrument panel

— in the corner of interior compart-ment.

O If it is difficult to turn the ignitionswitch, perform the following:

— Push the ignition switch and turn itto the left and then to the right.

— Turn the ignition switch whilegently turning the steering wheel tothe left or right.

Stopping the engine

1. Shift the selector lever to the P posi-tion.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC po-sition.

WARNING

When you leave the vehicle, be sure to ob-serve the following:

O Shift the selector lever to P . (In other po-sitions, the ignition switch will not re-turn to LOCK.)

O Securely return the ignition switch toLOCK.

O Set the parking brake. Failure to do socould result in unexpected vehicle move-ment and could lead to severe injury.

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATINGRANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can be usedonly when you carry the key with you andoperate as specified in the operatingrange inside or outside the vehicle.

When the Intelligent Key battery runsdown or where there are strong radiowaves or noise, the operating range maybe narrower or the key may be inopera-tive.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Operating range of the door ortrunk lock/unlock function

The outside sensors are in the front out-side door handles and the trunk.

The operating range of the door or trunklock/unlock function by pushing the doorhandle request switch or trunk open re-quest switch is shown in the illustration.

q1 31.5 in (80 cm) from the door handlerequest switch

q2 31.5 in (80 cm) from the trunk open re-quest switch

O If you are too close to the outsidedoor handles or rear bumper, the In-telligent Key may not operate.

O If the Intelligent Key is in the oper-ating range, it is possible for anyonewho does not carry the Intelligent Keyto lock/unlock the doors by pushingthe door handle request switch.

Operating range for engine startfunction

The operating range for starting the en-gine is inside the vehicle.

O If the Intelligent Key is on the instru-ment panel, rear parcel shelf, insidethe glove box or door pocket, or thecorner of interior compartment, it maynot be possible to start the engine.

O If the Intelligent Key is near the dooror door glass outside the vehicle, itmay be possible to start the engine.

SPA2297

SPA2298


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING SIGNALS

To help prevent the vehicle from movingunexpectedly by erroneous operation ofthe Intelligent Key or to help prevent thevehicle from being stolen, chime or beepsounds inside and outside the vehicleand a warning light comes on in the in-strument panel.

When a chime or beep sounds or thewarning light comes on, be sure to checkthe vehicle and Intelligent Key.

Alarm and warning when lockingthe doors

When the front door warning chime oroutside buzzer sounds, check for the fol-lowing:

O The ignition switch is turned to theLOCK position.

O The Intelligent Key is not left insidethe vehicle.

O Doors are closed securely.

O The selector lever is in the P position.

Alarm and warning when theengine stops

When the P position selecting warninglight qB in the instrument panel blinks inred:

O Make sure the selector lever is in theP position.

When the chime sounds intermittently:

O Make sure the selector lever is in theP position and the ignition switch isturned to the LOCK position.

If the chime sounds continuously whenthe driver’s door is opened, check the fol-lowing:

O The selector lever is in the P positionand the ignition switch is turned tothe LOCK position.

O The mechanical key or the valet key isnot inserted into the ignition switch.

O The inside warning chime may stopwhen one of the following is per-formed.

— Returning the ignition switch to theLOCK position.

— Removing the mechanical key orthe valet key.

— Closing the doors.

Alarm and warning when theengine starts

When the Intelligent Key warning light qA

is blinking in red and the outside buzzersounds, make sure the Intelligent Key isinside the vehicle.

SPA1892


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Warning for low battery power

O This warning is to let you know thatthe battery of the Intelligent Key willrun down soon. Replace it with a newone.

— The green blinking Intelligent Keywarning light qA goes out about 30seconds after the ignition switch isturned to ON.

O We recommend replacing the batteryat an INFINITI dealer.

Preventing the Intelligent Keyfrom being left in the vehicle

If you lock all doors using the power doorlock switch with the Intelligent Key in thevehicle, all of the doors unlock immedi-ately and the beep sounds to warn youwhen the door is closed.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

TROUBLE-SHOOTING GUIDESymptom Possible Cause Remedy

When pushing the door handlerequest switch

The outside buzzer sounds for approxi-mately 2 seconds. The doors cannot be locked.

Take out the Intelligent Key from the ve-hicle and push the door handle requestswitch.Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-tion and push the door handle requestswitch while carrying the Intelligent Keywith you.Close all the doors securely and push thedoor handle request switch while carryingthe Intelligent Key with you.

When closing the doors

The outside buzzer sounds for approxi-mately 10 seconds.

The ignition switch is not turned to theLOCK position.

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-tion.

The Intelligent Key warning light in theinstrument panel blinks in red and theoutside buzzer sounds 3 times.

The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key withyou.

The outside buzzer sounds for approxi-mately 3 seconds and all doors unlock.

The Intelligent Key has been left in thevehicle.

Take out the Intelligent Key from the ve-hicle and close the door.

When closing the trunk The outside buzzer sounds and thetrunk opens.

The Intelligent Key has been left in thetrunk room.

Take out the Intelligent Key from the trunkroom and close the trunk.

When opening the driver’s door An inside warning chime sounds con-tinuously.

The ignition switch is not in the LOCKposition, or the mechanical key or valetkey is inserted into the ignition switch.

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-tion.Remove the mechanical key or valet keyfrom the ignition switch.

When stopping the engine The P position selecting warning lightin the instrument panel blinks in red.

The selector lever is not in the P posi-tion.

Make sure that the selector lever is in the Pposition.

When turning the ignition switch An inside warning chime sounds con-tinuously.

The ignition switch is not turned to theLOCK position.

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-tion.

When starting the engine The Intelligent Key warning light in theinstrument panel blinks in green. The battery charge is low.

Replace the battery with a new one. See“KEYFOB BATTERY REPLACEMENT” in the “8.Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

When pushing the ignition switch The Intelligent Key warning light in theinstrument panel comes on in red. The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle.

If the Intelligent Key warning light comeson in red even while you are carrying theIntelligent Key, the battery is completelydischarged. Replace the battery with a newone. See “KEYFOB BATTERY REPLACEMENT”in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Troubleshooting examples

When it is difficult to turn the ignitionswitch

O Push the ignition switch and turn it tothe left and then to the right.

O While gently turning the steeringwheel to the left or right, turn the igni-tion switch.

OPERATION WITH INTELLIGENTREMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors,fuel-filler door, activate the panic alarmand open the windows by pushing thebuttons on the Intelligent Key from out-side the vehicle.

Before locking the doors, make sure thekey is not left in the vehicle.

The LOCK /UNLOCK button onthe Intelligent Key can operate at a dis-tance of approximately 33 ft (10 m) fromthe vehicle. (The effective distance de-pends upon the conditions around the ve-hicle.)As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be usedwith one vehicle. For information concern-ing the purchase and use of additional In-telligent Key, contact an INFINITI dealer.

The lock and unlock buttons on the Intel-ligent Key will not operate when:

O the Intelligent Key is too far away fromthe vehicle

O the Intelligent Key battery runs down

After locking with the Intelligent remotekeyless entry function, pull the doorhandle to make sure the doors are se-curely locked.

The operating range varies depending onthe environment. To securely operate thelock and unlock buttons, approach the ve-hicle to about 3 ft (1 m) from the door.

The panic alarm will not activate when themechanical key or the valet key is in the ig-nition switch.

q1 LOCK button

q2 UNLOCK button

q3 TRUNK button

q4 PANIC button

How to use remote keyless entrysystem

Locking doors and fuel-filler door:

1. Remove the mechanical key or the va-let key if any key is in the ignitionswitch.*1

2. Close all the doors.*2

SPA1895


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

3. Push the LOCK button on the In-telligent Key.

4. All doors and fuel-filler door will lock.

All of the doors will lock when the LOCKbutton on the Intelligent Key is

pushed even though the ignition switch isin the ON position.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice andthe horn chirps once.

O When the LOCK button is pushedwith all doors locked, the hazard indi-cator flashes twice and the hornchirps once as a reminder that thedoors are already locked.

*1: Doors lock with the Intelligent Keywhile the mechanical key or the valetkey is in the ignition switch or the ig-nition switch is pushed in.

*2: Doors do not lock with the IntelligentKey while any door is open.

Unlocking doors and fuel-filler door:

1. Push the UNLOCK button on theIntelligent Key once.

O The driver’s door and fuel-filler doorunlock

O The hazard indicator flashes once if alldoors are completely closed with theignition switch in any position exceptthe ON position.

O The interior light turns on and thelight timer activates for 30 secondswhen the switch is in the DOOR posi-tion with the ignition switch in any po-sition except the ON position.

2. Push the UNLOCK button on theIntelligent Key again within 5 seconds.

O All doors unlock.

O The hazard indicator flashes once if alldoors are completely closed.

All doors will be locked automatically un-less one of the following operations isperformed within 1 minute of pushing theUNLOCK button.

O opening any door

O the ignition switch is pushed

O the mechanical key or the valet key isinserted into the ignition switch

The interior light can be turned off withoutwaiting for 30 seconds by turning the igni-tion switch to the ON position or by lockingthe doors with the Intelligent Key.

Opening the windows:

See “Opening and closing windows” ear-lier in this section.

Releasing the trunk lid:

1. Push and hold the TRUNK buttonon the Intelligent Key for longer than0.5 second when the ignition switch isin any position except the ON posi-tion.

2. The trunk lid opens.

The trunk lid cannot be opened by operat-ing the Intelligent Key when the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.

Using the panic alarm:

If you are near your vehicle and feelthreatened, you may activate the alarm tocall attention as follows:

1. Push the PANIC button on the In-telligent Key for longer than 0.5 secondwith the metal key removed from theignition switch or the ignition switchnot pushed in.

2. The theft warning alarm and head-lights will stay on for 25 seconds.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

3. The panic alarm stops when:

O It has run for 25 seconds, or

O The LOCK , UNLOCK ,TRUNK or PANIC buttonon the Intelligent Key is pushed forlonger than 0.5 second.

Hazard indicator mode

DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK

Keyfob or Intelligent KeyHAZARD - twice No operation

Door handle request switch

Hazard indicator and horn mode

DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK

Keyfob or Intelligent KeyHAZARD - twiceHORN-once

HORN - once

Door handle request switchHAZARD - twiceOUTSIDE BUZZER - twice

HORN - onceOUTSIDE BUZZER - once

Setting hazard indicator and horn mode:

This vehicle is set in hazard indicator andhorn mode when you first receive the ve-hicle.

In hazard indicator and horn mode, whenthe LOCK button is pushed, the haz-ard indicator flashes twice and the hornchirps once. When the UNLOCK

button is pushed, the hazard indica-tor flashes once.

If the horn is not necessary, the system canbe switched to the hazard indicator mode.

In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCKbutton is pushed, the hazard indica-

tor flashes twice. When the UNLOCKbutton is pushed, neither the hazard

indicator nor the horn operates.

Switching procedure:

Push the LOCK button and UNLOCKbutton on the Intelligent Key simul-

taneously for more than 2 seconds toswitch from one mode to the other.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

When pushing the buttons to set hazardindicator only mode, the hazard indicatorflashes 3 times.

When pushing the buttons to set hazardindicator and horn mode, the hazard indi-cator flashes once and the horn chirpsonce.

OPERATION WITH THEMECHANICAL KEY AND VALET KEY

If the Intelligent Key cannot be used be-cause its battery is discharged, use themetal key to lock or unlock the doors anduse the mechanical key or the valet key,which is registered to the INFINITI VehicleImmobilizer System components, to startthe engine.

Removing the mechanical key

O Release the lock knob at the back ofthe Intelligent Key and remove the me-chanical key.

O To install the mechanical key to the In-telligent Key, securely lock the lockknob and then check that the me-chanical key will not move.

CAUTION

Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with themechanical key installed in it.

Locking/unlocking the doors withthe metal key (mechanical key,valet key and wallet key)

The doors can be locked/unlocked by in-serting the metal key into the key cylinderin the driver’s door in the same way asthe ordinary key.

Starting the engine with themechanical key

1. Securely depress the brake pedal.

2. Insert the mechanical key or the valetkey into the ignition switch.

SPA1878


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

3. Turn the ignition switch to the STARTposition and start the engine.

4. After starting the engine, release theswitch.

When the engine is off, the steering wheellock cannot be unlocked.

For important safety information, see the“5. Starting and driving” section.

Windows open/close with themechanical key

See “Opening and closing windows” ear-lier in this section.

1. Pull the hood lock release handle q1located below the instrument panel;the hood will then spring up slightly.

2. Raise the lever q2 at the front of thehood with your fingertips and raisethe hood.

3. Insert the assist bar into the slot q3 inthe front edge of the hood.

4. When closing the hood, reset the as-sist bar to its original position, thenslowly close the hood and make sureit locks into place.

WARNING

O Make sure the hood is completely closedand latched before driving. Failure to doso could cause the hood to fly open andresult in an accident.

O If you see steam or smoke coming fromthe engine compartment, to avoid injurydo not open the hood.

SPA1632 SPA2295

HOOD


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

O Do not drive with the trunk lid open. Thiscould allow dangerous exhaust gases tobe drawn into the vehicle. See “Precau-tions when starting and driving” in the“5. Starting and driving” section for ex-haust gas.

O Closely supervise children when theyare around cars to prevent them fromplaying and becoming locked in thetrunk where they could be seriously in-jured. Keep the car locked, with the rearseatback and trunk lid securely latchedwhen not in use, and prevent children’saccess to car keys.

OPENER OPERATION

The trunk lid release switch qA is locatedat the bottom of the instrument panel.

To open the trunk lid, slide the trunk lidrelease switch qA or push the TRUNK but-ton of the keyfob.

To close, push the trunk lid down se-curely.

Trunk open request switch

Models without Intelligent Key system:

The trunk lid can be opened by pushingthe trunk open request switch qA whenthe front passenger inside lock knob is inthe unlock position.

Models with Intelligent Key system:

The trunk lid can be opened by pushingthe trunk open request switch when theIntelligent Key is within the operatingrange of the trunk lock/unlock functionregardless of the inside lock knob posi-

SPA2108 SPA2182

TRUNK LID


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

tion. See “Intelligent Key system” earlierin this section.

Cancel switch

When the cancel switch located inside theglove box is pushed to the OFF side.

O the trunk lid cannot be opened only bypushing the trunk lid release switch.

O the trunk lid cannot be opened bypushing the trunk open requestswitch.

O for models equipped with the Intelli-gent Key system, the trunk lockoutprotection function is not activated.,

The trunk lid can be opened only bypushing the TRUNK button of the

keyfob or Intelligent Key.

SPA1897


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE

The interior trunk lid release mechanismprovides a means of escape in the eventof becoming locked inside the trunk.

The handle q1 is located on the back sideof the trunk lid inside the trunk compart-ment.

To open the trunk lid from the inside, pullthe release handle towards you until thelock releases and push up on the trunk lid.The release lever is made of a material thatglows in the dark after a brief exposure toambient light.

SECONDARY TRUNK LID RELEASE

The secondary trunk lid release mecha-nism allows opening of the trunk lid inthe event of the loss of electrical powersuch as a discharged battery.

Access the handle from the rear seat.

Pull the strap q1 , located at centerbottom of the seatback sideways, andthen fold down the seatback q2 .

To open the trunk lid from the rear seat,pull the release handle towards front of ve-hicle until the lock releases.

SPA1561A SPA2122


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR

To open the fuel-filler door, unlock thefuel-filler door lock by using one of thefollowing operations, then push the left-hand side of the lid.

O Push the UNLOCK button on thekeyfob or Intelligent Key once.

O Insert the key into the door lock cylin-der and turn the door key cylinder tothe rear of the vehicle.

O Push the power door lock switch tothe UNLOCK position.

To lock, close the fuel-filler door and lockthe doors.

FUEL-FILLER CAP

The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type.Tighten the cap clockwise until ratchetingclicks are heard.

Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holderqA while refueling.

WARNING

O Gasoline is extremely flammable andhighly explosive under certain condi-tions. You could be burned or seriously

SPA1562A SPA1563A

FUEL-FILLER DOOR


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

injured if it is misused or mishandled. Al-ways stop the engine and do not smokeor allow open flames or sparks near thevehicle when refueling.

O Fuel may be under pressure. Turn thecap a third of a turn, and wait for any“hissing” sound to stop to prevent fuelfrom spraying out and possibly causingpersonal injury.

O Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank af-ter the fuel pump nozzle shuts off auto-matically. Continued refueling maycause fuel overflow, causing the fuel tospray and possibly a fire.

O Use only an original equipment typefuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has abuilt-in safety valve needed for properoperation of the fuel system and emis-sion control system. An incorrect capcan result in a serious malfunction andpossible injury. An incorrect cap couldalso cause the malfunction indi-cator light to illuminate.

O Do not fill a portable fuel container in the

vehicle or trailer. Static electricity cancause an explosion of flammable liquid,vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. Toreduce the risk of serious injury or deathwhen filling portable fuel containers:— Always place the container on the

ground when filling.— Do not use electronic devices when

filling.— Keep the pump nozzle in contact with

the container while you are filling it.— Use only approved portable fuel con-

tainers for flammable liquid.

O Never pour fuel into the throttle body toattempt to start your vehicle.

CAUTION

O If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,flush it away with water to avoid paintdamage.

O Tighten until the fuel-filler cap clicks.Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap prop-erly may cause the malfunction in-

dicator light (MIL) to illuminate. If thelight illuminates because the fuel-

filler cap is loose or missing, tighten orinstall the cap and continue to drive thevehicle. The light should turn offafter a few driving trips. If the lightdoes not turn off after a few driving trips,have the vehicle inspected by an INFINITIdealer.

O For additional information, see the “Mal-function indicator light (MIL)” in the “2.Instruments and controls” section.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

O Do not adjust the steering wheel whiledriving. You could lose control of yourvehicle and cause an accident.

O Do not adjust the steering wheel anycloser to you than is necessary forproper steering operation and comfort.The driver’s air bag inflates with greatforce. If you are unrestrained, leaningforward, sitting sideways or out of posi-tion in any way, you are at greater risk ofinjury or death in a crash. You may alsoreceive serious or fatal injuries from theair bag if you are up against it when it in-flates. Always sit back against the seat-back and as far away as practical fromthe steering wheel. Always use the seatbelts.

MANUAL OPERATION

Tilt operation

Pull the lock lever q1 down and adjust thesteering wheel up or down q2 to the de-sired position.

Push the lock lever up securely to lockthe steering wheel in place.

Telescopic operation

Pull the lock lever q3 down and adjustthe steering wheel forward or backwardq4 to the desired position.Push the lock lever up securely to lock

the steering wheel in place.

SPA1946

STEERING WHEEL


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

ELECTRIC OPERATION (if soequipped)

Tilt or telescopic operation

Move the lever to adjust the steeringwheel up or down, forward or rearward tothe desired position.

Entry/Exit function operation (if soequipped):

The automatic drive positioner system willmake the steering wheel move upautomatically when the key is removedfrom the ignition switch. This lets the

driver get into and out of the seat moreeasily. The steering wheel moves backinto position when the key is inserted intothe ignition switch. For more information,see “Automatic drive positioner” later inthis section.

SPA1898

SPA2176

SUN VISORS


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

CAUTION

O Do not store the main sun visor beforestoring the extension sun visor.

O Do not pull the extension sun visor forc-edly downward.

1. To block out glare from the front,swing down the main sun visor q1 .

2. To block glare from the side, removethe main sun visor from the centermount and swing it to the side q2 .

3. Draw out the extension sun visor q3from the main sun visor to block fromfurther glare.

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE INSIDEMIRROR (if so equipped)

The inside mirror is designed so that itautomatically changes reflection ac-cording to the intensity of the headlightof the following vehicle.

The anti-glare system will be automati-cally turned on when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON position.

When the inside mirror is in the “I”(AUTO) position q1 , excessive glare fromthe headlights of the vehicle behind youwill be reduced. The AUTO indicator light

qA (green) will be on. When the switch ofthe inside mirror is in the “q” (OFF) posi-tion q2 , the inside mirror will operate nor-mally.

For HomeLink Universal Transceiver, seethe description in the “2. Instruments andcontrols” section.

SPA2157

MIRRORS


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

Objects viewed in the outside mirror on thepassenger side are closer than they appear.Be careful when moving to the right. Usingonly this mirror could cause an accident. Usethe inside mirror or glance over yourshoulder to properly judge distances toother objects.

The outside mirror adjustment will op-erate only when the ignition switch is inthe ACC or ON position.

Turn the control knob right or left to se-lect the right or left outside mirror, thenadjust by tilting the control knob.

Foldable outside mirrors

Fold the outside mirror by pushing it to-ward the rear of the vehicle.

SPA1390 SPA1829


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONEROPERATION

The automatic drive positioner systemhas two features:

O Entry/exit function (only available onmodels equipped with automatictransmission)

O Memory storage function

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION (if soequipped)

This system is designed so that the driv-er’s seat and steering column will auto-matically move when the automatic trans-mission selector lever is in the P (Park)position. This allows the driver to get intoand out of the driver’s seat more easily.(This feature is not available on modelsequipped with manual transmission.)

The driver’s seat will slide backward andthe steering wheel will move up when thedriver’s door is opened with the key or ig-nition switch in the LOCK position.

The driver’s seat and steering wheel willreturn to the previous positions:

O When the key is inserted into the igni-tion switch after closing the driver’s

door, or when the driver’s door isclosed after inserting the key into theignition switch.

O When the ignition switch is pushedwith the driver’s door closed.

O When the key or ignition switch isturned to the ON position.

The driver’s seat and steering wheel willnot return to the previous positions if theseat or steering adjusting switch is oper-ated when the seat and the steeringwheel are at the exit position.

Initializing entry/exit function

The entry/exit function can be activatedor cancelled by pushing and holding theSET switch for more than 10 secondswhile the ignition switch is in the LOCKposition. The indicator light will blinkonce when the function is cancelled, andthe indicator light will blink twice whenthe function is activated. If the batterycable is disconnected, or if the fuseopens, the entry/exit function will be can-celled. In such a case, after connectingthe battery or replacing with a new fuse,open and close the driver’s door morethan two times while the ignition switchis in the LOCK position. The entry/exit

function will be activated.

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if soequipped)


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION

Two positions for the driver’s seat andsteering column can be stored in the au-tomatic drive positioner memory. Followthese procedures to use the memory sys-tem.

1. For vehicles equipped with automatictransmission, move the selector leverto the P (Park) position.

For vehicles equipped with manualtransmission, move the shift lever tothe N (Neutral) position and apply theparking brake.

2. Adjust the driver’s seat and steeringcolumn to the desired positions bymanually operating each adjustingswitch. For additional information, see“Seats” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seatbelts and supplemental restraintsystem” section and “Steering wheel”earlier in this section.

3. Turn the ignition ON.

4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 sec-onds, push the memory switch (1 or 2)fully for at least 1 second.

The indicator light for the pushedmemory switch will come on and stayon for approximately 5 seconds afterpushing the switch. After the indicatorlight goes off, the selected positionsare stored in the selected memory (1or 2).

If a new memory is stored in the samememory switch, the previous memorywill be deleted.

Linking a keyfob or Intelligent Keyto a stored memory position

A keyfob or Intelligent Key can be linkedto a stored memory position with the fol-lowing procedure.

1. Follow the steps for storing a memoryposition.

2. While the indicator light for thememory switch being set is illumi-nated for 5 seconds, push the

button on the keyfob or Intelli-gent Key. The indicator light will blink.After the indicator light goes off, thekeyfob or Intelligent Key is linked tothat memory setting.

With the key removed from the ignitionswitch, push the button on thekeyfob or Intelligent Key. The driver’s seatand steering wheel will move to thememorized position.

Confirming memory storage

O Turn the ignition ON and push the SETswitch. If the main memory has notbeen stored, the indicator light willcome on for approximately 0.5 sec-onds. When the memory has stored inposition, the indicator light will stayon for approximately 5 seconds.

O If the battery cable is disconnected, orif the fuse opens, the memory will becanceled.

Reset the desired position using theprevious procedure.

SPA2296


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Selecting the memorized position

1. For vehicles equipped with automatictransmission, move the selector leverto the P (Park) position.

For vehicles equipped with manualtransmission, move the shift lever inthe N (Neutral) position and apply theparking brake.

2. Use one of the following methods tomove the driver’s seat and thesteering wheel.

O Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”position and push the memoryswitch (1 or 2) fully for at least 1second.

O Within 45 seconds of opening thedriver’s door, push the memoryswitch (1 or 2) fully for at least 1second.

The driver’s seat and steering columnwill move to the memorized positionwith the indicator light flashing, andthen the light will stay on for approxi-mately 5 seconds.

SYSTEM OPERATION

The automatic drive positioner system willnot work or will stop operating under thefollowing conditions:

O when the vehicle speed is above 4MPH (7 km/h).

O when the adjusting switch for the driv-er’s seat and steering column isturned on while the automatic drivepositioner is operating.

O when the memory switch 1 or 2 is notpushed and held for at least 1 second.

O when the seat has already beenmoved to the memorized position.

O when no seat position is stored in thememory switch.

O when the parking brake is not applied.— MT models

O when the speed is above 4 MPH (7km/h) while the parking brake is ap-plied. — MT modelsTo restart the drive positioner system,move the parking brake to off and on.

O when the front seat is folded for oper-ating the walk-in mechanism (if soequipped).

O when the engine is started while theautomatic drive positioner is operating.

O when the AT selector lever is movedfrom the P position to any other posi-tion. (However, it will not be cancelledif the switch is pushed while the seatand steering column are returning tothe previous positions (entry/exitfunction).)

O when the driver’s door remains openfor more than 45 seconds and the igni-tion switch is not in the ON position.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner andaudio systems

Safety note....................................................... 4-2Control panel buttons — with navigationsystem ............................................................. 4-2

Names of the components .......................... 4-2How to use joystick and “ENTER” button..... 4-3How to use “BACK” button.......................... 4-3Setting up the start-up screen..................... 4-3How to use “INFO” button........................... 4-3How to use “SETTING” button ..................... 4-7How to use the button ........................ 4-9

Ventilators........................................................ 4-9Heater and air conditioner (Automatic)............ 4-10

Automatic operation ................................... 4-11Manual operation....................................... 4-12Dual button (if so equipped) ...................... 4-12Ambient temperature ................................. 4-12Operating tips............................................ 4-12In-cabin microfilter..................................... 4-13

Servicing air conditioner ................................. 4-13

Audio system .................................................. 4-14FM radio reception..................................... 4-14AM radio reception .................................... 4-15Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) ... 4-15Audio operation precautions ...................... 4-15FM-AM-satellite radio with compact disc(CD) changer.............................................. 4-21CD care and cleaning ................................ 4-26Steering wheel switch for audio control .... 4-27Antenna..................................................... 4-27

Car phone or CB radio ................................... 4-28Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System withINFINITI voice recognition ............................... 4-29

Using the system ...................................... 4-30Control buttons ......................................... 4-32Getting started .......................................... 4-33List of voice commands ............................. 4-35Speaker adaptation (SA) mode.................. 4-40Troubleshooting guide............................... 4-43

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

O Do not disassemble or modify thissystem. If you do, it may result in acci-dents, fire, or electric shock.

O Do not use this system if you notice anyabnormality, such as a frozen screen orlack of sound. Continued use of thesystem may result in accident, fire orelectric shock.

O In case you notice any foreign object inthe system hardware, spill liquid on it,or notice smoke or smell coming from it,stop using the system immediately andcontact an INFINITI dealer. Ignoring suchconditions may lead to accidents, fire, orelectric shock.

When you use this system, make sure theengine is running.

If you use the system with the engine notrunning (ignition ON or ACC) for a longtime, it will use up all the battery power,and the engine will not start.

Opening/closing the LC display:

To open or close the LC display, press thebutton on the upper part of the LC dis-play.Refer to the separate Navigation SystemOwner’s Manual simultaneously.

Reference symbols:

“ENTER” button — This is a button on thecontrol panel.

“Display” key — This is a select key onthe screen. By selecting this key you canproceed to the next function.

NAMES OF THE COMPONENTS

1., 2., 5., 6., 9., 10. and 11.

For Navigation control buttons: refer tothe separate Navigation Owner’s Manual.

3. “SETTING” button (P. 4-7)

SAA1301

SAFETY NOTE CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS — WITHNAVIGATION SYSTEM

4-2 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

4. “INFO” button (P. 4-3)

7. Joystick and “ENTER” button (P. 4-3)

8. brightness control and displayon/off button(P. 4-9)

12. “BACK” button (P. 4-3)

HOW TO USE JOYSTICK AND“ENTER” BUTTON

Choose an item on the display using thejoystick and push the “ENTER” button foroperation.

HOW TO USE “BACK” BUTTON

This button has two functions.

O Go back to the previous display.

When this button is pushed during setup,setup will be canceled, and the screenwill return to the previous screen.

O Finish setup.

When this button is pushed after setup iscompleted, the settings will be renewedas directed, and the screen will return tothe map.

SETTING UP THE START-UPSCREEN

When you turn the ignition switch to theACC or ON position, the SYSTEMSTART-UP warning is displayed on thescreen. Read the warning and select the“OK” key then push the “ENTER” button.

If you do not push the “ENTER” button,the Navigation system will not proceed tothe next step display.

To proceed to the next step, refer to theseparate Navigation System Owner’sManual.

HOW TO USE “INFO” BUTTON

The “Vehicle Information” screen will ap-pear when the “INFO” button is pushed.

Choose an item using the joystick andpush the “ENTER” button.

After viewing or adjusting the informationon the following screens, push the“BACK” button to return to the VEHICLEINFORMATION menu.

SAA1496

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-3

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Trip computer information

Elapsed Time, Driving Distance and Av-erage Speed will be displayed.

To reset, use the joystick to highlight the“Reset” key and push the “ENTER” buttonimmediately before driving the vehicle.

The unit can be converted between “US”and “Metric”. See “How to use SETTINGbutton” later in this section.

Fuel economy information

The distance to empty, average fueleconomy and current fuel economy(shown on the right side bar) will be dis-played for reference.

To reset the Average Fuel Economy, usethe joystick to highlight the “Reset” keyand push the “ENTER” button.

SAA1497 SAA1305 SAA1075


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

If the “View” key is highlighted with thejoystick and the “ENTER” button ispushed, the average fuel consumptionhistory will be displayed in graph formalong with the average for the previousReset-to-Reset period.

The unit can be converted between “US”and “Metric”. See “How to use SETTINGbutton” later in this section.

Maintenance information

To set the maintenance interval for theEngine Oil or Oil Filter, choose an itemusing the joystick and push the “ENTER”button.

You can also set to display a message toremind you that the maintenance needsto be performed.

The following example shows how to setthe engine oil change interval. Use thesame steps to set the other maintenanceinformation.

1. Reset the driving distance to the newmaintenance schedule.

2. Set the interval (mileage) of the main-tenance schedule. To determine therecommended maintenance interval,refer to your “INFINITI Service andMaintenance Guide”.

3. To display the maintenance informa-tion automatically when the settrip distance is reached, highlight the“Interval Reminder” key with the joy-stick and push the “ENTER” button.

SAA1290 SAA1291


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

4. To return the display to the “Mainte-nance” screen, push the “BACK”button.

“Maintenance” display cannot be oper-ated when the vehicle is moving. Stop thevehicle in a safe place to see the informa-tion.

Maintenance notice

The “Maintenance Notice” screen (“EN-GINE OIL” or “OIL FILTER”) will be auto-matically displayed as shown when bothof the following conditions are met:

O the vehicle is driven the set distanceand the ignition switch is turned tothe OFF position.

O the ignition switch is turned to the ONposition the next time the vehicle willbe driven.

To return to the previous display after the“Maintenance Notice” screen is dis-played, push the “BACK” button.

The “Maintenance Notice” screen displayseach time the ignition switch is turned ONuntil one of the following conditions aremet:

O “Reset Distance” is selected.

O “Interval Reminder” is set OFF.

O the maintenance interval is set again.

SAA1332 SAA1292Engine Oil q1 /Oil Filter q2


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

*: Refer to the separate NavigationSystem Owner’s Manual.

HOW TO USE “SETTING” BUTTON

The “Settings” screen will appear whenthe “SETTING” button is pushed.

Display settings

The following menu will appear whenpushing the “SETTING” button, selectingthe “Display” key and pushing the “EN-TER” button.

Display:

To turn off the screen, select the “Dis-play” key and push the “ENTER” button toturn off the “ON” indicator. When anymode button is pushed with the screenoff, the screen turns on for further opera-tion. The screen will turn off automatically

5 seconds after the operation is finishedon the map display.

To turn on the screen, select the “Dis-play” key and turn on the “ON” indicator.

Brightness/Contrast:

To adjust the brightness and contrast ofthe screen, select the “Brightness” or“Contrast” key and push the “ENTER”button. Then you can adjust the bright-ness to darker or brighter and the con-trast to lower or higher using the joystick.

SAA1293 SAA1540


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Clock settings

The following display will appear whenpushing the “SETTING” button, selectingthe “Clock” key and pushing the “ENTER”button.

On-screen Clock:

When this item is turned to ON, a clock isalways displayed in the upper right cornerof the screen.

This clock will indicate the time almostexactly because it is always adjusted bythe GPS system.

Clock Format:

Choose either the 12-hour clock display orthe 24-hour clock display.

Offset Adjust:

Adjust the time by increasing or de-creasing per minute.

Daylight Saving Time:

Turn this item to ON for daylight savingtime application.

Time Zone:

Choose the time zone from the following

O Pacific

O Mountain

O Central

O Eastern

O Atlantic

O Newfoundland

Language/Units settings

The Language/Units setting screen willappear when selecting the “Language/Units” key and pushing the “ENTER”button.

SAA1091 SAA1295


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Select the “Select Language” or “SelectUnits” key and push the “ENTER” button.

Language: “English” or “Français”

Unit: “US” — Mile, °F, MPG“Metric” — km, °C, L/100 km

Select the “ON” key of the desired lan-guage or units and push the “ENTER” but-ton.

HOW TO USE THE BUTTON

Push the button to switch the dis-play brightness to the daytime or night-time mode, and adjust the brightness bymoving the joystick right or left.

If no operation is done within 10 seconds,or if the “BACK” button is pushed, thedisplay will return to the previous display.

Push the button for more than 2 sec-onds to turn the display off. Push the but-ton again for more than 2 seconds to turnthe display on.

Adjust the air flow direction of ventilators.

Open or close, and adjust the air flow di-rection of ventilators.

: This symbol indicates that thevents are closed when the vent le-ver is moved left (front) or down(rear).

: This symbol indicates that thevents are open when the ventlever is moved right (front) or up(rear).

SAA1296Display of Select Language

SAA0563A

VENTILATORS


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Front window defroster button2. Rear window defroster button

(Refer to the “2. Instruments and con-trols” section.)

3. Outside air circulation button4. Air recirculation button5. AUTO/ECON button

6. Fan speed control button7. MODE (air flow control) button8. A/C (Air Conditioner) button9. OFF button10. DUAL button (if so equipped)11. TEMP (Temperature control) dial

WARNING

O The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.

O On hot, sunny days, temperatures in aclosed vehicle could quickly becomehigh enough to cause severe or possiblyfatal injuries to people or animals. Donot leave children or adults who wouldnormally require the assistance ofothers in your vehicle. Unattended petsshould also not be left alone.

O Do not use the recirculation mode forlong periods as it may cause the interiorair to become stale and the windows tofog up.

Start the engine and operate the controlsto activate the air conditioner.

SAA1306

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(Automatic)


w 06.7.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Cooling and/or dehumidifiedheating (AUTO)

This mode may be normally used all yearround as the system automatically worksto keep a constant temperature. Air flowdistribution and fan speed are also con-trolled automatically.

1. Push the AUTO/ECON button on.(AUTO will be displayed.)

2. If the A/C button indicator is off, pushthe A/C button to activate air condi-tioner. The A/C button indicator willcome on.

3. Turn the temperature control dial toset the desired temperature.

O Adjust the temperature to about 75°F(24°C) for normal operation.

O The temperature of the passengercompartment will be maintained auto-matically. Air flow distribution and fanspeed are also controlled automati-cally.

A visible mist may be seen coming fromthe ventilators in hot, humid conditionsas the air is cooled rapidly. This does not

indicate a malfunction.

Economical operation (ECON)

Economical operation reduces some loadto the engine to improve the fueleconomy. It allows higher humidity thannormal operation.

Pushing the AUTO/ECON button changesoperations as follows while the A/Cbutton indicator is on. AUTO → ECON →AUTO

Heating (A/C off)

The air conditioner does not activate.When you need to heat only, use thismode.

1. Push the AUTO/ECON button. (AUTOwill be displayed.)

2. Push the A/C button to turn off the airconditioner. The A/C button indicatorwill turn off.


O The temperature of the passengercompartment will be maintained auto-matically. Air flow distribution and fanspeed are also controlled automati-cally.

O Do not set the temperature lower thanthe outside air temperature. Otherwisethe system may not work properly.

O Not recommended if windows fog up.

Dehumidified defrosting ordefogging

1. Push the front window defrosterbutton on. (The indicator light onthe button will come on.)


O To quickly remove ice from the outsideof the windows, push the fan speedcontrol button + and set to themaximum position.

O As soon as possible after the wind-shield is clean, push the AUTO/ECONbutton to return to the auto mode.

O When the front window defrosterbutton is pushed, the air condi-tioner will automatically be turned onat outside temperatures above 23°F(−5°C) to defog the windshield, andthe air recirculation mode will auto-matically be turned off.

Outside air is drawn into the pas-


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

senger compartment to improve thedefogging performance.

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed control

Push the fan speed control button −or + to manually control the fanspeed.

Push the AUTO/ECON button to return toautomatic control of the fan speed.

Fresh air

Push the outside air circulation buttonto draw outside air into the passen-

ger compartment. The indicator light onthe button will come on.

Air recirculation

Push the air recirculation button torecirculate interior air inside the vehicle.The indicator light on the button willcome on.

The air recirculation button will not be ac-tivated when the air conditioner is in thedefroster mode.

Air flow control (MODE)

Pushing the MODE button selects the airoutlet to:

: Air flows from center and sideventilators.

: Air flows from center and sideventilators and foot outlets.

: Air flows mainly from foot outlets.

: Air flows from defroster and footoutlets.

To turn the system off

Push the OFF button.

DUAL BUTTON (if so equipped)

You can set the temperature of the driverand front passenger sides individually.

Pushing the DUAL button changes the set-ting position as follows:

Driver/Passenger → Driver → Passenger

If selecting the Driver/Passenger positionagain after the temperature is individuallyset, the display will show the temperatureset for the driver side.

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE

The outside ambient temperature will beshown on the center display.

The ambient temperature sensor is lo-cated in front of the radiator. The sensormay be affected by road or engine heat,wind direction and other driving condi-tions. The display may differ from the ac-tual outside temperature or the tempera-ture displayed on various signs or bill-boards.

OPERATING TIPS

When the engine coolant temperature andoutside air temperature are low, the airflow from the foot outlets may not operatefor a maximum of 150 seconds. However,this is not a malfunction. After the coolanttemperature warms up, the air flow fromthe foot outlets will operate normally.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

The sensor qA on the instrument panelhelps maintain a constant temperature;do not put anything on or around thissensor.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER

The air conditioning system is equippedwith an in-cabin microfilter which collectsdirt, pollen, dust, etc. To make sure airconditioner heats, defogs, and ventilatesefficiently, replace the filter in accordancewith the maintenance schedule in theINFINITI Service and maintenance guide.To replace the filter, contact an INFINITIdealer.

The filter should be replaced if air flow de-creases significantly or if windows fog upeasily when operating the heater or airconditioning system.

The air conditioning system in yourINFINITI vehicle is charged with a refriger-ant designed with the environment inmind. This refrigerant will not harm theearth’s ozone layer. However, specialcharging equipment and lubricant are re-quired when servicing your INFINITI airconditioner. Using improper refrigerantsor lubricants will cause severe damage toyour air conditioning system. See “Ca-pacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Technical and con-sumer information” section for air condi-tioning system refrigerant and lubricantrecommendations.

An INFINITI dealer will be able to serviceyour environmentally friendly air condi-tioning system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains refriger-ant under high pressure. To avoid personalinjury, any air conditioner service should bedone only by an experienced technician withproper equipment.

HA1011-A

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ONposition and push the POWER or RADIObutton to turn on the radio. If you listen tothe radio with the engine not running, thekey should be turned to the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station sig-nal strength, distance from radio trans-mitter, buildings, bridges, mountains andother external influences. Intermittentchanges in reception quality normally arecaused by these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-hicle may influence radio receptionquality.

Radio reception

Your radio system is equipped with state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhanceradio reception. These circuits are de-signed to extend reception range, and toenhance the quality of that reception.

However there are some general charac-teristics of FM, AM and satellite radio sig-nals that can affect radio receptionquality in a moving vehicle, even whenthe finest equipment is used. These char-acteristics are completely normal in agiven reception area, and do not indicateany malfunction in your radio system.

Remember that a moving vehicle is notthe ideal place to listen to a radio. Be-cause of the movement, reception condi-tions will constantly change. Buildings,terrain, signal distance and interferencefrom other vehicles can work againstideal reception. Described below aresome of the factors that can affect yourradio reception.

FM RADIO RECEPTION

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25to 30 miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural(single channel) FM having slightly morerange than stereo FM. External influencesmay sometimes interfere with FM stationreception even if the FM station is within25 miles (40 km). The strength of the FMsignal is directly related to the distancebetween the transmitter and receiver. FMsignals follow a line-of-sight path, exhib-iting many of the same characteristics aslight. For example they will reflect off ob-jects.

SAA0306

AUDIO SYSTEM


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Fade and drift: As your vehicle movesaway from a station transmitter, the sig-nals will tend to fade and/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interfer-ence from buildings, large hills or due toantenna position, usually in conjunctionwith increased distance from the stationtransmitter, static or flutter can be heard.This can be reduced by adjusting thetreble control counterclockwise to reducetreble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the re-flective characteristics of FM signals, di-rect and reflected signals reach the re-ceiver at the same time. The signals maycancel each other, resulting in momentaryflutter or loss of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTION

AM signals, because of their low fre-quency, can bend around objects andskip along the ground. In addition, thesignals can be bounced off the iono-sphere and bent back to earth. Becauseof these characteristics. AM signals arealso subject to interference as they travelfrom transmitter to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle ispassing through freeway underpasses or

in areas with many tall buildings. It canalso occur for several seconds duringionospheric turbulence even in areaswhere no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, elec-trical power lines, electric signs and eventraffic lights.

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if soequipped)

When the satellite radio is first installedor the battery has been replaced, the sat-ellite radio may not work properly. This isnot a malfunction. Wait more than 10 min-utes with satellite radio ON for satelliteradio to receive all of the necessary data.

No satellite radio reception is availableunless optional satellite receiver and an-tenna are installed and an XM orSIRIUSTM satellite radio service subscrip-tion is active.

Satellite radio is not available in Alaska,Hawaii and Guam.

Satellite radio performance may be af-fected if cargo carried on the roof blocksthe satellite radio signal.

If possible, do not put cargo over the sat-ellite antenna.

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Compact Disc (CD) player

O Do not force a compact disc into the CDinsert slot. This could damage the CDand/or CD changer/player.

O Trying to load a CD with the CD doorclosed could damage the CD and/or CDchanger.

O During cold weather or rainy days, theplayer may malfunction due to the hu-midity. If this occurs, remove the CDand dehumidify or ventilate the playercompletely.

O The player may skip while driving onrough roads.

O The CD player sometimes cannot func-tion when the passenger compartmenttemperature is extremely high. De-crease the temperature before use.


w 06.7.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

O Do not force a compact disc into the CDinsert slot. This could damage the CDand/or CD changer/player.

O Trying to load a CD with the CD doorclosed could damage the CD and/or CDchanger.

O Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)round discs that have the “COMPACTdisc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the discor packaging.

O Do not expose the CD to direct sun-light.

O CDs that are of poor quality, dirty,scratched, covered with fingerprints, orthat have pin holes may not work prop-erly.

O The following CDs may not work prop-erly:

— Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

— Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

— Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

O Do not use the following CDs as theymay cause the CD player to malfunc-tion.

— 3.1 in (8 cm) discs

— CDs that are not round

— CDs with a paper label

— CDs that are warped, scratched, orhave abnormal edges

O CDs with MP3 or WMA format cannot bewritten in this audio system.

O If the CD cannot be played, one of thefollowing messages will be displayed.

CHECK DISC:

• Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-rectly (the label side is facing up,etc.).

• Confirm that the CD is not bent orwarped and it is free of scratches.

PUSH EJECT:

This is a malfunction due to excessivetemperature inside the player. Removethe CD by pushing the EJECT button. Af-ter a short time, reinsert the CD. The CDcan be played when the temperature ofthe player returns to normal.

UNPLAYABLE:

The file is unplayable in this audio sys-tem (only MP3 or WMA CD).

SAA0480


w 06.7.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

Compact Disc (CD) with MP3 orWMA

Explanation of terms:

O MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pic-tures Experts Group Audio Layer 3.MP3 is the most well-known com-pressed digital audio file format. Thisformat allows for near “CD quality”sound, but at a fraction of the size ofnormal audio files. MP3 conversion ofan audio track from CD-ROM can re-duce the file size by approximately10:1 ratio with virtually no perceptibleloss in quality. MP3 compression re-moves the redundant and irrelevantparts of a sound signal that thehuman ear doesn’t hear.

O WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)is a compressed audio format createdby Microsoft as an alternative to MP3.The WMA codec offers greater filecompression than the MP3 codec, en-abling storage of more digital audiotracks in the same amount of spacewhen compared to MP3s at the samelevel of quality.

O Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the numberof bits per second used by a digitalmusic file. The size and quality of a

compressed digital audio file is deter-mined by the bit rate used when en-coding the file.

O Sampling frequency — Sampling fre-quency is the rate at which thesamples of a signal are convertedfrom analog to digital (A/D conversion)per second.

O Multisession — Multisession is one ofthe methods for writing data to media.Writing data once to the media iscalled a single session, and writingmore than once is called a multises-sion.

O ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3 tag is thepart of the encoded MP3 or WMA filethat contains information about thedigital music file such as song title,artist, album title, encoding bit rate,track time duration, etc. ID3 tag infor-mation is displayed on theAlbum/Artist/Track title line on thedisplay.

* Windows and Windows Media areeither registered trademarks or trade-marks of Microsoft Corporation in theUnited States and/or other countries.

Playback order:

Playback order of the CD with compressedfiles (MP3/WMA) is as illustrated above.

SAA1025


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

O The names of folders not containingMP3/WMA files are not shown in thedisplay.

O If there is a file in the top level of thedisc, “ROOT” is displayed.

O The playback order is the order inwhich the files were written by thewriting software. Therefore, the filesmight not play in the desired order.

Specification chart:

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW

Supported file systemsISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not sup-ported.

Supported versions*

MP3

Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5

Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR

WMA

Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR

Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)

Folder levelsFolder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder),Files: 512

Text character number limitation 128 characters

Displayable character codes

01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOMBig Endian), 05: (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16BOM Little Endian)

* Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit ratecannot be played.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Troubleshooting guide:

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the disc was inserted correctly.

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using theplayer.

If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will beplayed.

Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes andnumber of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.

Poor sound qualityCheck if the disc is scratched or dirty.

The bit rate may be too low.

It takes a relatively long time be-fore the music starts playing.

If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required beforethe music starts playing.

Music cuts off or skipsThe writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., mightnot match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Move immediately to the nextsong when playing.

When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited bycopyright protection, there will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.

The songs do not play back in thedesired order.

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play inthe desired order.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. CD EJECT button2. CD play button3. RADIO (FM/AM/SAT*) band select

button4. Audio display5. PTY/CAT (Type A), SSV (Type B) button6. DISP (Display) CHANGE button7. SEEK, APS REW/APS FF, TRACK

CHANGE button8. CD LOAD button9. POWER ONzOFF button, Volume control

knob10. AUTOzP (Automatic preset) button11. RPT (repeat) play (Type A), RPT (re-

peat) play/CAT button (Type B)12. SCAN tuning button13. Station preset (FM/AM/SAT)/CD insert

or CD play select button14. AUDIO (BASS, TREBLE, FADER, BAL-

ANCE, SSV (Type A only)) button15. RADIO TUNE/FFzREW/AUDIO (BASS,

TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE, SSV (Type Aonly)) ADJUSTING button

* No satellite radio reception is availableunless optional satellite receiver andantenna are installed and an XM orSIRIUSTM satellite radio service sub-scription is active.

SAA0937Type A

SAA0938Type B


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

For all operation precautions, see “Audiooperation precautions” earlier in this sec-tion.

It may take some time to receive the acti-vation signal after subscribing to the XMor SIRIUSTM satellite radio provider. Afterreceiving the activation signal, an avail-able channel list will be automatically up-dated in the radio. For XM , turn the igni-tion switch from the LOCK to ACC positionto update the channel list.

Satellite radio is not available in Alaskaand Hawaii.

FM-AM-SATELLITE RADIO WITHCOMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER

Audio main operation

Head unit:

The radio has an FM diversity receptionsystem, which employs two antennasprinted on the rear window. This systemautomatically switches to the antennawhich is receiving less interference.

The auto loudness circuit enhances thelow frequency range automatically in bothradio reception and CD playback.

POWER on/off:

Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ONposition, and then push the POWERon/off button while the system is off tocall up the mode (radio, tape or CD) whichwas playing immediately before thesystem was turned off. When no CD ortape is loaded, the radio will come on.While the system is on, pushing thePOWER on/off button turns the systemoff.

Volume control:

Turn the volume control knob to adjustthe volume.

This vehicle has Speed Sensitive controlVolume (SSV) for audio. The audio volumechanges as the driving speed changes.

AUDIO button (BASS, TREBLE, FADER,BALANCE, SSV (Type A only)):

Push the AUDIO button to change the se-lecting mode as follows.

BASS → TREBLE → FADER → BALANCE →SSV (Type A only) → (Normal) → BASS

To adjust Bass, Treble, Fader and Bal-ance, push the AUDIO button until the de-sired mode BASS, TREBLE, FADER or BAL-ANCE appears in the display. Push the

TUNE ( or ) button to adjustBass and Treble to the desired level. Usethe or button also to adjustFader or Balance modes. Fader adjuststhe sound level between the front andrear speakers and Balance adjusts thesound between the right and leftspeakers.

To change the SSV mode to OFF, LOW,MID or HIGH, push the or (TUNE)button (Type A) or push the SSV button(Type B).

After 10 seconds, the radio, or CD displayreappears. Once the sound quality is setto the desired level, push the AUDIO but-ton repeatedly until the radio, or CD dis-play appears.

DISPLAY CHANGE:

This button will work during FM radio, sat-ellite radio (if so equipped) and CD opera-tion. Find the detailed function in the de-scription of each item.

FM-AM-SAT radio operation

RADIO (FM/AM/SAT) band select:

Pushing the band select button willchange the band as follows:


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

(Without satellite radio)

AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM

(With satellite radio)

AM → FM1 → FM2 → SAT1 → SAT2 → AM

No satellite radio reception is availableunless optional satellite receiver and an-tenna are installed and an XM or SIRI-USTM satellite radio service subscriptionis active.

Satellite radio is not available in Alaska,Hawaii and Guam.

When the RADIO band select button ispushed while the ignition switch is in theACC or ON position, the radio will comeon at the station last played.

The last station/channel played will alsocome on when the ONzOFF/VOL controlknob is pushed to ON.

If another audio source is playing whenthe RADIO button is turned to ON, theother audio source will automatically beturned off and the last radio stationplayed will come on.

The FM stereo indicator ST will glowduring FM stereo reception. When the ste-reo broadcast signal is weak, the radio

will automatically change from stereo tomonaural reception.

TUNE (Tuning):

Push these buttons for manual tuning. Tomove quickly through the channels, pushand hold either of the TUNE buttons downfor more than 0.5 second.

SEEK tuning:

For AM and FM radio:

Push the SEEK button or , totune from high to low or low to high fre-quencies and stops at the next broadcast-ing station.

For satellite radio:

Push the SEEK button or toseek channels of the next or previous cat-egory.

SCAN tuning:

Push the SCAN tuning button to tune fromlow to high frequencies and stops at eachbroadcasting station for 5 seconds. Push-ing the button again during this 5 sec-onds period will stop SCAN tuning andthe radio will remain tuned to that sta-tion.

If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed

within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves tothe next station.

DISPLAY:

O By pushing the DISP button for morethan 1.5 seconds while receiving FMradio waves, “PS NAME” switches be-tween ON and OFF (Type A only).

O Pushing the DISP button will displayadditional information about the satel-lite radio broadcast (for example:Artist name, Title).Keep pushing the DISP button, and itwill change the information of the sat-ellite radio broadcast to be displayedas follows:CH Number → CH Name → ArtistName → Song Title → CH Number

Station memory operations:

Twelve stations/channels can be set forthe FM band (six for FM1, six for FM2),twelve for satellite radio (six for SAT1, sixfor SAT2) and six stations can be set forthe AM band.

1. Tune to the desired station using theSEEK, SCAN or TUNE button.

2. Select the desired station/channeland keep pushing any of the desired


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

station preset buttons (1 to 6) until abeep sound is heard. (The radio muteswhen the select button is pushed.)

3. The channel indicator will then comeon and the sound will resume. Memo-rizing is now complete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the samemanner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or ifthe fuse blows, the preset station memorywill be erased. In that case, reset the de-sired stations.

Automatic preset:

To select the preset FM, AM, SAT or PTYstation/channel, push the AUTO.P buttonfor less than 1.5 seconds.

To preset the FM, AM, SAT or PTYstation/channel, push the AUTO.P buttonfor more than 1.5 seconds.

Program type/category (Type A)

Repeat/category (Type B):

When the PTY button is pushed for morethan 1.5 seconds during FM mode, the PTYname of the current tuned station is dis-played (Type A only). During this time ifthe PTY data code is zero, or the data is

unreadable; the display will show NONE.

When the PTY (CAT) — type A, or RPT (CAT)— Type B, button is pushed for more than1.5 seconds during the satellite radiomode, the category name of the currentchannel is displayed.

1. PTY (CAT) selection mode

PTY (CAT) name selection can be doneby the up/down TUNE button or

in the PTY (CAT) selection mode.

It is possible to shift the PTY (CAT) nameby one step, with one push of theup/down tuning button or .

PTY name selection can also be achievedby pushing the preset buttons.

Initial PTY names are stored in the stationpreset buttons; but these can be changedby pushing the station preset buttons formore than 1.5 seconds when the desiredPTY name is in the display.

2. PTY SEEK tuning mode

After selecting a PTY name, push theSEEK button or within 10seconds. Tuning to the PTY station willstart. If you do not push the SEEK but-ton within the 10 second period, thePTY mode will be canceled.

3. PTY SCAN tuning mode

Push the SCAN tuning button to tunethe PTY name station, and stop ateach broadcasting station for 5 sec-


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

onds. Pushing the button again duringthis 5 second period will stop SCANtuning and the radio will remain tunedto that station. If the SCAN tuning but-ton is not pushed within 5 seconds,SCAN tuning moves to the next sta-tion.

Compact disc (CD) changeroperation

Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ONposition, push the LOAD button and insertthe compact disc into the slot with the la-bel side facing up. The CD will be guidedautomatically into the slot and start play-ing.After loading the disc, the number oftracks on the disc and the play time willappear on the display.If the radio is already operating, it will au-tomatically turn off and the CD will play.

If the system has been turned off whilethe CD was playing, pushing theONzOFF/VOL control button will start thecompact disc.

CD LOAD:

To insert a CD in the CD changer, pushthe LOAD button for less than 1.5 sec-onds. Select the loading slot by pushing

the CD insert select button (1 to 6), theninsert the CD.

To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer in suc-cession, push the LOAD button for morethan 1.5 seconds.

The inserted slot numbers will illuminateon the display.

PLAY:

When the CD button is pushed with thesystem off and the compact disc loaded,the system will turn on and the compactdisc will start to play.

When the CD button is pushed with theCD loaded with the radio playing, theradio will automatically be turned off andthe compact disc will start to play.

DISPLAY:

When the display button is pushed formore than 1.5 seconds while the CD is be-ing played, the music information dis-played can be changed in the followingorder.

CD:

CD with MP3 or WMA:

FF (Fast Forward), REW(Rewind):

CD:

When the (fast forward) or (re-wind) button is pushed while the compactdisc is being played, the CD will playwhile fast forwarding or rewinding. Whenthe button is released, the CD will returnto normal play speed.

CD with MP3 or WMA:

When the or button is pushedfor less than 1.5 seconds while the CD isbeing played, the folders in the CD will bechanged.

When the or button is pushedfor more than 1.5 seconds while the CD isbeing played, the CD will play while fastforwarding or rewinding. When the buttonis released, the CD will return to thenormal play speed.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

APS (Automatic ProgramSearch) FF, APS REW:

When the (APS FF) button is pushedwhile the CD is being played, the programafter the present one will start to playfrom its beginning. Push several times toskip through programs. The CD will ad-vance the number of times the button ispushed. (When the last program on theCD is skipped through, the first programwill be played.) When the (APS REW)button is pushed, the program beingplayed returns to its beginning. Push sev-eral times to skip back through programs.The CD will go back the number of timesthe button is pushed.

CD PLAY select button:

To change CD, push the CD play selectbutton (1 to 6).

SCAN tuning:

When the SCAN tuning button is pushedfor less than 1.5 seconds while the CD isbeing played, the beginning of all the CDprograms in each track will be played for10 seconds in sequence.

When the SCAN tuning button is pushedfor more than 1.5 seconds while the CD isbeing played, the first program in all the

CDs will be played for 10 seconds.

Pushing the button again during this 10second period will stop SCAN tuning.

If the SCAN tuning button is not pushedwithin 10 seconds, SCAN tuning moves tothe next disc program.

REPEAT (RPT):

When the RPT button is pushed while theCD is played, the play pattern can bechanged as follows:CD:

CD with MP3 or WMA:

CD EJECT:

When the CD EJECT button is pushed withthe CD loaded, the CD will be ejected.

To eject the discs selected by the CD se-lect button, push the EJECT button for lessthan 1.5 seconds.

To eject all the discs, push the EJECT but-

ton for more than 1.5 seconds.

When this button is pushed while the CDis being played, CD will come out and thesystem will turn off.

If the CD comes out and is not removed, itwill be pulled back into the slot to protectit.

CD IN indicator:

CD IN indicator appears on the displaywhen the CD is loaded with the systemon.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

CD CARE AND CLEANING

O Handle a CD by its edges. Never touchthe surface of the disc. Do not bendthe disc.

O Always place the discs in the storagecase when they are not being used.

O To clean a disc, wipe the surface fromthe center to the outer edge using aclean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the discusing a circular motion.Do not use a conventional recordcleaner or alcohol intended for indus-trial use.

O A new disc may be rough on its innerand outer edges. Remove the roughedges using the side of a pen or pen-cil as illustrated.

SAA0451 SAA0974Type A

SAA1349Type B


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. VOLUME control switch2. POWER on/off switch3. MODE select switch4. Tuning switch5. POWER on/MODE select switch

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FORAUDIO CONTROL

The audio system can be operated usingthe controls on the steering wheel.

POWER on/off switch

With the ignition switch turned to the ACCor ON position, push the POWER switch toturn the audio system on or off.

MODE select switch

Push the MODE select switch to changethe mode in the sequence of AM, FM1,FM2, SAT1 (if so equipped), SAT2 (if soequipped) and CD.

Pushing this switch also turns the audiosystem on when it is off.

POWER on/MODE select switch (ifso equipped)

With the ignition switch turned to the ACCor ON position, push the POWERon/MODE select switch to turn the audio

system on. Push the switch to change themode in the sequence of AM, FM1, FM2,SAT1 (if so equipped), SAT2 (if soequipped) and CD.

VOLUME control switch

Push up/down the VOLUME control switchto increase or decrease the volume.

Tuning switch

Memory change (radio):

Push up/down the tuning switch orfor less than 1.5 seconds to change

the radio frequency.

SEEK tuning (radio):

Push up/down the tuning switch orfor more than 1.5 seconds to seek

the next or previous radio station.

APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APSREW (CD):

Push up/down the tuning switch orfor less than 1.5 seconds to return to

the beginning of the present program orskip to the next program. Push severaltimes to skip back or skip through pro-grams.

This system searches for the blank inter-vals between selections. If there is ablank interval within one program or thereis no interval between programs, the sys-tem may not stop in the desired or ex-pected location.

FOLDER change (CD with MP3/WMA):

Push up/down the tuning switch orfor more than 1.5 seconds to change

the folders (if it has folders).

Push up/down the tuning switch orfor less than 1.5 seconds to return to

the beginning of the present program orskip to the next program.

DISC change (CD without MP3/WMA):

Push up/down the tuning switch orfor more than 1.5 seconds to change

the playing disc up or down.

ANTENNA

Window antenna

The antenna pattern is printed inside therear window.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

CAUTION

O Do not place metalized film near the rearwindow glass or attach any metal partsto it. This may cause poor reception ornoise.

O When cleaning the inside of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch ordamage the rear window antenna.Lightly wipe along the antenna with adampened soft cloth.

When installing a CB, ham radio or carphone in your INFINITI, be sure to observethe following cautions, otherwise the newequipment may adversely affect the En-gine control system and other electronicparts.

WARNING

O A cellular telephone should not be usedwhile driving so full attention may begiven to vehicle operation. Some juris-dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele-phones while driving.

O If you must make a call while your ve-hicle is in motion, the hands free cellularphone operational mode (if so equipped)is highly recommended. Exercise ex-treme caution at all times so full atten-tion may be given to vehicle operation.

O If a conversation in a moving vehicle re-quires you to take notes, pull off theroad to a safe location and stop your ve-hicle before doing so.

CAUTION

O Keep the antenna as far away as pos-sible from the electronic control mod-ules.

O Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in(20 cm) away from the electronic controlsystem harness. Do not route the an-tenna wire next to any harness.

O Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratioas recommended by the manufacturer.

O Connect the ground wire from the CBradio chassis to the body.

O For details, consult an INFINITI dealer.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

O Use a phone after stopping your vehiclein a safe location. If you have to use aphone while driving, exercise extremecaution at all times so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.

O If a conversation in a moving vehicle re-quires you to take notes, pull off theroad to a safe location and stop your ve-hicle before doing so.

CAUTION

To avoid draining the vehicle battery, use aphone after starting the engine.

Your INFINITI is equipped with theBluetooth Hands-Free Phone System. Ifyou are an owner of a Bluetooth enabledcellular phone, you can set up the wire-less connection between your cellularphone and the in-vehicle phone module.

With Bluetooth wireless technology, youcan make or receive a hands-free tele-phone call with your cellular phone in thevehicle.

Once your cellular phone is paired to thein-vehicle phone module, no other phone

SAA1302

BLUETOOTH HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEMWITH INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

connecting procedure is required. Yourphone is automatically connected withthe in-vehicle phone module when the ig-nition switch is turned to the ON positionwith the paired cellular phone turned onand carried in the vehicle.

You can register up to 5 differentBluetooth cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module. However, you cantalk on only one cellular phone at a time.

Before using the Bluetooth Hands-FreePhone System, refer to the followingnotes.

O Set up the wireless connection be-tween a cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module before usingthe Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone Sys-tem.

O Some Bluetooth enabled cellularphones may not be recognized by thein-vehicle phone module. Please visitwww.infiniti.com/bluetooth for a rec-ommended phone list.

O You will not be able to use a hands-free phone under the following condi-tions:

— Your vehicle is outside of the tele-phone service area.

— Your vehicle is in an area where itis difficult to receive radio waves;such as in a tunnel, in an under-ground parking garage, near a tallbuilding or in a mountainous area.

— Your cellular phone is locked toprevent it from being dialed.

When the radio wave condition is notideal or ambient sound is too loud, it maybe difficult to hear the other person’svoice during a call.

Do not place the cellular phone in an areasurrounded by metal or far away from thein-vehicle phone module to prevent tonequality degradation and wireless connec-tion disruption.

While a cellular phone is connectedthrough the Bluetooth wireless connec-tion, the battery power of the cellularphone may discharge quicker than usual.The Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone Systemcannot charge cellular phones.

If the Bluetooth Hands-Free PhoneSystem seems to be malfunctioning,please refer to “Troubleshooting guide”later in this section. You can also visitwww.infiniti.com/bluetooth for trouble-shooting help.

Refer to the cellular phone Owner’sManual regarding the telephone charges,cellular phone antenna and body, etc.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) this device maynot cause harmful interference, and (2)this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

FCC Radiation Exposure Statement:

This equipment complies with FCC radia-tion exposure limits set forth for an un-controlled environment. This equipmentshould be installed and operated withminimum distance 8 in (20 cm) betweenthe radiator and your body. This Transmit-ter must not be co-located or operating inconjunction with any other antenna ortransmitter.

USING THE SYSTEM

The INFINITI Voice Recognition system al-lows hands-free operation of theBluetooth Hands-Free Phone System.

If the vehicle is in motion, some com-mands may not be available so full atten-tion may be given to vehicle operation.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Initialization

When the ignition switch is turned to theON position, INFINITI Voice Recognition isinitialized, which takes a few seconds.When completed, the amber light on theoverhead console illuminates and thesystem is ready to accept voice com-mands. If the button is pushed be-fore the initialization completes, thesystem will announce “Hands-free phonesystem not ready” and will not react tovoice commands.

Operating tips

To get the best performance out of theINFINITI Voice Recognition system, ob-serve the following:

O Keep the interior of the vehicle asquiet as possible. Close the windowsto eliminate surrounding noises (traf-fic noises, vibration sounds, etc.),which may prevent the system fromrecognizing voice commands correctly.

O Wait until the tone sounds beforespeaking a command. Otherwise, thecommand will not be received properly.

O Start speaking a command within 5seconds after the tone sounds.

O Speak in a natural voice without paus-ing between words.

Giving voice commands

To operate INFINITI Voice Recognition,push and release the button locatedon the steering wheel. The light on theoverhead console flashes to signal youhave entered a voice recognition (VR) ses-sion. After the tone sounds, speak a com-mand.

The command given is picked up by themicrophone, and voice feedback is givenwhen the command is accepted.

O If you need to hear the available com-mands for the current menu again, say“Help” and the system will repeatthem.

O If a command is not recognized, thesystem announces, “Command notrecognized. Please try again.” Repeatthe command in a clear voice.

O If you want to go back to the previouscommand, you can say “Go back” or“Correction” anytime the system iswaiting for a response.

O You can cancel a command when thesystem is waiting for a response by

saying, “Cancel” or “Quit.” The systemannounces “Cancel” and ends the VRsession. You can also push the

button on the steering wheel atany time. Whenever the VR session iscancelled, a double beep is played toindicate you have exited the system.

O If you want to adjust the volume of thevoice feedback, push the volume con-trol switches (+ or -) on the steeringwheel while being provided with feed-back. You can also use the radiovolume control knob.

How to say numbers

INFINITI Voice Recognition requires a cer-tain way to speak numbers in voice com-mands. Refer to the rules and examplesbelow.

O Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for“0”.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

—“One eight oh oh six six two six twooh oh”, or

—“One eight zero zero six six two sixtwo oh oh”

O Words can be used for the first 4 dig-its places only.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Example: 1-800-662-6200

—“One eight hundred six six two sixtwo oh oh”,

—NOT “One eight hundred six six twosixty two hundred, and

—NOT “One eight oh oh six six twosixty two hundred.

O Numbers can be spoken in smallgroups. The system will prompt you tocontinuing entering digits, if desired.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

—“One eight oh oh”

The system repeats the numbers andprompts you to enter more.

—“six six two”

The system repeats the numbers andprompts you to enter more.

—“six two oh oh”

O You can say “Star” for * and “Pound”for # at anytime in any position of thephone number.

Example: 1-555-1212 *123

—“One five five five one two one twostar one two three”

NOTE:

For best results, say phone numbers assingle digits.

CONTROL BUTTONS

The control buttons for the BluetoothHands-Free Phone System are located onthe steering wheel.

TALK/PHONE SEND

Push the button to initiate a VRsession or answer an incoming call.

You can also use the button toskip through system feedback and toenter commands during a call. See“List of voice commands” and “Duringa call” later in this section for more in-formation.

SAA1303


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

MODE/PHONE END

Push the button to cancel a VRsession or end a call.

GETTING STARTED

The following procedures will help you getstarted using the Bluetooth Hands-FreePhone System with INFINITI Voice Recog-nition. For additional command options,refer to “List of voice commands” later inthis section.

Choosing a language

You can interact with the BluetoothHands-Free Phone System using English,Spanish or French.

To change the language, perform the fol-lowing.

1. Press and hold the button formore than 5 seconds.

2. The system announces: “Press thePHONE/SEND ( ) button for thehands-free phone system to enter thespeaker adaptation mode or press thePHONE/END ( ) button to select adifferent language.”

3. Press the button.

For information on speaker adapta-tion, see “Speaker adaptation (SA)mode” later in this section.

4. The system announces the current lan-guage and gives you the option tochange the language to Spanish (inSpanish) or French (in French). Use thefollowing chart to select the language.

NOTE:

Note: You must press the button orthe button within 5 seconds tochange the language.

Currentlanguage

Press(TALK/PHONE

SEND)to select

Press(MODE/PHONE

END)to select

English Spanish French

Spanish English French

French English Spanish

5. If you decide not to change the lan-guage, do not press either button.After 5 seconds, the VR session willend, and the language will not bechanged.

Pairing procedure

1. Push the button on the steeringwheel. The system announces theavailable commands.

2. Say: “Setup” qA . The system acknowl-edges the command and announcesthe next set of available commands.

3. Say: “Pair phone” qB . The system ac-knowledges the command and an-nounces the next set of available com-mands.

4. Say: “New phone” qC . The system ac-knowledges the command and asksyou to initiate pairing from the phonehandset qD .

When you are asked to enter a PINcode for pairing your Bluetooth cellu-


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

lar phone, operate it to enter the code“1234”.

The code is always “1234” regardlessof the number of phones paired.

The pairing procedure of the cellularphone varies according to each cel-lular phone. See the cellular phoneOwner’s Manual for details. You canalso visit www.infiniti.com/bluetoothfor instructions on pairing INFINITI rec-ommended cellular phones.

5. The system asks you to say a name forthe phone qE .

If the name is too long or too short,the system tells you, then promptsyou for a name again.

Also, if more than one phone is pairedand the name sounds too much like aname already used, the system tellsyou, then prompts you for a nameagain.

6. The system asks you to assign a prior-ity level qF . The priority level deter-mines which phone is active whenmore than one paired Bluetoothphone is in the vehicle. Follow the in-structions provided by the system orrefer to “Setup” later in this section

for more information on changing pri-orities.

7. The system will ask if you would liketo select a custom ring tone qG . Followthe instructions provided by thesystem or refer to “Setup” later in thissection for more information on se-lecting ringtones.

Making a call by entering a phonenumber

1. Push the button on steeringwheel. A tone will sound.

2. Say: “Call” qA . The system acknowl-edges the command and announcesthe next set of available commands.

3. Say the number you wish to call qB .For example, 555-1212 can be said as“five five five one two one two.” See“How to say numbers” earlier in thissection for more information.

4. When you have finished speaking thephone number, the system repeats itback and announces the availablecommands.

5. Say: “Dial” qC . The system acknowl-edges the command and makes thecall.

For additional command options, see “Listof voice commands” later in this section.

Receiving a call

When you hear the ring tone, press thebutton on the steering wheel.

Once the call has ended, press thebutton on the steering wheel.

NOTE:

If you do not wish to take the call when youhear the ring tone, press the buttonon the steering wheel to reject the call.

For additional command options, see “Listof voice commands” later in this section.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS

When you push and release the but-ton on the steering wheel, you canchoose from the commands on the MainMenu. The following pages describe thesecommands and the commands in eachsub-menu.

Remember to wait for the tone beforespeaking.

You can say “Help” to hear the list ofcommands currently available anytime thesystem is waiting for a response.

If you want to end an action without com-pleting it, you can say “Cancel” or “Quit”at anytime the system is waiting for a re-sponse. The system will end the VR ses-sion. Whenever the VR session is can-celled, a double beep is played to indi-cate you have exited the system.

If you want to go back to the previouscommand, you can say “Go back” or “Cor-

rection” anytime the system is waiting fora response.

When you get used to the menus in thesystem, you can talk ahead by sayingmore than one command at a time. Forexample, say, “Call five five five one twoone two” or “Memo pad record.”

Also, when you get used to the system re-sponses, you can skip ahead to the toneby pressing the button on the steer-ing wheel. However, if you press the

button when the system is waitingfor a response from you it will end the VRsession.

“Call”

Name (speak name) qA

If you have stored entries in the PhoneBook, you can dial a number associatedwith a name and location.

See “Phone book” later in this section tolearn how to store entries.

When prompted by the system, say thename of the phone book entry you wish tocall. The system acknowledges the name.

If there are multiple locations associatedwith the name, the system asks you tochoose the location.

Once you have confirmed the name andlocation, the system begins the call.

Number (speak digits) qB

When prompted by the system, say thenumber you wish to call. Refer to “How tosay numbers” and “Making a call by en-tering a phone number” earlier in thissection for more details.

“Redial” qC

Use the Redial command to call the lastnumber that was dialed within the ve-hicle.

NOTE:

The system will not redial the last numberdialed by the handset keypad.

The system acknowledges the command,repeats the number and begins dialing.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

If a redial number does not exist, the sys-tem announces, “There is no number toredial” and ends the VR session.

“Call back” qD

Use the Call Back command to dial thenumber of the last incoming call withinthe vehicle.

The system acknowledges the command,repeats the number and begins dialing. Ifa call back number does not exist, thesystem announces, “There is no numberto call back” and ends the VR session.

During a call

During a call there are several commandoptions available. Press the buttonon the steering wheel to mute the receiv-ing voice and enter commands.

O “Help” — The system announces theavailable commands.

O “Go back/Correction” — The systemannounces “Go back,” ends the VRsession and returns to the call.

O “Cancel/Quit” — The system an-nounces “Cancel,” ends the VR ses-sion and returns to the call.

O “Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use theSend command to enter numbers dur-ing a call. For example, if you were di-rected to dial an extension by an auto-mated system:

Say: “Send one two three four.”

The system acknowledges the com-mand and sends the tones associatedwith the numbers. The system thenends the VR session and returns tothe call.

O “Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Callcommand to transfer the call from theBluetooth Hands-Free Phone Systemto the cellular phone when privacy isdesired.

The system announces, “Transfer call.Call transferred to privacy mode.” Thesystem then ends the VR session.

You can also issue the Transfer Callcommand again to return to a hands-free call through the vehicle.

O “Mute” — Use the Mute command tomute your voice so the other partycannot hear it. Use the mute commandagain to unmute your voice.

NOTE:

If the other party ends the call or the cellu-lar phone network connection is lost whilethe Mute feature is on, the Mute featuremay need to be reset to “off.”

“Phone book”

The Phone Book stores up to 40 names foreach phone paired with the system. Eachname can have up to 4 locations/phonenumbers associated with it.

NOTE:

Each phone has its own separate phonebook. You cannot access Phone A’s phonebook if you are currently connected withPhone B.

“New entry” qA

Use the New Entry command to store anew name in the system.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

When prompted by the system, say thename you would like to give the newentry.

For example, say: “Mary.”

If the name is too long or too short, thesystem tells you, then prompts you for aname again.

Also, if the name sounds too much like aname already stored, the system tellsyou, then prompts you for a name again.

Once the system accepts the name andyou confirm it is correct, the system asksfor a location (Home, Office, Mobile orOther).

For example, say: “Home.”

The system acknowledges the location.The system will ask you to say a phonenumber or to transfer a phone numberstored in the cellular phone’s memory.

To enter a phone number by voice com-mand:

For example, say: “five five five onetwo one two.” See “How to say num-bers” earlier in this section for moreinformation.

To transfer a phone number stored in the

cellular phone’s memory (if so equipped):

Say: “Transfer entry.”

The system acknowledges the commandand asks you to initiate the transfer fromthe phone handset. The new contactphone number will be transferred fromthe cellular phone via the Bluetoothcommunication link.

The transfer procedure varies according toeach cellular phone. See the cellularphone Owner’s Manual for details. Youcan also visit www.infiniti.com/bluetoothfor instructions on transferring phonenumbers from INFINITI recommended cel-lular phones.

The system repeats the number andprompts you for the next command. Whenyou have finished entering numbers,choose “Store.”

The system confirms the name, locationand number. The system then asks if youwould like to store another location forthe same name. If you do not wish tostore another location, the system endsthe VR session.

“Edit” qB

Use the Edit command to alter an existing

phone book entry or to add a 2nd, 3rd or4th phone number to an existing entry.

When prompted by the system, say thename of the entry you wish to edit.

The system acknowledges the name andasks you for the location you would liketo edit.

Say the name of the location. The systemacknowledges the location. The systemwill ask you to say a phone number or totransfer a phone number stored in thecellular phone’s memory.

To enter a phone number by voice com-mand:

For example, say: “five five five onetwo one two.” See “How to say num-bers” earlier in this section for moreinformation.

To transfer a phone number stored in thecellular phone’s memory (if so equipped):

Say: “Transfer entry.”

The system acknowledges the commandand asks you to initiate the transfer fromthe phone handset. The new contactphone number will be transferred fromthe cellular phone via the Bluetoothcommunication link.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

The transfer procedure varies according toeach cellular phone. See the cellularphone Owner’s Manual for details. Youcan also visit www.infiniti.com/bluetoothfor instructions on transferring phonenumbers from INFINITI recommended cel-lular phones.

The system repeats the number andprompts you for the next command. Whenyou have finished entering numbers,choose “Store.”

The system confirms the name, locationand number, then announces that the en-try has been stored. The system thenends the VR session.

“Delete” qC

Use the Delete command to erase one en-try from the phone book, all entries fromthe phone book, the current redialnumber or the current call back number.

To delete entries from the phone book,say a name or “All entries” whenprompted by the system.

The system acknowledges the commandand asks you to confirm the deletion.

To delete the current redial number or callback number, say “redial number” or “call

back number” when prompted by the sys-tem.

If a redial number or a call back numberexists, the system deletes them withoutasking for confirmation.

If there is no number for the entry you aretrying to delete, the system says so andends the VR session.

“List names” qD

Use the List Names command to hear allthe names and locations in the phonebook.

The system recites the phone book en-tries but does not include the actualphone numbers. When the playback ofthe list is complete the system ends theVR session.

You can stop the playback of the list atany time by pressing the button onthe steering wheel. The system ends theVR session.

“Memo pad”

The Memo Pad records a maximum of 3voice memos, each up to 20 secondslong.

“Play” qA

The system plays back all the memos inthe order of newest to oldest. The systemends the VR session.

If there are no memos recorded, thesystem announces “No messages toplay.” The system ends the VR session.

“Record” qB

The system announces “Recording” and atone sounds signaling you to begin.

Speak the information you wish to recordclearly. When you are done, press the

or button on the steeringwheel.

A tone sounds and the system announces


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

“Memo recorded.” Another tone soundsto end the VR session.

If the memo pad is full, the system asks ifyou wish to record over the oldest memo.

“Delete” qC

The Delete command erases all memos.The system asks you to confirm this ac-tion before deleting all memos.

“Setup”

Use the Setup command to change op-tions associated with the BluetoothHands-Free Phone System.

“Pair phone” qA

Use the Pair Phone command to pair a

phone to the Bluetooth Hands-FreePhone System.

When you are asked to enter a PIN code forpairing your Bluetooth cellular phone, op-erate it to enter the code “1234”.

The code is always “1234” regardless ofthe number of phones paired.

Up to 5 phones can be paired. If you try topair a sixth phone, the system announcesthat you must first delete one phone orreplace an existing phone.

If you try to pair a phone that has alreadybeen paired to your vehicle’s system, thesystem announces the name the phone isalready using. The pairing procedure willthen be cancelled.

When prompted by the system, choosefrom the following commands:

O “New phone” — Refer to “Pairing aphone” earlier in this section.

O “Replace phone” — The system an-nounces the names of the phones al-ready paired and asks which youwould like to replace.

Once you say the name of the phoneyou wish to replace, the paring proce-dure will begin. Refer to “Pairing pro-

cedure” earlier in this section.

O “List phone” — See the descriptionbelow.

“List phones” qB

Use the List Phone command to hear thenames of the phones currently paired. Ifno phones are paired, the system an-nounces, “No paired phones to list.” Thesystem then ends the VR session.

“Select phone” qC

Use the Select Phone command to selecta phone of lesser priority when two ormore phones paired with BluetoothHands-Free Phone System are in the ve-hicle at the same time.

The system asks you to name the phoneand confirm the selection.

Once the selection is confirmed, the se-lected phone remains active until the igni-tion switch is turned OFF or you select anew phone.

“Change priority” qD

Use the Change Priority command tochange the priority level of the activephone.

The priority level determines which phone


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

is active when more than one pairedBluetooth phone is in the vehicle.

The system states the priority level of theactive phone and asks for a new prioritylevel (1, 2, 3, 4, 5).

If the new priority level is already beingused for another phone, the two phoneswill swap priority levels.

For example, if the current priority levelsare:

Priority Level 1 = Phone APriority Level 2 = Phone BPriority Level 3 = Phone C

and you change the priority level of PhoneC to Level 1, then:

Priority Level 1 = Phone CPriority Level 2 = Phone BPriority Level 3 = Phone A

“Delete phone” qE

Use the Delete Phone command to deletea specific phone or all phones from theBluetooth Hands-Free Phone System.

The system announces the names of thephones already paired with the system andtheir priority level. The system then givesyou the option to delete a specific phone,all phones or listen to the list again.

Once you chose to delete a phone or allphones, the system asks you to confirmthis action.

NOTE:

When you delete a phone, the associatedphone book for that phone will also be de-leted.

“Select ringtone” qF

Use the Select Ringtone command to se-lect the tone heard in the vehicle when anincoming call is received.

The system announces the name of theactive phone and asks you to choose fromthe following commands:

O “Ringtone” — The system plays a ring-tone and asks if you would like to se-lect that tone. If you say no, thesystem plays the next ringtone avail-able and continues to cycle throughthe ringtones until you select one orquit.

O “Silent” — The system asks you toconfirm your wish to disable the ring-tone.

“Bluetooth off” qG

Use the Bluetooth Off command to turn

off the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone Sys-tem.

When Bluetooth Hands-Free PhoneSystem is off, you will not be able tomake or receive calls using INFINITI VoiceRecognition. Also, you will not have ac-cess to the Phone Book.

You can still use the Memo Pad and ac-cess Setup.

To turn on the system again, choose theBluetooth On command from the Setupcommand.

SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE

Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-ofdialect users to train the system to improverecognition accuracy. By repeating anumber of commands, the users can createa voice model of their own voice that isstored in the system. The system is ca-pable of storing a different speaker adapta-tion model for memory A and memory B.

If memory A is available, the system willuse memory A to store the model. Ifmemory A is in use and memory B isavailable, the system will use memory Bto store the model. If both of the memorylocations are in use, the system will askthe user to select which memory location


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

should be overwritten.

Training procedure

The procedure for training a voice is asfollows.

1. Position the vehicle in a reasonablyquiet outdoor location.

2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the enginerunning, the parking brake on, and thetransmission in Park.

3. Press and hold the button formore than 5 seconds.

4. The system announces: “Press thePHONE/SEND ( ) button for thehands-free phone system to enter thespeaker adaptation mode or press thePHONE/END ( ) button to select adifferent language.”

5. Press the button.

For information on selecting a dif-ferent language, see “Choosing a lan-guage” earlier in this section.

6. Voice memory A or memory B is se-lected automatically. If both memorylocations are already in use, thesystem will prompt you to overwrite

one. Follow the instructions providedby the system.

7. When preparation is complete and youare ready to begin, press the

button.

8. The SA mode will be explained. Followthe instructions provided by thesystem.

9. When training is finished, the systemwill tell you an adequate number ofphrases have been recorded.

10. The system will ask you to say yourname. Follow the instructions to regis-ter your name.

11. The system will announce thatspeaker adaptation has been com-pleted and the system is ready.

The SA mode will stop if:

O The button is pressed for morethan 5 seconds in SA mode.

O The vehicle is driven during SA mode.

O The ignition switch is turned to theOFF or LOCK position.

Training phrases

During the SA mode, the system instructs

you to say the following phrases.

(The system will prompt you for eachphrase.)

O phone book new entry

O dial three oh four two nine

O delete call back number

O setup pair phone

O memo pad play

O eight pause nine three two pauseseven

O delete all entries

O call seven two four zero nine

O phone book delete entry

O memo pad record

O dial star two one seven oh

O Yes

O No

O select ring tone

O dial eight five six nine two

O Bluetooth on

O setup change priority


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

O call three one nine oh two

O nine seven pause pause three oh eight

O Cancel

O call back number

O call star two zero nine five

O delete phone

O dial eight three zero five one

O Home

O four three pause two nine pause zero

O delete redial number

O phone book list names

O call eight oh five four one

O Correction

O setup change ring tone

O dial seven four oh one eight

O setup main menu

O Delete

O dial nine seven two six six

O memo pad delete

O call seven six three oh one

O go back

O call five six two eight zero

O dial six six four three seven


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solu-tions.

Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution

System fails to interpret the command cor-rectly.

1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” earlier in this section.

2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.

3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the ve-hicle.

4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it istoo noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.

5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.

6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out toimprove the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” earlier in this section.

The system consistently selects the wrong en-try from the phone book.

1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmedby using the “List Names” command. See “Phone book” earlier in this section.

2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

MEMO


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving.............. 5-2Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) .................. 5-2Three way catalyst....................................... 5-3Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ..... 5-3Avoiding collision and rollover..................... 5-5Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ............. 5-5

Ignition switch (except Intelligent Keysystem)............................................................. 5-6

For manual transmission models................. 5-6Key positions............................................... 5-7INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System ............ 5-7

Ignition switch (models with the Intelligent Keysystem) ............................................................ 5-8

Ignition switch positions ............................. 5-8INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System ............ 5-9

Before starting the engine ................................ 5-9Starting the engine ......................................... 5-10Driving the vehicle ........................................... 5-11

Automatic transmission .............................. 5-11Manual transmission ................................. 5-15

Parking brake.................................................. 5-18Cruise control.................................................. 5-19

Precautions on cruise control..................... 5-19Cruise control operations ........................... 5-19

Break-in schedule............................................ 5-21Increasing fuel economy.................................. 5-21Parking/parking on hills ................................. 5-22Power steering................................................ 5-23Brake system.................................................. 5-23

Braking precautions................................... 5-23Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ................. 5-24

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ........... 5-25Rear active steer (RAS) system (if soequipped) ....................................................... 5-27Cold weather driving....................................... 5-28

Freeing a frozen door lock......................... 5-28Anti-freeze................................................. 5-28Battery ...................................................... 5-28Draining of coolant water .......................... 5-28Tire equipment .......................................... 5-28Special winter equipment.......................... 5-28Driving on snow or ice .............................. 5-28Engine block heater (if so equipped) ......... 5-29

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

O Do not leave children, impaired adults, orpets alone in your vehicle. They could ac-cidentally injure themselves or othersthrough inadvertent operation of the ve-hicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, tempera-tures in a closed vehicle could quickly be-come high enough to cause severe or pos-sibly fatal injuries to people or animals.

O Closely supervise children when theyare around cars to prevent them fromplaying and becoming locked in thetrunk where they could be seriously in-jured. Keep the car locked, with the rearseatback and trunk lid securely latchedwhen not in use, and prevent children’saccess to car keys.

EXHAUST GAS (Carbon monoxide)

WARNING

Do not breathe exhaust gases; they containcolorless and odorless carbon monoxide.

Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can causeunconsciousness or death.

O If you suspect that exhaust fumes areentering the vehicle, drive with all win-dows fully open, and have the vehicle in-spected immediately.

O Do not run the engine in closed spacessuch as a garage.

O Do not park the vehicle with the enginerunning for any extended length of time.

O Keep the trunk lid closed while driving,otherwise exhaust gases could be drawninto the passenger compartment. If youmust drive with the trunk lid open,follow these precautions:

— Open all the windows.

— Set the air recirculation switch OFFand the fan control at high to circu-late the air.

O If electrical wiring or other cable connec-tions must pass to a trailer through theseal on the trunk lid or the body, followthe manufacturer’s recommendation

to prevent carbon monoxide entry intothe vehicle.

O If a special body, camper, or other equip-ment is added for recreational or otherusage, follow the manufacturer’s recom-mendation to prevent carbon monoxideentry into the vehicle. (Some recre-ational vehicle appliances such asstoves, refrigerators, heaters, etc. mayalso generate carbon monoxide.)

O The exhaust system and body should beinspected by a qualified mechanic when-ever:

— Your vehicle is raised while beingserviced.

— You suspect that exhaust fumes areentering into the passenger compart-ment.

— You notice a change in the sound ofthe exhaust system.

— You have had an accident involvingdamage to the exhaust system, un-derbody, or rear of the vehicle.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING ANDDRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

THREE WAY CATALYST

The three way catalyst is an emission con-trol device installed in the exhaustsystem. Exhaust gas in the converter isburned at high temperatures to help re-duce pollutants.

WARNING

O The exhaust gas and the exhaust systemare very hot. Keep people, animals orflammable materials away from the ex-haust system components.

O Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

CAUTION

O Do not use leaded gasoline. Depositsfrom leaded gasoline will seriously re-

duce the three-way catalyst’s ability tohelp reduce exhaust pollutants.

O Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-tions in the ignition, fuel injection, orelectrical systems can cause overrichfuel flow into the three-way catalyst,causing it to overheat. Do not keepdriving if the engine misfires, or if no-ticeable loss of performance or other un-usual operating conditions are detected.Have the vehicle inspected promptly byan INFINITI dealer.

O Avoid driving with an extremely low fuellevel. Running out of fuel could causethe engine to misfire, damaging thethree-way catalyst.

O Do not race the engine while warming itup.

O Do not push or tow your vehicle to startthe engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked monthly when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recom-mended by the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la-bel. (If your vehicle has tires of a differentsize than the size indicated on the vehicleplacard or tire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehiclehas been equipped with a tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS) that illumi-nates a low tire pressure telltale whenone or more of your tires is significantlyunder-inflated. Accordingly, when the lowtire pressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires as soonas possible, and inflate them to theproper pressure. Driving on a significantlyunder-inflated tire causes the tire to over-heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency andtire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’shandling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substi-tute for proper tire maintenance, and it isthe driver’s responsibility to maintain cor-rect tire pressure, even if under-inflationhas not reached the level to trigger illumi-nation of the TPMS low tire pressure tell-tale.

Starting and driving 5-3

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicatewhen the system is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-bined with the low tire pressure telltale.When the system detects a malfunction, thetelltale will flash for approximately oneminute and then remain continuously illu-minated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long as themalfunction exists. When the malfunctionindicator is illuminated, the system may notbe able to detect or signal low tire pressureas intended. TPMS malfunctions may occurfor a variety of reasons, including the in-stallation of replacement or alternate tiresor wheels on the vehicle that prevent theTPMS from functioning properly. Alwayscheck the TPMS malfunction telltale afterreplacing one or more tires or wheels onyour vehicle to ensure that the replacementor alternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to function properly.

Additional information

O The TPMS does not monitor the tirepressure of the spare tire.

O The TPMS will activate only when the ve-hicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-

tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (forexample a flat tire while driving).

O The low tire pressure warning lightdoes not automatically turn off whenthe tire pressure is adjusted. After thetire is inflated to the recommendedpressure, the vehicle must be drivenat speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) toactivate the TPMS and turn off the lowtire pressure warning light. Use a tirepressure gauge to check the tire pres-sure.

O Tire pressure rises and falls de-pending on the heat caused by the ve-hicle’s operation and the outside tem-perature. Low outside temperature canlower the temperature of the air insidethe tire which can cause a lower tireinflation pressure. This may cause thelow tire pressure warning light to illu-minate. If the warning light illuminatesin low ambient temperature, check thetire pressure for all four tires.

For additional information, see “Low tirepressure warning light” in the “2. Instru-ments and controls” section and “Tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)” inthe “6. In case of emergency” section.

WARNING

O If the low tire pressure warning light illumi-nates while driving, avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce ve-hicle speed, pull off the road to a safe loca-tion and stop the vehicle as soon as pos-sible. Serious vehicle damage could occurand may lead to an accident and could re-sult in serious personal injury. Check thetire pressure for all four tires. Adjust thetire pressure to the recommended COLDtire pressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label to turn the lowtire pressure warning light OFF. If you havea flat tire, replace it with a spare tire assoon as possible. (See “Flat tire” in the “6.In case of emergency” section for changinga flat tire.)

O When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, tire pressure will not be indi-cated, the TPMS will not function andthe low tire pressure warning light willflash for approximately 1 minute and re-main on after the 1 minute. Contact your


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

INFINITI dealer as soon as possible fortire replacement and/or system reset-ting.

O Replacing tires with those not originallyspecified by INFINITI could affect theproper operation of the TPMS.

O Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pressuresensors.

CAUTION

Do not place metalized film or any metalparts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. Thismay cause poor reception of the signalsfrom the tire pressure sensors, and theTPMS will not function properly.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible for com-pliance could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada.

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) this devicemust accept any interference received, in-cluding interference that may cause un-desired operation of the device.

AVOIDING COLLISION ANDROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe andprudent manner may result in loss of controlor an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times.Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid exces-sive speed, high speed cornering, or sud-den steering maneuvers. These drivingpractices could cause you to lose controlof your vehicle. As with any vehicle, a lossof control could result in a collision withother vehicles or objects, or cause the ve-hicle to rollover, particularly if the loss ofcontrol causes the vehicle to slide side-ways. Be attentive at all times, and avoiddriving when tired. Never drive under the

influence of alcohol or drugs (includingprescription or over-the-counter drugswhich may cause drowsiness). Alwayswear your seat belt as outlined in the “1.Safety — Seats, seat belts and supple-mental restraint system” section and alsoinstruct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury incollisions and rollovers. In a rollovercrash, an unbelted or improperly beltedperson is significantly more likely to be in-jured or killed than a person properlywearing a seat belt.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS ANDDRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcohol ordrugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reducescoordination, delays reaction time and im-pairs judgement. Driving after drinking alco-hol increases the likelihood of being in-volved in an accident injuring yourself andothers. Additionally, if you are injured in anaccident, alcohol can increase the severityof the injury.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

INFINITI is committed to safe driving. Youmust not drive under the influence of al-cohol. Every year thousands of people areinjured or killed in alcohol related acci-dents. Although the local laws vary onwhat is considered to be legally intoxi-cated, the fact is that alcohol affects allpeople differently and most people under-estimate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’tmix!

And that’s true for drugs too (over thecounter, prescription, and illegal drugs).Don’t drive if your ability to operate yourvehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, orsome other physical condition.

WARNING

Never remove or turn the key to the LOCK po-sition while driving. The steering wheel willlock. This may cause the driver to lose con-trol of the vehicle and could result in seriousvehicle damage or personal injury.

FOR MANUAL TRANSMISSIONMODELS

The ignition switch includes a device thathelps prevent accidental removal of thekey while driving.

The key can only be removed when the ig-nition switch is in the LOCK position.

To turn the ignition switch to the LOCKposition from the ACC or ON position, turnthe key to the OFF position, push the keyin, then turn the key to the LOCK position.

There is an OFF position q1 in between theLOCK and ACC positions. The OFF position

SSD0503

IGNITION SWITCH (except Intelligent Keysystem)


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

is indicated by a “1” on the key cylinder.

In order for the steering wheel to belocked, it must be turned about 1/6 of aturn clockwise from the straight up posi-tion.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the key tothe LOCK position. Remove the key.

To unlock the steering wheel, insert thekey and turn it gently while rotating thesteering wheel slightly right and left.

KEY POSITIONS

The ignition switch includes an anti-theftsteering lock device.

LOCK (Normal parking position) (0)

The ignition key can only be removedwhen the ignition switch is in this posi-tion.

OFF (1)

The engine can be turned off withoutlocking the steering wheel.

The ignition lock is designed so that thekey cannot be turned to the LOCK positionand removed until the selector lever ismoved to the P position (for automatictransmission) or the key is pushed in

while turning the key between the ACCand LOCK positions.

ACC (Accessories) (2)

This position activates electrical accesso-ries when the engine is not running.

ON (Normal operating position) (3)

This position activates ignition system inaddition to electrical accessories.

START (4)

This position activates the starter motor,starting the engine.



If the engine fails to start using a regis-tered key (for example, when interferenceis caused by another registered key, anautomated toll road device or automatedpayment device on the key ring), restartthe engine using the following proce-dures:




4. Restart the engine while holding thedevice (which may have caused the in-terference) away from the registeredkey.

If this procedure allows the engine tostart, INFINITI recommends placing theregistered key on a separate key ring toavoid interference from other devices.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

The ignition lock is designed so that theignition switch cannot be turned to theLOCK position and removed until the se-lector lever is moved to the P (Park) posi-tion.

When turning the ignition switch, makesure the selector lever is in the P position.

If the selector lever is not returned to theP position, the ignition switch cannot bemoved toward the LOCK position.

When the ignition switch cannot beturned toward the LOCK position, proceedas follows:

1. Move the selector lever into the P po-sition.

2. Turn the ignition switch slightly in theON direction.

3. Turn the key toward the LOCK posi-tion.

The selector lever can be moved from the Pposition if the ignition switch is in the ONposition and the foot brake pedal is de-pressed.

There is an OFF position in between theLOCK and ACC positions, although it doesnot show on the lock cylinder. When theignition is in the OFF position the steeringwheel is not locked.

In order for the steering wheel to belocked, it must be turned about 1/6 of aturn counterclockwise from the straightup position.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the igni-tion switch to the LOCK position. To unlockthe steering wheel, push the ignitionswitch in and turn it gently while rotatingthe steering wheel slightly right and left.

If the battery of the vehicle equipped withthe Intelligent Key system is discharged,the ignition switch cannot be turned from

the LOCK position, even using the me-chanical key or valet key.

WARNING

Never turn the ignition switch to the LOCKposition while driving. The steering wheelwill lock. This may cause the driver to losecontrol of the vehicle and could result in se-rious vehicle damage and/or personal in-jury.

IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS

Push in the ignition switch to the qB

range when you turn it.

LOCK (Normal parking position):

The ignition switch can only be locked inthe qA position.

The ignition switch will be unlocked whenit is pushed in, and turned to the ACC po-sition qD while carrying the IntelligentKey.

ACC (Accessories) qD :

This position activates electrical accesso-ries such as the radio, when the engine isnot running.

SPA1628

IGNITION SWITCH (models with theIntelligent Key system)


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

ON (Normal operating position) qE :

This position turns on the ignition systemand electrical accessories.

START qF :

This position starts the engine. As soonas the engine has started, release theswitch immediately. It will automaticallyreturn to the ON position.

For important safety information, see “Ig-nition switch” in the “5. Starting and driv-ing” section.

The ignition switch cannot be turned backto the LOCK position unless the shift leveris in P position. (It can be turned to onlyqC .)

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the ignitionswitch in ACC or ON position when the en-gine is not running for an extended period.This can discharge the battery.



If the engine does not start using a regis-tered key (for example, when interferenceis caused by another registered key, anautomated toll road device or an auto-mated payment device on the key ring),restart the engine using the following pro-cedures:




4. Restart the engine while holding thedevice (which may have caused the in-terference) separate from the regis-tered key.

If this procedure allows the engine tostart, INFINITI recommends placing theregistered key on a separate key ring toavoid interference from other devices.

O Make sure the area around the vehicleis clear.

O Maintenance items should be checkedperiodically, for example, each timeyou check engine oil.

O Check that all windows and lights areclean.

O Visually inspect tires for their appear-ance and condition. Also check tiresfor proper inflation.

O Lock all doors.

O Position seat and adjust head re-straints.

O Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

O Fasten seat belts and ask all passen-gers to do likewise.

O Check the operation of warning lightswhen the ignition key is turned to theON position. See “Warning/indicatorlights and audible reminders” in the“2. Instruments and controls” section.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Automatic transmission:

Move the selector lever to the P or Nposition. (P preferred.)

The starter is designed so that thestarter does not operate unless the se-lector lever is in either one of theabove positions.

Manual transmission:

Move the shift lever to the N position.Depress the clutch pedal fully to thefloor.

The starter is designed so that it doesnot operate unless the clutch pedal isfully depressed.

3. Turn the ignition switch to START (4)to crank the engine with your foot offthe accelerator pedal. Release the keywhen the engine starts.

If the engine starts, but fails to run, re-peat the above procedure.

O If the engine is very hard to start inextremely cold weather or when re-starting, depress the accelerator pedala little (approximately 1/3 to the floor)and while holding, crank the engine.

Release the key and the acceleratorpedal when the engine starts.

O If the engine is very hard to start be-cause it is flooded, depress the accel-erator pedal all the way to the floorand hold it. Crank the engine for 5 to6 seconds. After cranking the engine,release the accelerator pedal. Crankthe engine with your foot off the accel-erator pedal by turning the ignition keyto the START position. Release the keywhen the engine starts. If the enginestarts, but fails to run, repeat theabove procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than 15seconds at a time. If the engine does notstart, turn the key off and wait 10 secondsbefore cranking again, otherwise the startercould be damaged.

4. Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30seconds after starting. Do not race theengine while warming it up. Drive atmoderate speed for a short distancefirst, especially in cold weather. In

cold weather, keep the engine runningfor a minimum of 2 - 3 minutes beforeshutting it off. Starting and stoppingthe engine over a short period of timemay make the vehicle more difficult tostart.

STARTING THE ENGINE


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

5-speed automatic transmission

The automatic transmission in your ve-hicle is electronically controlled by atransmission control module to producemaximum efficiency and smooth opera-tion.

Shown on the following pages are the rec-ommended operating procedures for thistransmission. Follow these procedures formaximum vehicle performance anddriving enjoyment.

Starting the vehicle

After starting the engine, fully depress thefoot brake pedal and push the selector le-ver button before shifting the selectorlever to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D(Drive) or Manual shift mode position. Besure the vehicle is fully stopped before at-tempting to shift the selector lever.

This automatic transmission model is de-signed so that the foot brake pedal mustbe depressed before shifting from P (Park)to any drive position while the ignitionswitch is the ON position.

The selector lever cannot be moved out ofthe P (Park) position and into any of the

other gear positions if the ignition switchis turned to the LOCK, OFF or ACC positionor if the key is removed from the switch.

1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressedand push the selector lever button toshift into a driving gear.

2. Release the parking brake and footbrake, then gradually start the vehiclein motion.

WARNING

O Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhile shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or manualshift mode. Always depress the brakepedal until shifting is completed. Failureto do so could cause you to lose controland have an accident.

O Cold engine idle speed is high, so usecaution when shifting into a forward orreverse gear before the engine haswarmed up.

O On slippery roads, do not downshift.This may cause a loss of control.

O Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)while vehicle is moving forward. Nevershift to P (Park) or D (Drive) while vehicleis moving rearward. Failure to do socould cause you to lose control and havean accident.

CAUTION

When stopping the vehicle on an uphillgrade, do not hold the vehicle by depressingthe accelerator pedal. The foot brake shouldbe used for this purpose.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

To move the selector lever,

: Push the button while depressingthe brake pedal,

: Push the button,: Just move the selector lever.

Shifting

After starting the engine, fully depress thebrake pedal and shift the selector leverfrom the P (Park) to R (Reverse), N (Neu-tral), D (Drive), or Manual shift mode posi-tion.

Push the button to shift into the P (Park)or R (Reverse) position. All other positions

can be selected without pushing thebutton.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the selector leveris in any position while the engine is not run-ning. Failure to do so could cause the vehicleto move unexpectedly or roll away and resultin serious personal injury or propertydamage.

If the key is turned to the OFF or ACC po-sition for any reason while the vehicle isin the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or any D(Drive) position, the key cannot be turnedto the LOCK position and be removedfrom the ignition switch. Move the se-lector lever to the P (Park) position, thenthe key can be turned to the LOCK posi-tion.

P (Park):

Use this selector position when the vehicleis parked or when starting the engine.Make sure the vehicle is completelystopped. The brake pedal must be de-pressed and the selector lever buttonpushed in to move the selector lever from

the N (Neutral) position or any drive positionto the P (Park) position. Apply the parkingbrake. When parking on a hill, first depressthe foot brake pedal, apply the parkingbrake, then move the lever to the P (Park)position.

CAUTION

Use this position only when the vehicle iscompletely stopped.

R (Reverse):

Use this position to back up. Always besure the vehicle is completely stopped be-fore selecting the R (Reverse) position.The brake pedal must be depressed andthe selector lever button pushed in tomove the selector lever from the P (Park), N(Neutral) or any drive position to the R (Re-verse) position.

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is en-gaged. The engine can be started in thisposition. You may shift to the N (Neutral)position and restart a stalled engine whilethe vehicle is moving.

SSD0413


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forwarddriving.

Manual shift mode

When the selector lever is shifted fromthe D position to the manual shift gatewith the vehicle stopped or while driving,the transmission enters the manual shiftmode. Shift range can be selected manu-ally.

When shifting up, move the selector leverto the + (up) side. The transmission shiftsto the higher range.

When shifting down, move the selector le-ver to the − (down) side. The transmissionshifts to the lower range.

In the manual shift mode, the shift rangeis displayed on the position indicator inthe meter.

Shift ranges up or down one by one asfollows:

1M

→← 2M

→← 3M

→← 4M

→← 5M

5M (5th):

Use this position for all normal forwarddriving.

4M (4th):

For driving up or down long slopes whereengine braking would be advantageous.

3M (3rd) and 2M (2nd):

Use for hill climbing or engine braking ondownhill grades.

1M (1st):

Use this position when climbing steephills slowly or driving slowly throughdeep snow, or for maximum enginebraking on steep downhill grades.

O Remember not to drive at high speedsfor extended periods of time in lowerthan 5M range. This reduces gasmileage.

O Moving the selector lever rapidly tothe same side twice will shift theranges in succession.

O When canceling the manual shiftmode, return the selector lever to theD position. The transmission returnsto the normal driving mode.

O In the manual shift mode, the transmis-sion may not shift to the selected gear.This helps maintain driving perfor-mance and reduces the chance of ve-

hicle damage or loss of control.

O In the manual shift mode, the transmis-sion automatically shifts down to 1stgear before the vehicle comes to astop. When accelerating again, it isnecessary to shift up to the desiredrange.

Accelerator downshift— In D position —

For passing or hill climbing, fully depressthe accelerator pedal to the floor. Thisshifts the transmission down into thelower gear, depending on the vehiclespeed.

Fail-safe

When the fail-safe operation occurs, theautomatic transmission will be locked inthe 4th gear.

If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-ditions, such as excessive wheel spinningand subsequent hard braking, the fail-safesystem may be activated. This will occureven if all electrical circuits are functioningproperly. In this case, turn the ignitionswitch to the OFF position and wait for 3seconds. Then turn the key back to the ONposition. The vehicle should return to its


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

normal operating condition. If it does notreturn to its normal operating condition,have an INFINITI dealer check the trans-mission and repair if necessary.

Shift lock release

If the battery charge is low or discharged,the selector lever may not be moved fromthe P (Park) position even with the brakepedal depressed and the selector leverbutton pushed.

To move the selector lever, release theshift lock and push the selector lever but-ton. The selector lever can be moved tothe N (Neutral) position. However, thesteering wheel will be locked unless theignition switch is turned to the ON posi-tion.

To release the shift lock, complete the fol-lowing procedure:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCKposition and remove the key.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Remove the shift lock cover qA using asuitable tool.

4. Insert a suitable tool in the shift lockslot, and push down qB .

5. Push the selector lever button qC andmove the selector lever to the N (Neu-tral) position qD while holding downthe shift lock.

6. Turn the ignition switch to the ON po-sition to unlock the steering wheel.Now the vehicle may be moved to thedesired location.

If the lever cannot be moved out of the P(Park) position, have an INFINITI dealercheck the automatic transmission systemas soon as possible.

SSD0477


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

Shifting

To change gears, or when up shifting ordown shifting, fully depress the clutchpedal, shift into the appropriate gear,then slowly and smoothly release theclutch.

This vehicle is equipped with a shortthrow shifter manual transmission. To en-sure smooth gear changes, fully depressthe clutch pedal before operating the shiftlever. If the clutch pedal is not fully de-pressed before the transmission is

shifted, a gear noise may be heard. Trans-mission damage could occur.

Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th gear in se-quence according to the vehicle speed.

To back up, depress the shift lever andthen move it to the R (Reverse) positionafter stopping the vehicle completely.

If it is difficult to move the shift lever intothe R (Reverse) or 1 position (Low gear),shift to the N (Neutral) position, and thenrelease the clutch pedal once. Fully de-press the clutch pedal again and shiftinto the R or 1 position.

WARNING

O Do not downshift abruptly on slipperyroads. This may cause a loss of control.

O Do not over-rev the engine when shiftingto a lower gear. This may cause a loss ofcontrol or engine damage.

CAUTION

O Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedalwhile driving. This may damage theclutch.

O Fully depress the clutch pedal beforeshifting to help prevent transmissiondamage.

O Stop your vehicle completely beforeshifting into R (Reverse).

O When the vehicle is stopped for a periodof time, for example at a stop light, shiftto N (Neutral) and release the clutchpedal with the foot brake applied.

SSD0536


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Up-shift indicator

The manual transmission up-shift indi-cator is located in the meter and showsthe driver the timing to shift into a highergear by illuminating. The use of the up-shift indicator will help you to upshift at aconstant engine speed (rpm) from anygear.

The up-shift indicator will start flashingwhen the engine speed is within about500 rpm of the set figure while driving,and then illuminate after the enginespeed reaches the set figure.

Use the up-shift indicator when driving asfollows:

O If the maximum engine speed is de-sired, set the figure at 7,000 rpm. (Theindicator starts flashing from about6,500 rpm and comes on steady at7,000 rpm.)

O If the maximum engine torque is de-sired, set the figure at 4,800 rpm.(The indicator starts flashing fromabout 4,300 rpm and comes on steadyat 4,800 rpm.)

O If you want to break in your vehicle,use of the up-shift indicator with arather low figure will help you to avoidthe high engine speed.

To make the up-shift indicator not comeon, set the figure at above 7,900 rpm.

There may be a slight difference betweenthe timing of the up-shift indicator illumi-nation and the tachometer indication.

Up-shift indicator setting:

The desired engine speed (rpm) for theup-shift indicator can be set while the up-shift indicator setting mode is selected.Change the display to the up-shift indica-tor mode by pushing the trip odometerreset switch q1 . When the up-shift indica-tor setting mode is selected, the enginespeed currently set is displayed. (The ini-tial factory setting is 8,000 rpm.) The fig-ure can be changed between 2,000 and8,000 rpm.

SSD0432 SSD0433


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Push the trip odometer reset switch morethan approximately 2 seconds and thenthe figure in the display will startblinking.

Pushing the trip odometer reset switch forless than approximately 1 second whilethe figure is blinking will add the figureby 100 rpm. If pushing for more than ap-proximately 1 second, the figure will in-crease by 500 rpm.

If you have not operated the trip odom-eter reset switch for 5 seconds, the set-ting mode will end. The display will illumi-nate instead of blink.

If the battery cable is disconnected, theset engine speed will be returned to theinitial figure (8,000 rpm).

Suggested up-shift speeds

Shown below are suggested vehiclespeeds for shifting into a higher gear.These suggestions relate to fuel economyand vehicle performance. Actual up-shiftspeeds will vary according to road condi-tions, the weather and individual drivinghabits.

For normal acceleration in low altitude ar-eas [less than 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]:

Gear change MPH (km/h)1st to 2nd 8 (13)2nd to 3rd 16 (25)3rd to 4th 25 (40)4th to 5th 30 (50)5th to 6th 33 (53)

For quick acceleration in low altitudeareas or in high altitude areas [over 4,000ft (1,219 m)]:

Gear change MPH (km/h)1st to 2nd 15 (24)2nd to 3rd 25 (40)3rd to 4th 40 (64)4th to 5th 45 (72)5th to 6th 50 (80)

Suggested maximum speed ineach gear

Downshift to a lower gear if the engine isnot running smoothly, or if you need toaccelerate.

Do not exceed the maximum suggestedspeed (shown below) in any gear. Forlevel road driving, use the highest gearsuggested for that speed. Always observe

posted speed limits, and drive accordingto the road conditions, which will ensuresafe operation. Do not over-rev the enginewhen shifting to a lower gear as it maycause engine damage or loss of vehiclecontrol.

Gear MPH (km/h)1st 35 (56)

2nd 60 (96)3rd 90 (144)4th —5th —6th —


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Automatic transmission model

To apply: Fully depress the parking brakepedal q1 .

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake q2 .

2. Depress the parking brake pedal q1and the parking brake will be re-leased.

3. Before driving, be sure the brakewarning light goes out.

Manual transmission model

To apply: Pull the parking brake lever upq1 .

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral)position.

3. While pulling up on the parking brakelever slightly, push the button q2 andlower the lever completely q3 .

4. Before driving, be sure the brakewarning light goes out.

WARNING

O Be sure the parking brake is fully re-leased before driving. Failure to do socan cause brake failure and lead to anaccident.

O Do not release the parking brake fromoutside the vehicle.

O Do not use the gear shift in place of theparking brake. When parking, be surethe parking brake is fully engaged.

O Do not leave children unattended in a ve-hicle. They could release the parkingbrake and cause an accident.

SPA2331 SPA2110

PARKING BRAKE


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when drivingunder the following conditions:

O When it is not possible to keep the ve-hicle at a set speed.

O In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies inspeed.

O On winding or hilly roads.

O On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

O In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle con-trol and result in an accident.

CAUTION

On manual transmission models, do notshift into N (Neutral) without depressing theclutch pedal when the cruise control is set.Should this occur, depress the clutch pedaland turn the main switch off immediately.Failure to do so may cause engine damage.

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISECONTROL

O If the cruise control system malfunc-tions, it cancels automatically. TheSET indicator light on the instrumentpanel then blinks to warn the driver.

O If the engine coolant temperature be-comes excessively high, the cruisecontrol system will be canceled auto-matically.

O If the SET indicator light blinks, turnthe cruise control MAIN switch off andhave the system checked by anINFINITI dealer.

O The SET indicator light may blink whenthe cruise control MAIN switch isturned on while pushing theRESUME/ACCELERATE, SET/COAST, orCANCEL switch. To properly set thecruise control system, perform the fol-lowing procedures.

1. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch

2. SET/COAST switch

3. CANCEL switch

4. MAIN (ONzOFF) switch

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at aspeed between 25 to 89 MPH (40 to 144km/h) without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the MAINswitch on. The CRUISE indicator light onthe instrument panel will come on.

SSD0428

CRUISE CONTROL


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

To set at cruising speed, accelerate yourvehicle to the desired speed, push theSET/COAST switch and release it. (TheSET indicator light will come on.) Takeyour foot off the accelerator pedal. Yourvehicle will maintain the set speed.

O To pass another vehicle, depress theaccelerator pedal. When you releasethe pedal, the vehicle will return tothe previously set speed.

O The vehicle may not maintain the setspeed when going up or down steephills. If this happens, drive without thecruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, follow either ofthese three methods:

a) Push the CANCEL switch. The SET indi-cator light will go out.

b) Tap the brake pedal. The SET indicatorlight will go out.

c) Turn the MAIN switch off. Both theCRUISE indicator and SET indicatorlights will go out.

O If you depress the brake pedal whilepushing the RESUME/ACCELERATEswitch and reset at the cruising speed,turn the MAIN switch off once andthen turn it on again.

O The cruise control will automaticallybe cancelled if the vehicle slows downbelow approximately 8 MPH (13 km/h).

O If you depress the clutch pedal(manual transmission), or move theselector lever to the N (Neutral) posi-tion (automatic transmission), thecruise control will be canceled.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use oneof the following methods:

a) Depress the accelerator pedal. Whenthe vehicle reaches the desired speed,push and release the SET/COASTswitch.

b) Push and hold the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch. When the vehiclereaches the speed you desire, releasethe switch.

c) Push, then quickly release theRESUME/ACCELERATE set switch. Thiswill increase the vehicle speed byabout 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, useone of the following methods:

a) Lightly tap the brake pedal. When thevehicle reaches the desired speed,push the SET/COAST switch and re-lease it.

b) Push and hold the SET/COAST switch.Release the switch when the vehicleslows down to the desired speed.

c) Push, then quickly release the SET/COAST switch. This will decrease thevehicle speed by about 1 MPH (1.6km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-lease the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch.The vehicle will resume the last set cruis-ing speed when the vehicle speed is over25 MPH (40 km/h).


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),follow these recommendations to obtainmaximum engine performance and ensurethe future reliability and economy of yournew vehicle. Failure to follow these recom-mendations may result in shortened enginelife and reduced engine performance.

O Avoid driving for long periods at con-stant speed, either fast or slow. Donot run the engine over 4,000 rpm.

O Do not accelerate at full throttle in anygear.

O Avoid quick starts.

O Avoid hard braking as much as pos-sible.

O Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavyload for the first 500 miles (800 km).

O Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Main-tain cruising speeds with a constantaccelerator position.

O Drive at moderate speeds on the high-way. Driving at high speed will lowerfuel economy.

O Avoid unnecessary stopping and brak-ing. Maintain a safe distance behindother vehicles.

O Use a proper gear range which suitsroad conditions. On level roads, shiftinto high gear as soon as possible.

O Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

O Keep your engine tuned up.

O Follow the recommended periodicmaintenance schedule.

O Keep the tires inflated at the correctpressure. Low pressure will increasetire wear and waste fuel.

O Keep the front wheels in correct align-ment. Improper alignment will causenot only tire wear but also lower fueleconomy.

O Air conditioner operation lowers fueleconomy. Use the air conditioner onlywhen necessary.

O When cruising at highway speeds, it ismore economical to use the air condi-tioner and leave the windows closedto reduce drag.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

O Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

O Never leave the engine running while thevehicle is unattended.

O Never leave children unattended insidethe vehicle.

O Safe parking procedures require thatboth the parking brake be set and thetransmission placed into P (Park).Failure to do so could cause the vehicleto move unexpectedly or roll away andresult in an accident.

O Make sure the shift lever has beenpushed as far forward as it can go andcannot be moved without depressing thebutton at the end of the lever.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Automatic transmission models:

Move the selector lever to the P (Park)position.

Manual transmission models:

Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse)position. When parking on an uphillgrade, place the shift lever in the 1(Low gear) position.

3. To help prevent the vehicle fromrolling into the street when parked ona sloping drive way, it is a good prac-tice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

O HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: q1

Turn the wheels into the curb andmove the vehicle forward until thecurb side wheel gently touches thecurb.

O HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: q2

Turn the wheels away from the curband move the vehicle back until thecurb side wheel gently touches thecurb.

SD1006MA

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

O HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NOCURB: q3

Turn the wheels toward the side of theroad so the vehicle will move awayfrom the center of the road if it moves.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCKposition and remove the key.

The power assisted steering uses a hy-draulic pump, driven by the engine, to as-sist steering.

If the engine stops or the drive beltbreaks, you will still have control of thevehicle. However, much greater steeringeffort is needed, especially in sharp turnsor at low speeds.

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is turned offwhile driving, the power assist for the steer-ing will not work. Steering will be muchharder to operate.

BRAKING PRECAUTIONSThe brake system has two separate hy-draulic circuits. If one circuit malfunc-tions, you will still have braking ability attwo wheels.

Vacuum assisted brake

The brake booster aids braking by usingengine vacuum. If the engine stops, youcan stop the vehicle by depressing thebrake pedal. However, greater foot pres-sure on the brake pedal will be requiredto stop the vehicle and the stopping dis-tance will be longer.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driventhrough water, the brakes may get wet.As a result, your braking distance will belonger and the vehicle may pull to oneside during braking.

To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safespeed while lightly tapping the brakepedal to heat-up the brakes. Do this untilthe brakes return to normal. Avoid drivingthe vehicle at high speeds until thebrakes function correctly.

Parking brake break-in

Break-in the parking brake shoes when-ever the stopping effect of the parking

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

brake is weakened or whenever the park-ing brake shoes and/or drums/rotors arereplaced, in order to assure the bestbraking performance.

This procedure is described in the vehicleservice manual and can be performed byyour INFINITI dealer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedalwhile driving. This will cause overheatingof the brakes, increases wear on thebrakes and pads, and reduces gasmileage.

To help save the brakes and to preventthe brakes from overheating, reducespeed and downshift to a lower gear be-fore going down a slope or long grade.Overheated brakes may reduce brakingperformance and could result in loss ofvehicle control.

WARNING

O While driving on a slippery surface, becareful when braking, accelerating ordownshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-

erating could cause the wheels to skidand result in an accident.

O If the engine is not running or is turnedoff while driving, the power assist forthe brakes will not work. Braking will beharder.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM(ABS)

WARNING

O The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is asophisticated device, but it cannot pre-vent accidents resulting from careless ordangerous driving techniques. It canhelp maintain vehicle control duringbraking on slippery surfaces. Rememberthat stopping distances on slippery sur-faces will be longer than on normal sur-faces even with ABS. Stopping distancesmay also be longer on rough, gravel orsnow covered roads, or if you are usingtire chains. Always maintain a safe dis-tance from the vehicle in front of you. Ul-

timately, the driver is responsible forsafety.

O Tire type and condition may also affectbraking effectiveness.

— When replacing tires, install thespecified size of tires on all fourwheels.

— When installing a spare tire, makesure that it is the proper size andtype as specified on the Tire andLoading Information label. See “Tireand Loading Information label” in the“9. Technical and consumer informa-tion” section of this manual.

— For detailed information, see“Wheels and tires” in the “8. Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section ofthis manual.

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) con-trols the brakes so the wheels do not lockduring hard braking or when braking onslippery surfaces. The system detects therotation speed at each wheel and variesthe brake fluid pressure to prevent eachwheel from locking and sliding. By pre-


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

venting each wheel from locking, the sys-tem helps the driver maintain steeringcontrol and helps to minimize swervingand spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold itdown. Depress the brake pedal with firmsteady pressure, but do not pump thebrakes. The ABS will operate to preventthe wheels from locking up. Steer the ve-hicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so mayresult in increased stopping distances.

Self-test feature

The ABS includes electronic sensors, elec-tric pumps, hydraulic solenoids and acomputer. The computer has a built-in di-agnostic feature that tests the systemeach time you start the engine and movethe vehicle at a low speed in forward orreverse. When the self-test occurs, youmay hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel apulsation in the brake pedal. This isnormal and does not indicate a malfunc-

tion. If the computer senses a malfunc-tion, it switches the ABS off and illumi-nates the ABS warning light on the instru-ment panel. The brake system thenoperates normally, but without anti-lockassistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminatesduring the self-test or while driving, havethe vehicle checked by an INFINITI dealer.

Normal operation

The ABS operates at speeds above 3 to 6MPH (5 to 10 km/h). The speed varies ac-cording to road conditions.

When the ABS senses that one or morewheels are close to locking up, the actua-tor rapidly applies and releases hydraulicpressure. This action is similar topumping the brakes very quickly. You mayfeel a pulsation in the brake pedal andhear a noise from under the hood or feela vibration from the actuator when it isoperating. This is normal and indicatesthat the ABS is operating properly. How-ever, the pulsation may indicate that roadconditions are hazardous and extra careis required while driving.

When accelerating or driving on slipperysurfaces, the tires may spin or slide. Withthe Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)system, sensors detect these movementsand control the braking and engineoutput to help improve vehicle stability.

O When the VDC system is operating,the “SLIP” indicator in the instrumentpanel blinks.

O When only the Traction Control System(TCS) portion of the VDC system is op-erating, the “SLIP” indicator in the in-strument panel blinks.

O If the “SLIP” indicator blinks, the roadconditions are slippery. Be sure to ad-just your speed and driving to theseconditions. Be sure to drive carefully.See “Slip indicator light”, and “Ve-hicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indi-cator light” in the “2. Instruments andcontrols” section.

O Indicator lightIf a malfunction occurs in the system,the “SLIP” and “VDC OFF” indicatorlights illuminate in the instrumentpanel. As long as these indicators areilluminated, the VDC system functionis canceled.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)SYSTEM


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

The VDC system uses an Active Brake Lim-ited Slip (ABLS) system to improve vehicletraction. The ABLS system works whenone of the driving wheels is spinning on aslippery surface. The ABLS system brakesthe spinning wheel, which distributes thedriving power to the other driving wheel.If the vehicle is operated with the VDCsystem turned off, all VDC system func-tions and TCS functions will be turned off.The ABLS system and ABS will still op-erate with the VDC system off. When theABLS system is activated, the “SLIP” indi-cator light will blink and you may hear aclunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in thebrake pedal. This is normal and is not anindication of a malfunction.

While the VDC system is operating, youmay feel a pulsation in the brake pedal andhear a noise or feel a vibration from underthe hood. This is normal and indicates thatthe VDC system is working properly.

The VDC system computer has a built-indiagnostic feature that tests the systemeach time you start the engine and movethe vehicle at a low speed forward orbackward. When the self-test occurs, youmay hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pul-sation in the brake pedal. This is normaland is not an indication of a malfunction.

WARNING

O The VDC system is designed to help im-prove driving stability but does not pre-vent accidents due to abrupt steeringoperation at high speeds or due to care-less or dangerous driving techniques.Reduce vehicle speed and be especiallycareful when driving and cornering onslippery surfaces and always drive care-fully.

O If engine related parts such as mufflerare not standard equipment or are ex-tremely deteriorated, the “VDC OFF” in-dicator or “SLIP” indicator or both indi-cator lights may illuminate.

O Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.If suspension parts such as shock ab-sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer barsand bushings are not INFINITI-approvedor are extremely deteriorated, the VDCsystem may not operate properly. Thiscould adversely affect vehicle handlingperformance, and the “VDC OFF” indi-cator or “SLIP” indicator or both indi-

cator lights may illuminate.

O If brake related parts such as brakepads, rotors and calipers are not stan-dard equipment or are extremely dete-riorated, the “VDC OFF” indicator or“SLIP” indicator or both indicator lightsmay illuminate.

O When driving on extremely inclined sur-faces such as higher banked corners,the VDC system may not operate prop-erly and the “VDC OFF” indicator or“SLIP” indicator or both indicator lightsmay illuminate. Do not drive on thesetypes of roads.

O When driving on an unstable surfacesuch as a turntable, ferry, elevator orramp, the “VDC OFF” indicator or “SLIP”indicator or both indicator lights may il-luminate. This is not a malfunction. Re-start the engine after driving onto astable surface.

O If wheels or tires other than those rec-ommended are used, the VDC systemmay not operate properly and the “VDCOFF” indicator or “SLIP” indicator orboth indicator lights may illuminate.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

O The VDC system is not a substitute forwinter tires or tire chains on a snow cov-ered road.

The Rear Active Steer (RAS) system is anelectronically controlled four-wheelsteering system.

The angle of the rear wheels are adjustedby the RAS system, depending on the ve-hicle speed and steering angle. The rearwheels are designed to turn momentarilyin the opposite direction and then changeto the same direction as the front wheels.

At low speeds, the rear wheels will notturn and the system functions as a two-wheel steering system.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, theRAS function will stop but the ordinarytwo-wheel steering system will operatenormally. The “RAS” warning light will il-luminate.

If the light illuminates while you are driv-ing, contact an INFINITI dealer for repair.

WARNING

The RAS system, although a sophisticateddevice, cannot prevent accidents resultingfrom careless or dangerous driving tech-niques. Ultimately the responsibility forsafety of self and others rests in the handsof the driver. Therefore only through atten-tive and careful driving methods can the RASsystem be fully appreciated and safety as-sured.

REAR ACTIVE STEER (RAS) SYSTEM (if soequipped)


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, applydeicer or glycerin to it through the keyhole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat thekey before inserting it into the key hole.

ANTI-FREEZE

In the winter when it is anticipated that thetemperature will drop below 32°F (0°C),check antifreeze to assure proper winterprotection. For additional information, see“Engine cooling system” in the “8. Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section.

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged duringextremely cold weather conditions, thebattery fluid may freeze and damage thebattery. To maintain maximum efficiency,the battery should be checked regularly.For additional information, see “Battery”in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside withoutantifreeze, drain the cooling system byopening the drain plug located under theradiator. Refill before operating the ve-hicle. See “Engine cooling system” in the

“8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-tion for changing engine coolant.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires are of a tread design toprovide superior performance on drypavement. However, the performanceof these tires will be substantially re-duced in snowy and icy conditions. Ifyou operate your vehicle on snowy oricy roads, INFINITI recommends theuse of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASONtires on all four wheels. Please consultan INFINITI dealer for the tire type,size, speed rating and availability in-formation.

2. For additional traction on icy roads,studded tires may be used. However,some provinces and states prohibittheir use. Check local, state and pro-vincial laws before installing studdedtires.

Skid and traction capabilities ofstudded snow tires, on wet or dry sur-faces, may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

3. Tire chains may be used. For details,see “Tire chains” in the “8. Mainte-

nance and do-it-yourself” section ofthis manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following itemsbe carried in the vehicle during winter:

O a scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re-move ice and snow from the windowsand wiper blades.

O a sturdy, flat board to be placed underthe jack to give it firm support.

O a shovel to dig the vehicle out ofsnow-drifts.

O extra window washer fluid to refill thereservoir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

O Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),very cold snow or ice can be slick andvery hard to drive on. The vehicle willhave much less traction or “grip” underthese conditions. Try to avoid driving onwet ice until the road is salted or

COLD WEATHER DRIVING


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

sanded.

O Whatever the condition, drive with cau-tion. Accelerate and slow down withcare. If accelerating or downshifting toofast, the drive wheels will lose evenmore traction.

O Allow more stopping distance underthese conditions. Braking should bestarted sooner than on dry pavement.

O Allow greater following distances onslippery roads.

O Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).These may appear on an otherwise clearroad in shaded areas. If a patch of ice isseen ahead, brake before reaching it. Trynot to brake while on the ice, and avoidany sudden steering maneuvers.

O Do not use cruise control on slipperyroads.

O Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gasesunder your vehicle. Keep snow clear ofthe exhaust pipe and from around yourvehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if soequipped)

Engine block heaters are availablethrough INFINITI dealers to assist in coldtemperature starting. The engine blockheater should be used when the outsidetemperature is 20°F (−7°C) or lower.

To use the engine block heater:

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engineblock heater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord intoa grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged exten-sion cord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a GroundFault Interrupt (GFI) protected,grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must beplugged in for at least 2 - 4 hours, de-pending on outside temperatures, toproperly warm the engine coolant. Usean appropriate timer to turn the en-gine block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug andproperly store the cord to keep it awayfrom moving parts.

WARNING

O Do not use your engine block heater withan ungrounded electrical system or a2-pronged adapter. You can be seriouslyinjured by an electrical shock if you usean ungrounded connection.

O Disconnect and properly store the en-gine block heater cord before startingthe engine. Damage to the cord could re-sult in an electrical shock and can causeserious injury.

O Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ex-tension cord rated for at least 10A. Plugthe extension cord into a Ground FaultInterrupt (GFI) protected, grounded110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the properextension cord or a grounded outlet canresult in a fire or electrical shock andcause serious personal injury.


w 06.10.12/V35-D/V5.0 X

MEMO


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

6 In case of emergency

Roadside assistance program........................... 6-2Flat tire ............................................................ 6-2

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) .... 6-2Changing a flat tire ..................................... 6-3

Jump starting.................................................... 6-7Push starting.................................................... 6-9

If your vehicle overheats................................. 6-10Towing your vehicle......................................... 6-11

Towing recommended by INFINITI ............... 6-11Vehicle recovery (Freeing a stuckvehicle)...................................................... 6-13

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Every new INFINITI comes with a 4 year,unlimited mileage Roadside Assistanceplan. In the event of a roadsideemergency, Roadside Assistance Serviceis available to you. Please refer to yourWarranty Booklet (U.S.) or Warranty &Roadside assistance information booklet(Canada) for details. Both the WarrantyBooklet and Roadside Assistance CallingCard in your Owner’s Literature Portfolioprovide the Toll-Free Number to call forassistance. Roadside Assistance isprovided 24 hours a day, 365 days a year,for 4 years from the date sold to giveemergency roadside help, in the event ofmechanical or nonmechanical trouble(s)such as flat tires, out-of-gas, dead battery,lost keys, mechanical breakdown,accident, etc.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the tire pres-sure monitoring system (TPMS). It monitorstire pressure of all tires except the spare.When the low tire pressure warning light islit, one or more of your tires is significantlyunder-inflated. If the vehicle is being drivenwith low tire pressure, the TPMS will acti-vate and warn you of it by the low tire pres-sure warning light. This system will acti-vate only when the vehicle is driven atspeeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). For moredetails, refer to “Warning/indicator lightsand audible reminders” in the “2. Instru-ments and controls” section and “Tire pres-sure monitoring system (TPMS)” in the “5.Starting and driving” section.

WARNING

O If the low tire pressure warning light illu-minates while driving, avoid suddensteering maneuvers or abrupt braking,reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road toa safe location and stop the vehicle assoon as possible. Serious vehicle

damage could occur and may lead to anaccident and could result in serious per-sonal injury. Check the tire pressure forall four tires. Adjust the tire pressure tothe recommended COLD tire pressureshown on the Tire and Loading Informa-tion label to turn the low tire pressurewarning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,replace it with a spare tire as soon as pos-sible.

O When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, tire pressure will not be indi-cated, the TPMS will not function and thelow tire pressure warning light will flashfor approximately 1 minute and remain onafter the 1 minute. Contact your INFINITIdealer as soon as possible for tire re-placement and/or system resetting.


O Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tiresealant into the tires, as this may cause amalfunction of the tire pressure sensors.

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE PROGRAM FLAT TIRE

6-2 In case of emergency

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

CHANGING A FLAT TIREIf you have a flat tire, follow the instruc-tions below.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the roadaway from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply theparking brake. Shift the manual trans-mission into the R (Reverse) position(automatic transmission into the P(Park)).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic,and to signal professional road assis-tance personnel that you need assis-tance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the ve-hicle and stand in a safe place, awayfrom traffic and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

O Make sure the parking brake is securelyapplied and the manual transmission is

shifted into R (Reverse), or the automatictransmission into P (Park).

O Never change tires when the vehicle ison a slope, ice or slippery areas. This ishazardous.

O Never change tires if oncoming traffic isclose to your vehicle. Wait for profes-sional road assistance.

O When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel isreplaced, the TPMS will not function and thelow tire pressure warning light will flash.Contact your INFINITI dealer as soon as pos-sible for tire replacement and/or system re-setting.

Blocking wheels

Place suitable blocks q1 at both the frontand back of the wheel diagonally oppo-site the flat tire to prevent the vehiclefrom moving when it is jacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehiclemay move and result in personal injury.

MCE0001A

In case of emergency 6-3

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Getting the spare tire and tools

Remove jacking tools and spare tire fromthe storage area located inside the trunkas illustrated.

1. Jacking tools — Loosen the jack to re-move.

2. Spare tire — Turn the retainer counter-clockwise to remove.

If spacers are equipped, remove them be-fore removing the spare tire.

Jacking up the vehicle andremoving the damaged tire

WARNING

O Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by the jack. If it is neces-sary to work under the vehicle, support itwith safety stands.

O Use only the jack provided with your ve-hicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use thejack provided with your vehicle on othervehicles. The jack is designed for liftingonly your vehicle during a tire change.

O Use the correct jack-up points. Neveruse any other part of the vehicle for jacksupport.

O Never jack up the vehicle more than nec-essary.

O Never use blocks on or under the jack.

O Do not start or run the engine while ve-hicle is on the jack as it may cause thevehicle to move. This is especially truefor vehicles with limited slip differen-

tials.

O Do not allow passengers to stay in thevehicle while it is on the jack.

Carefully read the caution label attachedto the jack body and the following instruc-tions.

SCE0424B


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Place the jack directly under thejack-up point as illustrated so the topof the jack contacts the vehicle at thejack-up point. Align the jack head be-tween the two notches in the front orthe rear as shown. Also fit the grooveof the jack head between the notchesas shown.

The jack should be used on level firmground.

2. Loosen each wheel nut one or twoturns by turning counterclockwise withthe wheel nut wrench. Do not removethe wheel nuts until the tire is off theground.

3. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tireclears the ground. To lift the vehicle,securely hold the jack lever and rodwith both hands as shown above. Re-move the wheel nuts, and then re-move the tire.

SCE0647Jack-up point

SCE0504


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed emergency use.See specific instructions under theheading “Wheels and tires” in the “8.Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surfacebetween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the wheel on and tightenthe wheel nuts finger tight.

When replacing a front tire, make surethe hole in the spare tire wheel isaligned with the pin on the brakerotor.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tightenwheel nuts alternately and evenly inthe sequence illustrated (q1 , q2 , q3 ,q4 , q5 ) until they are tight.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tiretouches the ground. Then, with thewheel nut wrench, tighten the wheelnuts securely in the sequence illus-trated. Lower the vehicle completely.

WARNING

O Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tight-ened wheel nuts can cause the wheel tobecome loose or come off. This couldcause an accident.

O Do not use oil or grease on the wheelstuds or nuts. This could cause the nutsto become loose.

O Retighten the wheel nuts after the ve-hicle has been driven for 600 miles(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,etc.).

As soon as possible tighten the wheel nutsto the specified torque with a torquewrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

80 ft-lb (108 Nzm)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened tospecification at all times. It is recom-mended that wheel nuts be tightened tospecification at each lubrication interval.

Adjust the tire pressure to the COLD pres-sure.

COLD pressure:

After the vehicle has been parked for threehours or more or driven less than 1 mile(1.6 km) at moderate speeds.

COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tireand Loading Information label affixed tothe driver side center pillar.

SCE0039


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

5. Securely store the flat tire and jackingequipment in the vehicle.

6. Place the spare tire cover and thetrunk floor carpeting over the dam-aged tire.

7. Close the trunk.

WARNING

O Always make sure that the spare tire andjacking equipment are properly securedafter use. Such items can become dan-

gerous projectiles in an accident orsudden stop.

O The spare tire is designed for emergencyuse. See “Wheels and tires” in the “8.Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-tion.

If needed, Roadside Assistance is avail-able. Please see your Warranty InformationBooklet or Roadside Assistance I.D. Cardfor the toll-free number to call (U.S.) or War-ranty Information Booklet (Canada).

To start your engine with a booster bat-tery, the instructions and precautionsbelow must be followed.

WARNING

O If done incorrectly, jump starting canlead to a battery explosion, resulting insevere injury or death. It could also dam-age your vehicle.

O Explosive hydrogen gas is alwayspresent in the vicinity of the battery.Keep all sparks and flames away fromthe battery.

O Do not allow battery fluid to come intocontact with eyes, skin, clothing orpainted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corro-sive sulfuric acid solution which cancause severe burns. If the fluid shouldcome into contact with anything, imme-diately flush the contacted area withwater.

O Keep battery out of the reach of children.

O The booster battery must be rated at 12volts. Use of an improperly rated battery

SCE0425A

JUMP STARTING


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

can damage your vehicle.

O Whenever working on or near a battery,always wear suitable eye protectors (forexample, goggles or industrial safetyspectacles) and remove rings, metalbands, or any other jewelry. Do not leanover the battery when jump starting.

O Do not attempt to jump start a frozenbattery. It could explode and cause se-rious injury.

If needed Roadside Assistance is available.Please see your Warranty InformationBooklet or Roadside Assistance I.D. Cardfor the toll-free number to call (U.S.) or War-ranty Information Booklet (Canada).

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below. Failureto do so could result in damage to the charg-ing system and cause personal injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another ve-hicle qB , position the two vehicles qA

and qB to bring their batteries intoclose proximity to each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply parking brake. Move the shiftlever to the N (Neutral) position (Onautomatic transmission models, movethe selector lever to the P (Park) posi-tion). Switch off all unnecessary elec-trical systems (light, heater, air condi-tioner, etc.).

3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if soequipped). Cover the battery with anold cloth to reduce explosion hazard.

4. Connect jumper cables in the se-quence as illustrated.

SCE0539A


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

CAUTION

O Always connect positive (+) to positive(+) and negative (−) to body ground, notto the battery.

O Make sure jumper cables do not touchmoving parts in the engine compartmentand that the cable clamps do not contactany other metal.

5. Start the engine of the other vehicleqB and let it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the other ve-hicle qB at about 2,000 rpm, and startyour engine in the normal manner.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged formore than 10 seconds. If the engine does notstart right away, turn the key off and wait 3to 4 seconds before trying again.

7. After starting your engine, carefullydisconnect the negative cable andthen the positive cable.

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped).Be sure to dispose of the cloth used tocover the vent holes as it may be con-taminated with corrosive acid.

Do not attempt to start the engine bypushing.

CAUTION

O Automatic transmission models cannotbe push started. Attempting to do somay cause transmission damage.

O Three-way catalyst equipped modelshould not be started by pushing. At-tempting to do so may cause damage tothe three-way catalyst.

If needed Roadside Assistance is avail-able. Please see your Warranty Informa-tion Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D.Card for the toll-free number to call (U.S.)or Warranty Information Booklet (Canada).

PUSH STARTING


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

O Do not continue to drive if your vehicleoverheats. Doing so could cause enginedamage or a vehicle fire.

O To avoid the danger of being scalded,never remove the radiator cap while theengine is still hot. When the radiator capis removed, pressurized hot water willspurt out, possibly causing serious in-jury.

O Do not open the hood if steam is comingout.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicatedby an extremely high temperature gaugereading), or if you feel a lack of enginepower, detect abnormal noise, etc., takethe following steps:

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road,apply the parking brake and move theshift lever to the N (Neutral) position(automatic transmission to the P(Park) position).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open allthe windows, and move the tempera-ture control to maximum hot and thefan control to high speed.

3. If engine overheating is caused byclimbing a long hill on a hot day, runthe engine at a fast idle (approximately1,500 rpm) until the temperature gaugeindication returns to normal.

4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listenfor steam or coolant escaping from theradiator before opening the hood. (Ifsteam or coolant is escaping, turn offthe engine.) Do not open the hood fur-ther until no steam or coolant can beseen.

5. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the engine,stand clear to prevent getting burned.

6. Visually check if the cooling fan is run-ning. The radiator hoses and radiatorshould not leak water. If coolant isleaking or the cooling fan does notrun, stop the engine.

WARNING

O Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,jewelry or clothing to come into contactwith, or to get caught in, the enginebelts or the engine cooling fan.

O The engine cooling fan can start at anytime when the coolant temperature ishigh.

7. After the engine cools down, checkthe coolant level in the reservoir tankwith the engine running. Add coolantto the reservoir tank if necessary.Have your vehicle repaired at anINFINITI dealer.

If needed, Roadside Assistance is avail-able. Please see your Warranty InformationBooklet or Roadside Assistance I.D. Cardfor the toll-free number to call (U.S.) or War-ranty Information Booklet (Canada).

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

When towing your vehicle, all State (Pro-vincial in Canada) and local regulationsfor towing must be followed. Incorrecttowing equipment could damage your ve-hicle. Towing instructions are availablefrom an INFINITI dealer. Local service op-erators are generally familiar with the ap-plicable laws and procedures for towing.To assure proper towing and to preventaccidental damage to your vehicle,INFINITI recommends having a service op-erator tow your vehicle. It is advisable tohave the service operator carefully readthe following precautions.

WARNING

O Never ride in a vehicle that is beingtowed.

O Never get under your vehicle after it hasbeen lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

O When towing, make sure that the trans-mission, axles, steering system and

powertrain are in working condition. Ifany unit is damaged, dollies must beused.

O Always attach safety chains beforetowing.

For information about towing your vehiclebehind a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to“Flat towing” in the “9. Technical andconsumer information” section of thismanual.

If needed, Roadside Assistance is avail-able. Please see your Warranty Informa-tion Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D.Card for the toll-free number to call (U.S.)or Warranty Information Booklet (Canada).

TOWING RECOMMENDED BYINFINITIINFINITI recommends that your vehicle betowed with the driving (rear) wheels offthe ground or place the vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated.

SCE0648

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

CAUTION

O Never tow automatic transmissionmodels with the rear wheels on the

ground or four wheels on the ground(forward or backward) as this may causeserious and expensive damage to thetransmission. If it is necessary to towthe vehicle with the front wheels raised,always use towing dollies under the rearwheels.

O When towing rear wheel drive modelswith the front wheels on the ground oron towing dollies:

Turn the ignition key to the OFF position,and secure the steering wheel in astraight ahead position with a rope orsimilar device. Never secure the steeringwheel by turning the ignition key to theLOCK position. This may damage thesteering lock mechanism.

O If you have to tow manual transmissionmodels with the rear wheels on theground or four wheels on the ground (ifyou do not use towing dollies):

O Always release the parking brake.

O Move the transmission shift lever tothe N (Neutral) position.

O Observe the following restricted towingspeeds and distances for manual trans-mission models only:

— Speed: Below 60 MPH (95 km/h)

— Distance: Less than 500 miles (800km)

If the speed or distance must necessarilybe greater, remove the propeller shaft be-fore towing to prevent damage to thetransmission.

SCE0649Automatic transmission (AT) models


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

VEHICLE RECOVERY (Freeing astuck vehicle)

After removing the front license plate (orthe bumper cover), securely install the re-covery hook q1 . (Located with jackingtools.)

Reinstall the license plate on the lower fit-ting point.

WARNING

O Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

O Do not spin your tires at high speed. Thiscould cause them to explode and resultin serious injury. Parts of your vehiclecould also overheat and be damaged.

CAUTION

O Tow chains or cables must be attachedonly to the vehicle recovery hooks ormain structural members of the vehicle.Otherwise, the vehicle body will be dam-aged.

O Do not use the vehicle tie downs to free avehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.Never tow a vehicle using the vehicle tiedowns or recovery hooks.

O Always pull the cable straight out fromthe front of the vehicle. Never pull thevehicle at an angle.

O Pulling devices should be routed so theydo not touch any part of the suspension,steering, brake or cooling systems.

O Pulling devices such as ropes or canvasstraps are not recommended for use invehicle towing or recovery.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow,mud, etc., use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) system.

2. Make sure the area in front and be-hind the vehicle is clear of obstruc-tions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and leftto clear an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward andbackward.

O Shift back and forth between R (re-verse) and D (drive) (automatic trans-mission models) or 1st (low) and R (re-verse) (manual transmission models).

O Apply the accelerator as little as pos-sible to maintain the rocking motion.

SCE0524


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

O Release the accelerator pedal beforeshifting between R and D (automatictransmission models) or 1st and R(manual transmission models).

O Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH (55km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after afew tries, contact a professionaltowing service to remove the vehicle.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior .............................................. 7-2Washing ...................................................... 7-2Waxing ........................................................ 7-2Removing spots........................................... 7-3Underbody................................................... 7-3Glass........................................................... 7-3Aluminum alloy wheels................................ 7-3Chrome parts .............................................. 7-3Tire dressing .............................................. 7-3

Cleaning interior............................................... 7-4Floor mats ................................................... 7-4Seat belts.................................................... 7-5

Corrosion protection ......................................... 7-5Most common factors contributing tovehicle corrosion ......................................... 7-5Environmental factors influence the rate ofcorrosion ..................................................... 7-5To protect your vehicle from corrosion ........ 7-6

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

CAUTION

Do not use car washes that use acid in the de-tergent. Some car washes, especially brush-less ones, use some acid for cleaning. The acidmay react with some plastic vehicle compo-nents, causing them to crack. This could affecttheir appearance, and also could cause themnot to function properly. Aways check withyour car wash to confirm that acid is not used.

In order to maintain the appearance of yourvehicle, it is important to care for it properly.To protect the paint surfaces, pleasewash your vehicle as soon as you can.O After a rainfall to prevent possible

damage from acid rain.O After driving in coastal areas to pre-

vent possible damage from sea salt.O When foreign objects, such as soot, bird

droppings, tree sap, metal particles, orinsects get on the paint surfaces.

O When dust or mud builds up on thepaint surfaces.

Whenever possible, store or park your ve-hicle inside garage or in covered area.When it is necessary to park outside, parkin a shady area or protect the vehicle witha body cover.Be careful not to scratch the paint surfacewhen putting on or removing the body cover.

WASHINGWash dirt off the vehicle with a wetsponge and plenty of water. Clean the ve-hicle thoroughly using a mild soap, spe-cial vehicle soap or general purpose dish-washing liquid mixed with clean, luke-warm (never hot) water.

CAUTION

O Do not use car washes that use acid in thedetergent. Some car washes, especiallybrushless ones, use some acid forcleaning. The acid may react with someplastic vehicle components, causing themto crack. This could affect their appearanceand also could cause them not to functionproperly. Always check with your car washto confirm that acid is not used.

O Do not use strong household soap, strongchemical detergents, gasoline or solvents.

O Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-light or while the vehicle body is hot, asthe surface may become water-spotted.

O Avoid using tight-napped or roughcloths, such as washing mitts. Care mustbe taken when removing caked-on dirt orother foreign substances so the paintsurface is not scratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle again with plenty ofclean water.Inside flanges, seams and folds on thedoors, hatches and hood are particularlyvulnerable to the effects of road salt. There-fore, these areas must be regularly cleaned.Make sure that the drain holes in the loweredge of the door are open. Spray water un-der the body and in the wheel wells toloosen the dirt and wash away road salt.Avoid leaving water spots on the paintsurface by using a damp chamois to drythe vehicle.

WAXINGRegular waxing protects the paint surfaceand helps retain new vehicle appearance.Polishing is recommended to remove built-up wax residue and to avoid a weatheredappearance before re-applying wax.An INFINITI dealer can assist you inchoosing the proper product.O Wax your vehicle only after a thorough

washing. Follow the instructions sup-plied with the wax.

O Do not use a wax containing any abra-sives, cutting compounds or cleanersthat may damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive pol-ishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finishmay dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

w 06.10.12/V35-D/V5.0 X

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,insects, and tree sap as quickly as pos-sible from the surface of the paint toavoid lasting damage or staining. Specialcleaning products are available at anINFINITI dealer or any automotive acces-sory store.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter,the underbody must be cleaned regularly.This will prevent dirt and salt frombuilding up and causing underbody andsuspension corrosion. Before the winterperiod and again in the spring, the under-seal must be checked and, if necessary,re-treated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke anddust film from the glass surfaces. It isnormal for glass to become coated with afilm after the vehicle is parked in the hotsun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth willeasily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows, donot use sharp-edged tools, abrasivecleaners or chlorine-based disinfectantcleaners. They could damage the electricalconductors, radio antenna elements or rearwindow defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash the wheels regularly with a spongedampened in a mild soap solution, espe-cially during winter months in areaswhere road salt is used. Salt could dis-color the wheel if not removed.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoid stainingor discoloring the wheels:

O Do not use a cleaner that uses strongacid or alkali contents to clean thewheels.

O Do not apply wheel cleaners to the

wheels when they are hot. The wheeltemperature should be the same as am-bient temperature.

O Rinse the wheel to completely removethe cleaner within 15 minutes after thecleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS

Clean all chrome parts regularly with anon-abrasive chrome polish to maintainthe finish.

TIRE DRESSING

INFINITI does not recommend the use oftire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply acoating to the tires to help reduce discol-oration of the rubber. If a tire dressing isapplied to the tires, it may react with thecoating and form a compound. This com-pound may come off the tire while drivingand stain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, takethe following precautions:

O Use a water-based tire dressing. Thecoating on the tire dissolves moreeasily with an oil-based tire dressing.

Appearance and care 7-3

w 06.7.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

O Apply a light coat of tire dressing tohelp prevent it from entering the tiretread/grooves (where it would be diffi-cult to remove).

O Wipe off excess tire dressing using adry towel. Make sure the tire dressingis completely removed from the tiretread/grooves.

O Allow the tire dressing to dry as rec-ommended by tire dressing manufac-turer.

Occasionally remove loose dust from theinterior trim, plastic parts and seats usinga vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush.Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with aclean, soft cloth dampened in mild soapsolution, then wipe clean with a dry softcloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required inorder to maintain the appearance of theleather.

Before using any fabric protector, readthe manufacturer’s recommendations.Some fabric protectors contain chemicalsthat may stain or bleach the seat mate-rial.

Use a cloth dampened only with water, toclean the meter and gauge lens.

CAUTION

O Never use gasoline, thinner, or any simi-lar material.

O Small dirt particles can be abrasive anddamaging to leather surfaces andshould be removed promptly. Do not usesaddle soap, car waxes, polishes, oils,cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents orammonia-based cleaners as they maydamage the leather natural finish.

O Never use fabric protectors unless rec-ommended by the manufacturer.

O Do not use glass or plastic cleaner onmeter or gauge lens covers. It maydamage the lens cover.

FLOOR MATS

The use of genuine INFINITI floor mats canextend the life of your vehicle carpet andmake it easier to clean the interior. Nomatter what mats are used, be sure theyare fitted for your vehicle and are properlypositioned in the footwell to prevent inter-ference with pedal operation. Mats shouldbe maintained with regular cleaning andreplaced if they become excessively worn.

CLEANING INTERIOR


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Floor mat positioning aid(driver’s side only)

This model includes a front floor matbracket qA to act as a floor mat posi-tioning aid. INFINITI floor mats have beenspecially designed for your vehicle model.The driver’s side floor mat has a grommethole incorporated in it. Simply positionthe mat by placing the floor mat bracketthrough the floor mat grommet hole whilecentering the mat in the floorpan contour.

Periodically check to make certain thatthe mats are properly positioned.

SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wipingthem with a sponge dampened in a mildsoap solution. Allow the belts to dry com-pletely before using them. See “Seat beltmaintenance” in the “1. Safety — Seats,seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-tem” section.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in theretractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, orchemical solvents to clean the seat belts,since these materials may severely weakenthe seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORSCONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLECORROSION

O The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt and debris in body panelsections, cavities, and other areas.

O Damage to paint and other protectivecoatings caused by gravel and stonechips or minor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORSINFLUENCE THE RATE OFCORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water onthe vehicle body underside can acceleratecorrosion. Wet floor coverings will not drycompletely inside the vehicle, and shouldbe removed for drying to avoid floor panelcorrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas ofhigh relative humidity, especially thoseareas where the temperatures stay abovefreezing and where atmospheric pollutionexists and road salt is used.

SAI0012A

CORROSION PROTECTION

Appearance and care 7-5

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Temperature

A temperature increase will accelerate therate of corrosion to those parts which arenot well ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of saltin the air in coastal areas, or heavy roadsalt use will accelerate the corrosion pro-cess. Road salt will also accelerate thedisintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROMCORROSION

O Wash and wax your vehicle often tokeep it clean.

O Always check for minor damage to thepaint and repair it as soon as pos-sible.

O Keep drain holes at the bottom of thedoors open to avoid water accumula-tion.

O Check the underbody for accumulationof sand, dirt or salt. If present, washwith water as soon as possible.

CAUTION

O Never remove dirt, sand or other debrisfrom the passenger compartment bywashing it out with a hose. Remove dirtwith a vacuum cleaner or broom.

O Never allow water or other liquids tocome in contact with electronic compo-nents inside the vehicle as this maydamage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icingare extremely corrosive. They acceleratecorrosion and deterioration of underbodycomponents such as the exhaust system,fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floorpan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleanedperiodically.

For additional protection against rust andcorrosion, which may be required in someareas, consult an INFINITI dealer.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements ............................... 8-2General maintenance........................................ 8-2

Explanation of general maintenanceitems .......................................................... 8-3

Maintenance precautions.................................. 8-5Engine compartment check locations................ 8-7Engine cooling system ..................................... 8-8

Checking engine coolant level..................... 8-8Changing engine coolant............................. 8-9

Engine oil ....................................................... 8-10Checking engine oil level........................... 8-10Changing engine oil and filter ................... 8-11

Automatic transmission fluid........................... 8-13Power steering fluid ........................................ 8-13Brake and clutch fluid..................................... 8-14

Brake fluid................................................. 8-14Clutch fluid ............................................... 8-15

Window washer fluid....................................... 8-15Battery............................................................ 8-16

Jump starting............................................. 8-18Drive belts ...................................................... 8-19Spark plugs .................................................... 8-19

Replacing spark plugs............................... 8-20

Air cleaner...................................................... 8-20Windshield wiper blades................................. 8-21

Cleaning .................................................... 8-21Replacing .................................................. 8-22

Brakes............................................................ 8-23Self-adjusting brakes ................................ 8-23Brake pad wear indicators......................... 8-23

Fuses.............................................................. 8-23Engine compartment ................................. 8-24Passenger compartment ............................ 8-25

Keyfob battery replacement............................ 8-26Keyfob (except Intelligent Key) .................. 8-26Intelligent Key ........................................... 8-27

Lights ............................................................. 8-29Headlights ................................................ 8-30Exterior and interior lights ........................ 8-30

Wheels and tires ............................................ 8-32Tire pressure ............................................. 8-32Tire labeling.............................................. 8-36Types of tires ............................................ 8-38Tire chains ................................................ 8-39Changing wheels and tires........................ 8-39

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Your new INFINITI has been designed tohave minimum maintenance requirementswith longer service intervals to save youboth time and money. However, some day-to-day and regular maintenance is essen-tial to maintain your INFINITI’s fine me-chanical condition, as well as its emissionand engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to makesure that the specified maintenance aswell as the general maintenance are per-formed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the onlyone who can ensure that your vehicle re-ceives the proper maintenance care. Youare a vital link in the maintenance chain.

Scheduled maintenance:

For your convenience, both required andoptional scheduled maintenance itemsare described and listed in your “INFINITIService and Maintenance Guide”. Youmust refer to that guide to ensure thatnecessary maintenance is performed onyour INFINITI at regular intervals.

General maintenance:

General maintenance includes thoseitems which should be checked duringnormal day-to-day operation. They are es-

sential for proper vehicle operation. It isyour responsibility to perform these main-tenance procedures regularly as pre-scribed.

Performing general maintenance checksrequires minimal mechanical skill andonly a few general automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be doneby you, a qualified technician, or, if youprefer, an INFINITI dealer.

Where to go for service:

If maintenance service is required or yourvehicle appears to malfunction, have thesystems checked and serviced by anINFINITI dealer.

INFINITI technicians are well-trained spe-cialists and are kept up to date with thelatest service information through tech-nical bulletins, service tips, and in-dealership information systems. They arecompletely qualified to work on INFINITIvehicles before work begins.

You can be confident that an INFINITIdealer’s service department performs thebest job to meet the maintenancerequirements on your vehicle — in areliable and economic way.

During the normal day-to-day operation ofthe vehicle, general maintenance shouldbe performed regularly as prescribed inthis section. If you detect any unusualsounds, vibrations or smell, be sure tocheck for the cause or have an INFINITIdealer perform it promptly. In addition,you should notify an INFINITI dealer if youthink the repairs are required.

When performing any checks or mainte-nance work, closely observe the “Mainte-nance precautions” later in this section.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

EXPLANATION OF GENERALMAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the followingitems with “*” is found later in this sec-tion.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here shouldbe performed from time to time, unlessotherwise specified.

Doors and engine hood: Check that alldoors and the engine hood operate prop-erly. Also ensure that all latches lock se-curely. Lubricate hinges and latches ifnecessary. Make sure that the secondarylatch keeps the hood from opening whenthe primary latch is released.

When driving in areas using road salt orother corrosive materials, check lubrica-tion frequently.

Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regularbasis. Make sure that the headlights,stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights,and other lights are all operating properlyand installed securely. Also check head-light aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts): Whenchecking the tires, make sure no wheel

nuts are missing, and check for any loosewheel nuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tires*: Check the pressure with a gaugeoften and always prior to long distancetrips. If necessary, adjust the pressure inall tires, including the spare, to the speci-fied pressure. Check carefully for damage,cuts or excessive wear.

Tire rotation*:The tires cannot be rotated for this ve-hicle.

Tire, wheel alignment and balance: If thevehicle should pull to either side whiledriving on a straight and level road, or ifyou detect uneven or abnormal tire wear,there may be a need for wheel alignment.

If the steering wheel or seat vibrates atnormal highway speeds, wheel balancingmay be needed.

O For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire SafetyInformation” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-formation Booklet.

Windshield: Clean the windshield on aregular basis. Check the windshield atleast every six months for cracks or otherdamage. Have a damaged windshield re-

paired by a qualified repair facility.

Windshield wiper blades*: Check forcracks or wear if they do not wipe prop-erly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here shouldbe checked on a regular basis, such aswhen performing periodic maintenance,cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal forsmooth operation and make sure thepedal does not catch or require uneveneffort. Keep the floor mat away from thepedal.

Automatic transmission P (Park) mecha-nism: On a fairly steep hill check that yourvehicle is held securely with the selectorlever in the P (Park) position without ap-plying any brakes.

Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smoothoperation. If the brake pedal suddenlygoes down further than normal, the pedalfeels spongy or the vehicle seems to takelonger to stop, see an INFINITI dealer im-mediately. Keep the floor mat away fromthe pedal.

Brakes*: Check that the brakes do not

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

pull the vehicle to one side when applied.

Parking brake: Check the parking brakeoperation regularly. The vehicle should besecurely held on a fairly steep hill withonly the parking brake applied. If theparking brake needs to be adjusted, seean INFINITI dealer.

Seats: Check seat position controls suchas seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc.to ensure they operate smoothly and thatall latches lock securely in every position.Check that the head restraints move upand down smoothly and that the locks (ifso equipped) hold securely in all latchedpositions.

Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seatbelt system (For example, buckles, an-chors, adjusters and retractors) operateproperly and smoothly, and are installedsecurely. Check the belt webbing for cuts,fraying, wear or damage.

Steering wheel: Check for changes in thesteering conditions, such as excessivefree play, hard steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes: Make surethat all warning lights and chimes are op-erating properly.

Windshield defroster: Check that the air

comes out of the defroster outlets prop-erly and in sufficient quantity when oper-ating the heater or air conditioner.

Windshield wiper and washer*: Check thatthe wipers and washer operate properlyand that the wipers do not streak.

Under the hood and the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here shouldbe checked periodically (For example,each time you check the engine oil or re-fuel).

Battery*: Check the fluid level in eachcell. It should be between the MAX andMIN lines. Vehicles operated in high tem-peratures or under severe conditions re-quire frequent checks of the battery fluidlevel.

Brake and clutch fluid level*: Make surethat the brake and clutch fluid levels arebetween the MAX and MIN lines on thereservoir.

Engine coolant level*: Check the coolantlevel when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts*: Make sure that nobelt is frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level*: Check the level afterparking the vehicle on a level location

and turning off the engine. (Wait at least10 minutes for the oil to drain back intothe oil pan.)

Exhaust system: Make sure there are noloose supports, cracks or holes. If thesound of the exhaust seems unusual orthere is a smell of exhaust fumes, imme-diately locate the trouble and correct it.See “Precautions when starting anddriving” in the “5. Starting and driving”section for exhaust gas (Carbon monox-ide).

Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle forfuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks afterthe vehicle has been parked for a while.Water dripping from the air conditionerafter use is normal. If you should noticeany leaks or if gasoline fumes are evi-dent, check for the cause and have it cor-rected immediately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines:Check the level when the fluid is cold andthe engine is turned off. Check the linesfor proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses: Check the front of theradiator and clean off any dirt, insects,leaves, etc., that may have accumulated.Make sure the hoses have no cracks, de-


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

formation, deterioration or loose connec-tions.

Underbody: The underbody is frequentlyexposed to corrosive substances such asthose used on icy roads or to controldust. It is very important to remove thesesubstances, otherwise rust will form onthe floor pan, frame, fuel lines andaround the exhaust system. At the end ofwinter, the underbody should be thor-oughly flushed with plain water, beingcareful to clean those areas where mudand dirt may accumulate. For additionalinformation, see “Cleaning exterior” inthe “7. Appearance and care” section.

Windshield washer fluid*: Check thatthere is adequate fluid in the tank.

When performing any inspection or main-tenance work on your vehicle, always takecare to prevent serious accidental injuryto yourself or damage to the vehicle. Thefollowing are general precautions whichshould be closely observed.

WARNING

O Park the vehicle on a level surface, applythe parking brake securely and block thewheels to prevent the vehicle frommoving. For manual transmissionmodels, move the shift lever to N (Neu-tral) position. For automatic transmis-sion models, move the selector lever to P(Park).

O Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF orLOCK position when performing anyparts replacement or repairs.

O If you must work with the engine run-ning, keep your hands, clothing, hairand tools away from moving fans, beltsand any other moving parts.

O It is advisable to secure or remove anyloose clothing and remove any jewelry,

such as rings, watches, etc. beforeworking on your vehicle.

O Always wear eye protection wheneveryou work on your vehicle.

O If you must run the engine in an enclosedspace such as a garage, be sure there isproper ventilation for exhaust gases toescape.

O Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by a jack. If it is neces-sary to work under the vehicle, support itwith safety stands.

O Keep smoking materials, flame andsparks away from the fuel tank and bat-tery.

O On gasoline engine models with theMultiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System,the fuel filter or fuel lines should be ser-viced by an INFINITI dealer because thefuel lines are under high pressure evenwhen the engine is off.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

CAUTION

O Do not work under the hood while theengine is hot. Turn the engine off andwait until it cools down.

O Never connect or disconnect the batteryor any transistorized component whilethe ignition switch is in the ON position.

O Never leave the engine or automatictransmission related component har-ness connector disconnected while theignition switch is in the ON position.

O Avoid contact with used engine oil andcoolant. Improperly disposed engine oil,engine coolant and/or other vehiclefluids can damage the environment. Al-ways conform to local regulations fordisposal of vehicle fluid.

This “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section gives instructions regarding onlythose items which are relatively easy foran owner to perform.

A genuine INFINITI Service Manual is alsoavailable. See “Owner’s Manual/ServiceManual order information” in the “9.Technical and consumer information” sec-tion.

You should be aware that incomplete orimproper servicing may result in oper-ating difficulties or excessive emissions,and could affect your warranty coverage.If in doubt about any servicing, have itdone by an INFINITI dealer.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Fuse/fusible link holder

2. Battery

3. Engine oil filler cap

4. Brake fluid reservoir

5. Clutch fluid reservoir (MT models)

6. Power steering fluid reservoir

7. Engine coolant reservoir

8. Window washer fluid reservoir

9. Radiator filler cap

10. Drive belts

11. Engine oil dipstick

12. Air cleaner

SSI0160

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

The engine cooling system is filled at thefactory with a high-quality, year-round,anti-freeze coolant solution. The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corro-sion inhibitors, therefore additionalcooling system additives are not neces-sary.

WARNING

O Never remove the radiator or coolantreservoir cap when the engine is hot.Wait until the engine and radiator cooldown. Serious burns could be caused byhigh pressure fluid escaping from the ra-diator. See precautions in “If your ve-hicle overheats” found in the “6. In caseof emergency” section.

O The radiator is equipped with a pressuretype radiator cap. To prevent enginedamage, use only a genuine NISSAN ra-diator cap.

CAUTION

When adding or replacing coolant, be sure touse only a Genuine Nissan Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant or equivalent with theproper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and50% demineralized water/distilled water.The use of other types of engine coolant maydamage your engine cooling system.

Outside temperaturedown to

Antifreeze

Deminer-alizedwater/

distilledwater°C °F

−35 −30 50% 50%

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoirtank when the engine is cold. If the cool-ant level is below the MIN level q2 , openthe cap and add coolant up to the MAXlevel q1 . If the reservoir tank is empty,check the coolant level in the radiatorwhen the engine is cold. If there is insuffi-cient coolant in the radiator, fill the radia-tor with coolant up to the filler openingand also add it to the reservoir tank up tothe MAX level q1 .

SDI1385B

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

If the cooling system frequently requirescoolant, have it checked by an INFINITIdealer.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

O Major cooling system repairs should beperformed by an INFINITI dealer. Theservice procedures can be found in theappropriate INFINITI Service Manual.

O Improper servicing can result in re-duced heater performance and engineoverheating.

WARNING

O To avoid being scalded, never changethe coolant when the engine is hot.

O Never remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. Serious burns could becaused by high pressure fluid escapingfrom the radiator.

O Avoid direct skin contact with used cool-ant. If skin contact is made, wash thor-oughly with soap or hand cleaner assoon as possible.

O Keep coolant out of reach of childrenand pets.

1. Open radiator drain plug qA at thebottom of radiator, and remove ra-diator filler cap qB .

O Be careful not to allow coolant to con-tact drive belts.

O Waste coolant must be disposed ofproperly. Check your local regulations.

SDI0114B


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

2. Close the radiator drain plug securelyafter the coolant is drained.

3. Fill the radiator slowly with the propermixture of antifreeze solution anddemineralized water/distilled water.Fill the reservoir tank up to the MAXlevel. Then install the radiator fillercap.

4. Start the engine and warm it up untilit reaches normal operating tempera-ture. Then race the engine 2 or 3 timesunder no load. Watch the engine cool-ant temperature gauge for signs ofoverheating.

5. Stop the engine. After it completelycools down, refill the radiator up tothe filler opening. Fill the reservoirtank up to the MAX level. Check thedrain plug for any sign of leakage.

6. Check the coolant level again afterdriving the vehicle.

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface andapply the parking brake.

2. Run the engine until it reaches operat-ing temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10minutes for the oil to drain back intothe oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick qA and wipe itclean. Reinsert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and checkthe oil level. It should be between theH and L marks qB . If the oil level isbelow the L mark qA , remove the oilfiller cap and pour recommended oilthrough the opening. Do not overfillqC .

6. Recheck oil level with dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oilmaintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of op-erating conditions.

SDI1386D SDI1781

ENGINE OIL


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly. Oper-ating the engine with an insufficient amountof oil can damage the engine, and such dam-age is not covered by warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND FILTERChange the engine oil and filter accordingto the maintenance intervals shown in theINFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide.

Vehicle set-up1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Run the engine until it reaches operat-ing temperature.

3. Turn the engine off and wait morethan 10 minutes.

4. Raise and support the vehicle using asuitable floor jack and safety jackstands.

O Place the safety jack stands underthe vehicle jack-up points.

O A suitable adapter should be at-tached to the jack stand saddle.

5. Remove the plastic engine undercover.

a. Remove the small plastic clip at thecenter point of the undercover.

b. Then remove the other bolts thathold the undercover in place.

CAUTION

Make sure the correct lifting and supportpoints are used to avoid vehicle damage.

Engine oil and filter

1. Place a large drain pan under thedrain plug.

2. Remove the oil filler cap.3. Remove the drain plug qA with a

wrench and completely drain the oil.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engineoil is hot.

SDI1520B


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

O Waste oil must be disposed of prop-erly.

O Check your local regulations.

4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filterwrench qB . Remove the oil filter byturning it by hand.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter mountingsurface with a clean rag.

Be sure to remove any old rubbergasket remaining on the mounting sur-face of the engine.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter withclean engine oil.

7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until aslight resistance is felt, then tightenadditionally more than 2/3 turn.

Oil filter tightening torque:11 to 15 ft-lb(14.7 to 20.5 Nzm)

8. Clean and re-install the drain plugwith a new washer. Securely tightenthe drain plug with a wrench.

Drain plug tightening torque:22 to 29 ft-lb(29 to 39 Nzm)

Do not use excessive force.

9. Refill engine with recommended oiland install the cap securely.

CAUTION

The dipstick must be inserted in place toprevent oil spillage from the dipstick holewhile filling the engine with oil.

See “Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants” in the “9. Technicaland consumer information” section fordrain and refill capacity. The drain andrefill capacity depends on the oil tem-perature and drain time. Use thesespecifications for reference only. Al-ways use the dipstick to determine theproper amount of oil in the engine.

CAUTION

When filling oil, do not pull out the dipstick.

10. Start the engine and check forleakage around the drain plug andthe oil filter. Correct as required.

11. Turn the engine off and wait morethan 10 minutes. Check the oil levelwith the dipstick. Add engine oil ifnecessary.

After the operation

1. Install the engine undercover into po-sition as the following steps.

a. Pull the center of the small plasticclip out.

b. Hold the engine undercover intoposition.

c. Insert the clip through the under-cover into the hole in the frame,then push the center of the clip into lock the clip in place.

d. Install the other bolts that hold theundercover in place. Be careful notto strip the bolts or over-tightenthem.

2. Lower the vehicle carefully to theground.

3. Dispose of waste oil and filter prop-erly.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

O Prolonged and repeated contact withused engine oil may cause skin cancer.

O Try to avoid direct skin contact withused oil. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaner assoon as possible.

O Keep used engine oil out of reach ofchildren.

When checking or replacement is re-quired, ask an INFINITI dealer for ser-vicing.

CAUTION

O Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF.Do not mix with other fluids.

O Using automatic transmission fluidother than Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATFwill cause deterioration in driveabilityand automatic transmission durability,and may damage the automatic trans-mission, which is not covered by theINFINITI new vehicle limited warranty.

The specified automatic transmissionfluid is also described on caution labelslocated in the engine compartment.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir.

The fluid level should be checked usingthe HOT range (q1 : HOT MAX., q2 : HOTMIN.) at fluid temperatures of 122 to 176°F(50 to 80°C) or using the COLD range (q3 :COLD MAX., q4 : COLD MIN.) at fluid tem-peratures of 32 to 86°F (0 to 30°C).

SDI1765A

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID POWER STEERING FLUID


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

CAUTION

O Do not overfill.

O Use Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.

For additional brake fluid specification in-formation, refer to “Capacities and recom-mended fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Tech-nical and consumer information” section.

WARNING

Use only new fluid. Old, inferior, or contami-nated fluid may damage the brake system.Do not add synthetic brake fluid. The use ofimproper fluids can damage the brakesystem and affect the vehicle’s stoppingability. Be sure to clean filler cap before re-moving.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid isspilled, immediately wash the surface withwater.

BRAKE FLUID

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. Ifthe fluid is below the MIN line q2 or thebrake warning light comes on, add Genu-ine Nissan Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluidor equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAXline q1 . If fluid must be added frequently,the system should be thoroughly checkedby an INFINITI dealer.

SDI1923

BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID


w 06.10.12/V35-D/V5.0 X

CLUTCH FLUID

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. Ifthe fluid level is below the MIN line q1 ,add Genuine Nissan Super Heavy DutyBrake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up tothe MAX line q2 .

If fluid is added frequently, the systemshould be thoroughly checked by anINFINITI dealer.

WARNING

Use only new fluid from a sealed container.Old, inferior or contaminated fluid may dam-age the clutch system.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on painted surfaces.This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled,wash the surface with water.

Add fluid when the low washer fluidwarning light comes on. Pull up the capand add a washer solvent to the water forbetter cleaning. In the winter season, adda windshield washer antifreeze. Followthe manufacturer’s instructions for themixture ratio.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSANWindshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner &Antifreeze or equivalent.

SDI1906A SDI1388B

WINDOW WASHER FLUID


w 06.7.21/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

Antifreeze is poisonous and should bestored carefully in marked containers out ofthe reach of children.

CAUTION

Do not substitute engine anti-freeze coolantfor window washer solution. This may resultin damage to the paint.

O Do not fill the window washer reservoirtank with washer fluid concentrates atfull strength. Some methyl alcoholbased washer fluid concentrates maypermanently stain the grille if spilledwhile filling the window washer reser-voir tank.

O Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates withwater to the manufacturer’s recom-mended levels before pouring the fluidinto the window washer reservoir tank.

Do not use the window washer reservoirtank to mix the washer fluid concentrateand water.

O Keep the battery surface clean anddry. Any corrosion should be washedoff with a solution of baking soda andwater.

O Make certain the terminal connectionsare clean and securely tightened.

O If the vehicle is not to be used for 30days or longer, disconnect the (−)negative battery terminal cable to pre-vent discharging it.

CAUTION

When the battery cable is removed from thebattery terminal, do not close either of frontdoors. The automatic window adjustingfunction will not work, and the side roofpanel may be damaged.

To disconnect the negative (−) battery ter-minal, perform the procedure in the follow-ing order. Otherwise, the window and theside roof panel may contact and be dam-aged.

1. Close the windows.

2. Open the hood.

3. Close and lock all the doors.

BATTERY


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

4. Disconnect the negative (−) battery ter-minal.

5. Securely close the hood.

To connect the negative (−) battery ter-minal, perform the procedure in the follow-ing order. Otherwise, the window and theside roof panel may contact and be dam-aged.

1. Unlock and open the driver side door.Do not close the door.

2. Open the hood.

3. Connect the negative (−) battery ter-minal. Then close the hood.

4. Fully open the driver side door window.

5. Close the driver side door and thewindow.

WARNING

O Do not expose the battery to flames orelectrical sparks. Hydrogen gas, gener-ated by battery fluid, is explosive. Do notallow battery fluid to contact your skin,eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. Aftertouching a battery or battery cap, do nottouch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly washyour hands. If the acid contacts youreyes, skin or clothing, immediately flushwith water for at least 15 minutes andseek medical attention.

O Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid inthe battery is low. Low battery fluid cancause a higher load on the battery whichcan generate heat, reduce battery life,and in some cases lead to an explosion.

O When working on or near a battery, al-ways wear suitable eye protection andremove all jewelry.

O Battery posts, terminals and related ac-cessories contain lead and lead com-pounds. Wash hands after handling.

O Keep the battery out of the reach of chil-dren.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Check the fluid level in each cell. Itshould be between the UPPER LEVEL q1and LOWER LEVEL q2 lines.

If it is necessary to add fluid, add onlydistilled water to bring the level to the in-dicator in each filler opening. Do not over-fill.

1. Remove the cell plugs qA .

2. Add distilled water up to the UPPERLEVEL q1 .

If the side of the battery is not visible,the electrolyte level can be checkedthrough each filler opening as illus-trated.

3. Tighten cell plugs qA .

Vehicles operated in high temperatures orunder severe conditions require frequentchecks of the battery fluid level.

JUMP STARTING

If jump starting is necessary, see “Jumpstarting” in the “6. In case of emergency”section. If the engine does not start byjump starting, the battery may have to bereplaced. Contact an INFINITI dealer.

DI0137MA SDI1480


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Power steering fluid pump

2. Fan

3. Alternator

4. Crankshaft pulley

5. Air conditioner compressor

D: Tension checking points

WARNING

Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or LOCKposition. The engine could rotate unexpect-edly.

1. Visually inspect each belt for signs ofunusual wear, cuts, fraying, oil adhe-sion or looseness. If the belt is in poorcondition or loose, have it replaced oradjusted by an INFINITI dealer.

2. Have the belts checked regularly forcondition and tension in accordancewith the maintenance schedule in theINFINITI Service and MaintenanceGuide.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch areoff and that the parking brake is engaged se-curely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to removethe spark plugs. An incorrect socket candamage the spark plugs.SDI1389

DRIVE BELTS SPARK PLUGS


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

If replacement is required, see an INFINITIdealer for servicing.

Platinum-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace theplatinum-tipped qA spark plugs as fre-quently as the conventional type sparkplugs since they will last much longer.Follow the maintenance schedule in theINFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide,but do not reuse them by cleaning or re-gapping.

Always replace with recommendedplatinum-tipped spark plugs.

If maintenance is required, see an INFINITIdealer for servicing.

The filter element should not be cleanedand reused. Replace it according to themaintenance intervals. See the INFINITIService and Maintenance Guide. When re-placing the filter, wipe the inside of theair cleaner housing and the cover with adamp cloth.

WARNING

O Operating the engine with the aircleaner removed can cause you or othersto be burned. The air cleaner not onlycleans the air, it stops the flame if theengine backfires. If it is not there, andthe engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with the air cleanerremoved, and be careful when workingon the engine with the air cleaner re-moved.

O Never pour fuel into the throttle body orattempt to start the engine with the aircleaner removed. Doing so could resultin serious injury.

SDI0145D

AIR CLEANER


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

CAUTION

O After wiper blade replacement, returnthe wiper arm to its original position.

Otherwise it may be damaged when theengine hood is opened.

O Make sure the wiper blades contact theglass, otherwise the arms may be dam-aged from wind pressure.

O Worn windshield wiper blades candamage the windshield and impairdriver vision.

CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after usingthe windshield washer or if a wiper bladechatters when running, wax or other ma-terial may be on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with awasher solution or a mild detergent. Yourwindshield is clean if beads do not formwhen rinsing with clear water.

Clean the blade by wiping it with a clothsoaked in a washer solution or a mild de-

tergent. Then rinse the blade with clearwater. If your windshield is still not clearafter cleaning the blades and using thewiper, replace the blades.

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Pull the wiper arm.

2. Push and hold the release tab qA ,then move the wiper blade down thewiper arm to remove q1 .

3. Insert the new wiper blade to thewiper arm until a click sounds. If necessary, clean the windshield washer

nozzle qA with a needle or small pin qB .

SDI1649

SDI1730


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes.

The disc-type brakes self-adjust everytime the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

See an INFINITI dealer for a brake systemcheck if the brake pedal height does not re-turn to normal.

BRAKE PAD WEAR INDICATORS

The disc brake pads on your vehicle haveaudible wear indicators. When a brake padrequires replacement, it will make a highpitched scraping or screeching sound whenthe vehicle is in motion whether or not thebrake pedal is depressed. Have the brakeschecked as soon as possible if the wear in-dicator sound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions,occasional brake squeak, squeal or othernoise may be heard. Occasional brakenoise during light to moderate stops isnormal and does not affect the function orperformance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals shouldbe followed. For additional information,see the appropriate maintenance logshown in the INFINITI Service and Mainte-nance Guide.

High performance sports brake pads oc-casionally make squeaks, squeals orother braking noises because of their veryhigh friction coefficient.

These occasional brake noises arenormal, but if they continue, see anINFINITI dealer.

Two types of fuses are used. Type qA isused in the fuse boxes in the engine com-partment. Type qB is used in the passen-ger compartment fuse box.

Type qA fuses are provided as sparefuses. They are stored in the passengercompartment fuse box.

Type qA fuses can be installed in the en-gine compartment and passenger com-partment fuse boxes.

SDI1751

BRAKES FUSES


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

If a type qA fuse is used to replace a typeqB fuse, the type qA fuse will not be levelwith the fuse pocket as shown in the il-lustration. This will not affect the perfor-mance of the fuse. Make sure the fuse isinstalled in the fuse box securely.

Type qB fuses cannot be installed in theunderhood fuse boxes. Only use type qAfuses in the underhood fuse boxes.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower am-perage rating than that specified on the fusebox cover. This could damage the electricalsystem or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not oper-ate, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and head-light switch are in the OFF position.

2. Open the engine hood and remove thecover on the battery and thefuse/fusible link holder.

3. Remove the fuse/fusible link holdercover.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.The fuse puller is located in the pas-senger compartment fuse box.

SDI1752 SDI1392A


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

5. If the fuse is open qA , replace it with anew fuse qB . Spare fuses are stored inthe passenger compartment fuse box.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have theelectrical system checked and re-paired by an INFINITI dealer.

Fusible links

If any electrical equipment does not oper-ate and fuses are in good condition,check the fusible links. If any of thesefusible links are melted, replace only withgenuine INFINITI parts.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower am-perage rating than that specified on the fusebox cover. This could damage the electricalsystem or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not oper-ate, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and theheadlight switch are in the OFF posi-tion.

2. Open the fuse box lid q1 .

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse pullerq2 .

4. If the fuse is open qA , replace it with anew fuse qB . Spare fuses q3 arestored in the fuse box.

5. If a new fuse also opens, have theelectrical system checked and re-paired by an INFINITI dealer.

SDI1753 SDI1962


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

KEYFOB (except Intelligent Key)

Replace the battery as follows:

1. Open the lid using a suitable tool qA .

2. Replace the battery with a new one.Recommended battery: CR2025 orequivalent

Make sure that the ! side faces thebottom case.

3. Close the lid securely.

4. Push the keyfob button two or threetimes to check its operation.

See an INFINITI dealer if you need any as-sistance for replacement.

If the battery is removed for any reasonother than replacement, perform step 4above.

O Be careful not to touch the circuit boardand the battery terminal.

O An improperly disposed battery canharm the environment. Always confirmlocal regulations for battery disposal.

O The keyfob is water-resistant; how-ever, if it gets wet, immediately wipe itcompletely dry.

O When changing batteries, do not letdust or oil get on the keyfob.

SDI1754

SDI1731

KEYFOB BATTERY REPLACEMENT


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible for com-pliance could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) this devicemust accept any interference received, in-cluding interference that may cause un-desired operation of the device.

INTELLIGENT KEY

CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to swallowthe battery and removed parts.

Replace the battery as follows:

1. Release the lock knob at the back ofthe Intelligent Key and remove the me-chanical key.

2. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver qA

wrapped with a cloth into the slit qB

of the corner and twist it to separatethe upper part from the lower part.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

O Do not touch the internal circuit andelectric terminals as it could cause amalfunction.

Recommended battery: CR2025 orequivalent

Make sure that the ! side faces thebottom of the case. The ! mark isstamped on the bottom of the case.

SDI1786 SDI1787


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

4. Align the tips of the upper and lowerparts, and then push them togetheruntil it is securely closed.

5. Push the buttons two or three times tocheck its operation.

See an INFINITI dealer if you need any as-sistance for replacement.

If the battery is removed for any reasonother than replacement, perform step 5above.

O Be careful not to touch the circuit boardand the battery terminal.

O An improperly disposed battery canharm the environment. Always confirmlocal regulations for battery disposal.

O When changing batteries, do not letdust or oil get on the Intelligent Key.

FCC Notice:

This equipment has been tested and foundto comply with the limits for a Class B digi-tal device pursuant to part 15 of the FCCRules. These limits are designed to providereasonable protection against harmful in-terference in a residential installation.This equipment generates, uses and canradiate radio frequency energy and, if notinstalled and used in accordance with the

instructions, may cause harmful interfer-ence to radio communications. However,there is no guarantee that interference willnot occur in a particular installation. If thisequipment does cause harmful interfer-ence to radio or television reception, whichcan be determined by turning the equip-ment off and on, the user is encouraged totry to correct the interference by one ormore of the following measures:

O Reorient or relocate the receiving an-tenna

O Increase the separation between theequipment and the receiver

O Connect the equipment into an outleton a circuit different from that to whichthe receiver is connected.

O Consult the dealer or an experiencedradio/TV technician for help.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Front turn signal light

2. Front fog light/Park light

3. Headlight (low-beam/high-beam)

4. Map light

5. Front side marker light

6. Step light

7. High-mounted stop light(if so equipped)

8. Trunk light

9. License plate light

10. Rear combination light(Turn signal, Stop/Tail, Back-up, Sidemarker)

SDI1953

LIGHTS


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

HEADLIGHTS

Replacing the xenon headlightbulb

Xenon headlight bulb:

WARNING

HIGH VOLTAGE

When xenon headlights are on, they producea high voltage. To prevent an electric shock,never attempt to modify or disassemble. Al-ways have your xenon headlights replacedat an INFINITI dealer. For additional informa-tion, see “Headlight and turn signal switch”in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.

If replacement is required, see an INFINITIdealer.

Fog may temporarily form inside the lensof the exterior lights in the rain or in a carwash. A temperature difference betweenthe inside and the outside of the lenscauses the fog. This is not a malfunction.If large drops of water collect inside thelens, contact an INFINITI dealer.

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.

Front turn signal light* 21 T20

Front park light* 5 T10

Front side marker light 3.8 T10

Front fog light 55 H1

Rear combination light

Turn signal 21 T20

Stop/Tail* (LED) —

Side marker light* 3.8 T10

Back-up light 18 T16

License plate light 5 T10

High-mounted stop light* (LED) —

Map light 8 —

Step light 5 —

Trunk light 3.4 158

Vanity mirror light 1.32 —

*: See an INFINITI dealer for replacement.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Replacement procedures

All other lights are either type A, B, C orD. When replacing a bulb, first remove thelens and/or cover.

MDI0006

SDI1733Front side marker light

SDI1734Map light


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS). Itmonitors tire pressure of all tires exceptthe spare. When the low tire pressurewarning light is lit, one or more of yourtires is significantly under-inflated.

The TPMS will activate only when the ve-hicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (forexample a flat tire while driving).

For more details, refer to “Low tire pres-sure warning light” in the “2. Instrumentsand controls” section, “Tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS)” in the “5.Starting and driving” section, and “Flattire” in the “6. In case of emergency” sec-tion.

SDI1400AStep light

SDI1258BTrunk light

SDI1779AVanity mirror light

SDI1401BLicense plate light

WHEELS AND TIRES


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Tire inflation pressureCheck the tire pressures (including thespare) often and always prior to longdistance trips. The recommended tirepressure specifications are shown onthe F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label or theTire and Loading Information labelunder the “COLD TIRE PRESSURE” head-ing. The Tire and Loading Informationlabel is affixed to the driver side centerpillar. Tire pressures should be checkedregularly because:

O Most tires naturally lose air overtime.

O Tires can lose air suddenly whendriven over potholes or other objectsor if the vehicle strikes a curb whileparking.

The tire pressures should be checkwhen the tires are cold. The tires areconsidered COLD after the vehicle hasbeen parked for 3 or more hours, ordriven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at mod-erate speeds.

Incorrect tire pressure, including underinflation, may adversely affect tire lifeand vehicle handling.

WARNING

O Improperly inflated tires can failsuddenly and cause an accident.

O The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label. Thevehicle weight capacity is indi-cated on the Tire and Loading In-formation label. Do not load yourvehicle beyond this capacity.Overloading your vehicle may re-sult in reduced tire life, unsafe op-erating conditions due to prema-ture tire failure, or unfavorablehandling characteristics andcould also lead to a serious acci-dent. Loading beyond the speci-fied capacity may also result in amalfunction of other vehicle

components.

O Before taking a long trip, or when-ever you heavily load your vehicle,use a tire pressure gauge to en-sure that the tire pressures are atthe specified level.

O Do not drive your vehicle over 85MPH (137 km/h) unless it isequipped with high speed ratedtires. Driving faster than 85 MPH(137 km/h) may result in tire mal-function, loss of control and pos-sible injury.

O For additional information re-garding tires, refer to “ImportantTire Safety Information” (US) or“Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Tire and loading information label

q1 Seating capacity: The maximumnumber of occupants that can beseated in the vehicle.

q2 Vehicle load limit: See loading infor-mation in the “9. Technical and con-sumer information” section.

q3 Original size: The size of the tiresoriginally installed on the vehicle atthe factory.

q4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tiresto this pressure when the tires arecold. Tires are considered COLDafter the vehicle has been parked for3 or more hours, or driven less than1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.The recommended cold tire inflationis set by the manufacturer to pro-vide the best balance of tire wear,vehicle handling, driveability, tirenoise, etc., up to the vehicle’sGVWR.

q5 Tire size — refer to “Tire labeling”later in this section.

q6 Spare tire size or compact spare tiresize (if so equipped)SDI1948


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Checking the tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from thetire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarelyonto the valve stem. Do not presstoo hard or force the valve stemsideways, or air will escape. If thehissing sound of air escaping fromthe tire is heard while checking thepressure, reposition the gauge toeliminate this leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gaugestem and compare it to the specifi-cation shown on the Tire andLoading Information label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If toomuch air is added, press the core ofthe valve stem briefly with the tip ofthe gauge stem to release pressure.Recheck the pressure and add or re-lease air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires,including the spare.

SizeCold TireInflationPressure

FrontOriginalTire

P225/50R17 93V

225/45R18 91W

225/40R19 89Y

210 kPa(30 psi)240 kPa(35 psi)240 kPa(35 psi)

RearOriginalTire

P235/50R17 95V

245/45R18 96W

245/40R19 94Y

210 kPa(30 psi)240 kPa(35 psi)240 kPa(35 psi)

SpareTire T145/80D17 420 kPa

(60 psi)

SDI1949


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturersto place standardized information onthe sidewall of all tires. This informa-tion identifies and describes the funda-mental characteristics of the tire andalso provides the tire identificationnumber (TIN) for safety standard certifi-cation. The TIN can be used to identifythe tire in case of a recall.

q1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)

1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-signed for passenger vehicles. (Notall tires have this information).

2. Three-digit number (215): Thisnumber gives the width in millime-ters of the tire from sidewall edge tosidewall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This number,known as the aspect ratio, gives thetire’s ratio of height to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (15): This numberis the wheel or rim diameter ininches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (95): Thisnumber is the tire’s load index. It isa measurement of how much weighteach tire can support. You may notfind this information on all tires be-cause it is not required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should notdrive the vehicle faster than the tirespeed rating.

SDI1575Example

SDI1951Example


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

q2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for anew tire (example: DOT XX XX XXXXXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart-ment of Transportation”. Thesymbol can be placed above,below or to the left or right ofthe Tire Identification Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s iden-tification mark

3. Two-digit code: Tire size

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code (Op-tional)

5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufac-ture

6. Four numbers represent the weekand year the tire was built. For ex-ample, the numbers 3103 mean the31st week of 2003. If these numbersare missing, then look on the othersidewall of the tire.

q3 Tire ply composition and materialThe number of layers or plies ofrubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tiremanufacturers also must indicatethe materials in the tire, which in-clude steel, nylon, polyester, andothers.

q4 Maximum permissible inflation pres-sureThis number is the greatest amountof air pressure that should be put inthe tire. Do not exceed themaximum permissible inflation pres-sure.

q5 Maximum load ratingThis number indicates the maximumload in kilograms and pounds thatcan be carried by the tire. When re-placing the tires on the vehicle, al-ways use a tire that has the sameload rating as the factory installedtire.

q6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”Indicates whether the tire requiresan inner tube (“tube type”) or not(“tubeless”).

q7 The word “radial”The word “radial” is shown if thetire has radial structure.

q8 Manufacturer or brand nameManufacturer or brand name isshown.

Other tire-related terminology:

In addition to the many terms that aredefined throughout this section, In-tended Outboard Sidewall is (1) thesidewall that contains a whitewall,bears white lettering or bears manufac-

SDI1607Example


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

turer, brand and/or model namemolding that is higher or deeper thanthe same molding on the other sidewallof the tire, or (2) the outward facingsidewall of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that must alwaysface outward when mounted on a ve-hicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

O When changing or replacing tires, besure all four tires are of the same type(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) andconstruction. An INFINITI dealer may beable to help you with information abouttire type, size, speed rating and avail-ability.

O Replacement tires may have a lowerspeed rating than the factory equippedtires, and may not match the potentialmaximum vehicle speed. Never exceedthe maximum speed rating of the tire.

O Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by INFINITI could affect theproper operation of the tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS).

O For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

All season tiresINFINITI specifies All Season tires on somemodels to provide good performance foruse all year, including snowy and icy roadconditions. All Season tires are identifiedby ALL SEASON and/or M&S on the tiresidewall. Snow tires have better snow trac-tion than All Season tires and may bemore appropriate in some areas.

Summer tiresINFINITI specifies summer tires on somemodels to provide superior performanceon dry roads. Summer tire performance issubstantially reduced in snow and ice.Summer tires do not have the tire tractionrating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle insnowy or icy conditions, INFINITI recom-

mends the use of SNOW or ALL SEASONtires on all four wheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessaryto select tires equivalent in size and loadrating to the original equipment tires. Ifyou do not, it can adversely affect thesafety and handling of your vehicle.

Generally, snow tires will have lowerspeed ratings than factory equipped tiresand may not match the potentialmaximum vehicle speed. Never exceedthe maximum speed rating of the tire.

If you operate your vehicle in snowy or icyconditions, INFINITI recommends the useof snow or all season tires on all fourwheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, stud-ded tires may be used. However, someprovinces and states prohibit their use.Check local, state and provincial laws be-fore installing studded tires. Skid andtraction capabilities of studded snowtires, on wet or dry surfaces, may bepoorer than that of non-studded snowtires.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

TIRE CHAINSUse of tire chains may be prohibited ac-cording to location. Check the local lawsbefore installing tire chains. When install-ing tire chains, make sure they are theproper size for the tires on your vehicleand are installed according to the chainmanufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAEclass “S” chains. Class “S” chains areused on vehicles with restricted tire to ve-hicle clearance. Vehicles that can useClass “S” chains are designed to meetthe minimum clearances between the tireand the closest vehicle suspension orbody component required to accommo-date the use of a winter traction device(tire chains or cables). The minimumclearances are determined using the fac-tory equipped tires. Other types maydamage your vehicle. Use chain ten-sioners when recommended by the tirechain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit.Loose end links of the tire chain must besecured or removed to prevent the possi-bility of whipping action damage to thefenders or underbody. If possible, avoidfully loading your vehicle when using tirechains. In addition, drive at a reducedspeed. Otherwise, your vehicle may bedamaged and/or vehicle handling andperformance may be adversely affected.

O Never install tire chains on a TEMPO-RARY USE ONLY spare tire.

O Do not use the chains on dry roads.

Tire chains must be installed only on therear wheels and not on the front wheels.

Do not drive with tire chains on pavedroads which are clear of snow. Drivingwith chains in such conditions can causedamage to the various mechanisms of thevehicle due to some overstress.

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

Tires cannot be rotated on this vehicle,as front tires are a different size fromrear tires.

A pin is on the front brake rotor to pre-vent the rear wheels from being in-stalled in place of the front wheels. Thespare tire can be installed in place ofthe front and rear wheels. When install-ing the spare tire in the front wheel, thehole in the spare tire wheel must bealigned with the pin on the brake rotor.

WARNING

O Retighten the wheel nuts whenthe vehicle has been driven for600 miles (1,000 km) (also incases of a flat tire, etc.).



w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Wear indicator2. Location mark

Tire wear and damage

WARNING

O Tires should be periodically in-spected for wear, cracking,bulging or objects caught in thetread. If excessive wear, cracks,bulging or deep cuts are found,the tire(s) should be replaced.

O The original tires have built-intread wear indicators. When thewear indicators are visible, thetire(s) should be replaced.

O Tires degrade with age and use.Have tires, including the spare,over 6 years old checked by aqualified technician because sometire damage may not be obvious.Replace the tires as necessary toprevent tire failure and possiblepersonal injury.

O Improper service of the spare tiremay result in serious personal in-jury. If it is necessary to repair thespare tire, contact an INFINITIdealer.


Replacing wheels and tiresWhen replacing a tire, use the same size,speed rating and load carrying capacityas originally equipped. See “Specifica-

tions” in the “9. Technical and consumerinformation” section for recommendedtypes and sizes of tires and wheels.

WARNING

O The use of tires other than those recom-mended or the mixed use of tires of dif-ferent brands, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns can ad-versely affect the ride, braking, handling,ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance,tire chain clearance, speedometer calibra-tion, headlight aim and bumper height.Some of these effects may lead to accidentsand could result in serious personal injury.

O If the wheels are changed for anyreason, always replace with wheelswhich have the same off-set dimension.Wheels of a different off-set could causepremature tire wear, degrade vehiclehandling characteristics and/or interfer-ence with the brake discs. Such interfer-ence can lead to decreased braking effi-ciency and/or early brake pad wear.

O When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, tire pressure will not be indi-cated, the TPMS will not function and

MDI0004C


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

the low tire pressure warning light willflash for approximately 1 minute and re-main on after the 1 minute. Contact yourINFINITI dealer as soon as possible fortire replacement and/or system reset-ting.


O Do not install a deformed wheel or tireeven if it has been repaired. Such wheelsor tires could have structural damageand could malfunction without warning.

O The use of retread tires is not recom-mended.

O For additional information regarding tires,refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada)in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Wheel balanceUnbalanced wheels may affect vehicle han-dling and tire life. Even with regular use,wheels can get out of balance. Therefore,they should be balanced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-formed with the wheels off the vehicle.Spin balancing the wheels on the vehiclecould lead to transmission damage.

For additional information regarding tires,refer to “Important Tire Safety Informa-tion” (US) or “Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in the INFINITI Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

Care of wheels

O Wash the wheels when washing thevehicle to maintain their appearance.

O Clean the inner side of the wheelswhen the wheel is changed or the un-derside of the vehicle is washed.

O Do not use abrasive cleaners whenwashing the wheels.

O Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents orcorrosion. Such damage may cause lossof pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

O INFINITI recommends that the roadwheels be waxed to protect againstroad salt in areas where it is usedduring winter.

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLYspare tire (T-type))

Observe the following precautions if theTEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire must beused, otherwise your vehicle could bedamaged or involved in an accident.

CAUTION

O The spare tire should be used only for anemergency. It should be replaced with astandard tire at the first opportunity.

O Drive carefully while the TEMPORARYUSE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoidsharp turns and abrupt braking whiledriving.

O Periodically check spare tire inflationpressure, and always keep it at 60 psi(420 kPa, 4.2 bar).

O With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY sparetire installed, do not drive your vehicleat speeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h).

O Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE ONLYspare tire will wear at a faster rate thanthe original tire. Replace the spare tire as


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

soon as the tread wear indicators ap-pear.

O Do not use the spare tire on other ve-hicles.

O Do not use more than one spare tire atthe same time.

O Do not tow a trailer while the TEMPO-RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

CAUTION

O Do not use tire chains on a TEMPORARYUSE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains will notfit properly and may cause damage tothe vehicle.

O Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLYspare tire is smaller than the originaltire, ground clearance is reduced. Toavoid damage to the vehicle do not driveover obstacles. Also do not drive the ve-hicle through an automatic car washsince it may get caught.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ... 9-2Fuel recommendation .................................. 9-3Engine oil and oil filter recommendation ..... 9-5Air conditioning system refrigerant andlubricant recommendations......................... 9-6

Specifications ................................................... 9-7Engine......................................................... 9-7Wheels and tires......................................... 9-8Dimensions ................................................. 9-8

When traveling or registering your vehicle inanother country................................................ 9-9Vehicle identification........................................ 9-9

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate .... 9-9Vehicle identification number (Chassisnumber) ...................................................... 9-9Engine serial number................................. 9-10F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label .... 9-10Emission control information label............. 9-10Tire and loading information label.............. 9-11Air conditioner specification label .............. 9-11

Installing front license plate............................ 9-12Vehicle loading information ............................ 9-13

Terms ........................................................ 9-13Vehicle load capacity................................. 9-14Loading tips .............................................. 9-16Measurement of weights ........................... 9-16

Towing a trailer ............................................... 9-17Maximum load limits ................................. 9-17Towing load/specification chart ................. 9-18Towing safety ............................................ 9-18Flat towing................................................. 9-21

Uniform tire quality grading............................ 9-22Emission control system warranty................... 9-23Reporting safety defects (US only) .................. 9-23Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M)test (US only) ................................................. 9-24Event data recorders....................................... 9-25Owner’s Manual/Service Manual orderinformation ................................................... 9-25

In the event of a collision.......................... 9-25

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure in-structed in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (Approximate)RecommendedspecificationsUS

measureImp

measure Liter

Fuel*1 20 gal 16-5/8 gal 76Engine oil (Drain and refill)*6

With oil filter change 5 qt 4-1/8 qt 4.7 O Engine oil with API Certification Mark*2O Viscosity SAE 5W-30Without oil filter change 4-5/8 qt 3-7/8 qt 4.4

Cooling systemWith reservoir 9-1/4 qt 7-5/8 qt 8.7 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent

50% Demineralized or distilled waterReservoir 7/8 qt 3/5 qt 0.8Automatic transmission fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF*3

Manual transmission gear oil — — — Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF)HQ Multi 75W-85 or API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 or 75W-90

Differential gear oil — — — API GL-5, Viscosity SAE 80W-90*4

Power steering fluid (PSF) Refill to the proper fluid level according to the in-structions in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section.

Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent*8

Brake and clutch fluid Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*5 or equivalent DOT 3

Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a)*7Air conditioning system lubricants — — — NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or exact equivalentWindshield washer fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent

*1: For additional information, see “Fuel recommendation” later in this section.*2: For additional information, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” later in this section.*3: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not

covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty.*4: For hot climates, viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures always above 32°F (0°C).*5: Available in mainland US through an INFINITI dealer.*6: For additional information, see “Engine oil” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section for changing engine oil.*7: For additional information, see “Vehicle identification” later in this section for air conditioner specification label.*8: For Canada, NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), DEXRONTMIII/MERCONTM or equivalent ATF may also be used.

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDEDFUEL/LUBRICANTS

9-2 Technical and consumer information

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

Use unleaded premium gasoline with anoctane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octanenumber 96).

If premium gasoline is not available, un-leaded regular gasoline with an octanerating of 87 AKI number (Research octanenumber 91) may be temporarily used, butonly under the following precautions:

O Have the fuel tank filled only partiallywith unleaded regular gasoline, andfill up with unleaded premium gaso-line as soon as possible.

O Avoid full throttle driving and abruptacceleration.

However, for maximum vehicle perfor-mance, the use of unleaded premium gaso-line is recommended.

CAUTION

O Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emission con-trol system, and may also affect the war-

ranty coverage.

O Under no circumstances should a leadedgasoline be used, because this will dam-age the three-way catalyst.

O Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Yourvehicle is not designed to run on E-85fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage the fuelsystem components and is not coveredby the INFINITI vehicle limited warranty.

Gasoline specifications

INFINITI recommends using gasoline thatmeets the World-Wide Fuel Charter(WWFC) specifications where it is avail-able. Many of the automobile manufactur-ers developed this specification to im-prove emission control system and ve-hicle performance. Ask your servicestation manager if the gasoline meets theWWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producingreformulated gasolines. These gasolinesare specially designed to reduce vehicleemissions. INFINITI supports efforts to-

wards cleaner air and suggests that youuse reformulated gasoline when avail-able.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline contain-ing oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBEand methanol with or without advertisingtheir presence. INFINITI does not recom-mend the use of fuels of which the oxy-genate content and the fuel compatibilityfor your INFINITI cannot be readily deter-mined. If in doubt, ask your service sta-tion manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline,please take the following precautions asthe usage of such fuels may cause vehicleperformance problems and/or fuel systemdamage.

O The fuel must be unleaded and have anoctane rating no lower than that recom-mended for unleaded gasoline.

O If an oxygenate-blend, excepting amethanol blend, is used, it should con-tain no more than 10% oxygenate.(MTBE may, however, be added up to15%.)

O If a methanol blend is used, it shouldcontain no more than 5% methanol

Technical and consumer information 9-3

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). Itshould also contain a suitable amountof appropriate cosolvents and corro-sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-lated with appropriate cosolvents andcorrosion inhibitors, such methanolblends may cause fuel system damageand/or vehicle performance problems.At this time, sufficient data is not avail-able to ensure that all methanol blendsare suitable for use in INFINITI vehicles.

If any driveability problems such as en-gine stalling and hard hot starting are ex-perienced after using oxygenate-blend fu-els, immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blendof MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates cancause paint damage.

E-85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gaso-line. E-85 can only be used in a FlexibleFuel Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 fuel inyour vehicle. U.S. government regulationsrequire fuel ethanol dispensing pumps tobe identified by a small, square, orangeand black label with the common abbre-

viation or the appropriate percentage forthat region.

Aftermarket fuel additives

INFINITI does not recommend the use ofany aftermarket fuel additives (i.e. fuel in-jector cleaner, octane booster, intakevalve deposit removers, etc.) which aresold commercially. Many of these addi-tives intended for gum, varnish or depositremoval may contain active solvent orsimilar ingredients that can be harmful tothe fuel system and engine.

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octanerating lower than recommended can causepersistent, heavy spark knock. (Sparkknock is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-vere, this can lead to engine damage. Ifyou detect a persistent heavy spark knockeven when using gasoline of the stated oc-tane rating, or if you hear steady sparkknock while holding a steady speed onlevel roads, have your dealer correct thecondition. Failure to correct the conditionis misuse of the vehicle, for which INFINITIis not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing will result inknocking, after-run or overheating. This in

turn may cause excessive fuel consump-tion or damage to the engine. If any of theabove symptoms are encountered, haveyour vehicle checked at an INFINITI dealeror other competent service facility.

However, now and then you may noticelight spark knock for a short time while ac-celerating or driving up hills. This is nocause for concern, because you get thegreatest fuel benefit when there is lightspark knock for a short time under heavyengine load.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTERRECOMMENDATION

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade,quality and viscosity engine oil to ensuresatisfactory engine life and performance.See “Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants” earlier in this section.INFINITI recommends the use of an energyconserving oil in order to improve fueleconomy.

Select only engine oils that meet theAmerican Petroleum Institute (API) certifi-

cation or International Lubricant Stan-dardization and Approval Committee (IL-SAC) certification and SAE viscosity stan-dard. These oils have the API certificationmark on the front of the container. Oilswhich do not have the specified qualitylabel should not be used as they couldcause engine damage.

Oil additives

INFINITI does not recommend the use ofoil additives. The use of an oil additive isnot necessary when the proper oil type isused and maintenance intervals are fol-lowed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter orhas been previously used should not beused.

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thicknesschanges with temperature. Because ofthis, it is important that the engine oil vis-cosity be selected based on the tempera-tures at which the vehicle will be oper-ated before the next oil change. Choosingan oil viscosity other than that recom-mended could cause serious engine dam-age.

STI0502


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new vehicle is equipped with a high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When re-placing, use the genuine oil filter or itsequivalent for the reason described inchange intervals.

Change intervals

The oil and oil filter change intervals foryour engine are based on the use of thespecified quality oils and filters. Oil andfilter other than the specified quality, oroil and filter change intervals longer thanrecommended could reduce engine life.Damage to engines caused by impropermaintenance or use of incorrect oil andfilter quality and/or viscosity is not cov-ered by the new INFINITI vehicle limitedwarranties.

Your engine was filled with a high qualityengine oil when it was built. You do nothave to change the oil before the first rec-ommended change interval. Oil and filterchange intervals depend upon how youuse your vehicle. Operation under the fol-lowing conditions may require more fre-quent oil and filter changes.

O repeated short distance driving at coldoutside temperatures

O driving in dusty conditions

O extensive idling

O towing a trailer

O stop and go commuting

Refer to the “INFINITI Service and Mainte-nance Guide” for the maintenance sched-ule.

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMREFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANTRECOMMENDATIONSThe air conditioning system in this INFINITIvehicle must be charged with the refrig-erant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the lubricant,Nissan A/C System Oil Type S or the exactequivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or lubricantwill cause severe damage to the air condi-tioning system and will require the replace-ment of all air conditioner system compo-nents.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in yourINFINITI vehicle will not harm the earth’sozone layer. Although this refrigerant

does not affect the earth’s atmosphere,certain governmental regulations requirethe recovery and recycling of any refriger-ant during automotive air conditioningsystem service. An INFINITI dealer has thetrained technicians and equipmentneeded to recover and recycle your airconditioning system refrigerant.

Contact an INFINITI dealer when servicingyour air conditioning system.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

ENGINE

Model VQ35DE

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle

Cylinder arrangement 6-cylinder, V-slanted at 60°

Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.760 x 3.205 (95.5 x 81.4)

Displacement cu in (cm3) 213.45 (3,498)

Firing order 1-2-3-4-5-6*1

Idle speed rpmSee the emission control label onthe underside of the hood.

Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.) degree/rpm

CO percentage at idle speed [No air] %

Spark plugStandard PLFR5A-11

Service option PLFR4A-11, PLFR6A-11

Spark plug gap (Normal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

The spark ignition system of this vehicle meets all requirements of the CanadianInterference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

TI0001-A

SPECIFICATIONS


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

WHEELS AND TIRESType Position Size Offset in (mm)

Road wheel Aluminum

Front 17 x 7-1/2JJ 1.18 (30)Rear 17 x 8JJ 1.30 (33)Front 18 x 8JJ 1.18 (30)Rear 18 x 8JJ 1.18 (30)Front 19 x 8JJ 1.18 (30)Rear 19 x 8-1/2JJ 1.30 (33)

TireConventional

Front P225/50R17 93V 210 kPa (30 psi)Rear P235/50R17 95V 210 kPa (30 psi)Front 225/45R18 91W 240 kPa (35 psi)Rear 245/45R18 96W 240 kPa (35 psi)Front 225/40R19 89Y 240 kPa (35 psi)Rear 245/40R19 94Y 240 kPa (35 psi)

Spare — T145/80D17 420 kPa (60 psi)

DIMENSIONS

Overall length in (mm) 182.2 (4,628)

Overall width in (mm) 71.5 (1,815)

Overall height in (mm)54.8 (1,393)55.1 (1,399)*1

Front tread in (mm) 60.4 (1,535)

Rear tread in (mm)60.6 (1,540)*260.8 (1,545)*3

Wheelbase in (mm) 112.2 (2,850)

Gross vehicle weight rating lb (kg)

See the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.certification label on the driv-er’s side lock pillar.

Gross axle weight rating

Front lb (kg)

Rear lb (kg)

*1: For 18 in and 19 in road wheel models*2: For models with road wheel size — 17 x 8JJ and 19 x 8-1/2JJ [offset 1.30 in (33

mm)]*3: For models with road wheel size — 18 x 8JJ [offset 1.18 in (30 mm)]


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

When planning to travel in anothercountry, you should first find out if thefuel available is suitable for your vehicle’sengine.

Using fuel with too low an octane ratingmay cause engine damage. All gasolinevehicles must be operated with unleadedengine gasoline. Therefore, avoid takingyour vehicle to areas where appropriatefuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of yourvehicle to another country, state, provinceor district, it may be necessary to modifythe vehicle to meet local laws and regula-tions.

The laws and regulations for motor ve-hicle emission control and safety stan-dards vary according to the country,state, province or district; therefore, ve-hicle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-other country, state, province or districtand registered, its modifications, trans-portation, and registration are the respon-sibility of the user. INFINITI is not respon-sible for any inconvenience that may re-sult.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(VIN) PLATE

The vehicle identification number plate isattached as shown. This number is theidentification for your vehicle and is usedin the vehicle registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(Chassis number)

The number is stamped as shown.

STI0038 STI0302

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING YOURVEHICLE IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine asshown.

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.CERTIFICATION LABEL

The Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-dards (F.M.V.S.S.) or Canadian Motor Ve-hicle Safety Standards (C.M.V.S.S.) certifi-cation label is affixed as shown. Thislabel contains valuable vehicle informa-tion, such as: Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR), month and year of manufacture,Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc.Review it carefully.

EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATIONLABEL

The emission control information label isattached as shown.

STI0303C STI0330A STI0317


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATIONLABEL

The cold tire pressures are shown on theTire and Loading Information label affixedto the driver side center pillar.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATIONLABEL

The air conditioner specification label isaffixed inside of the hood as shown.

STI0331A STI0306


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Use the following steps to mount the li-cense plate:

Before mounting the license plate, con-firm that the following parts are enclosedin the vinyl bag.

O License plate bracket

O J-nut x 2

O Screw x 2

O Screw grommet x 2

1. Temporarily place the license platebracket and mark the pilot hole pointsqA using holes qB while aligning thetowing hook hole of the front bumperfascia.

2. Remove the license plate bracket.

3. Carefully drill two pilot holes qA usinga 0.39 in (10 mm) drill bit at themarked locations. (Be sure that thedrill only goes through the fascia, ordamage to the nut may occur.)

4. Insert grommets into the hole on thefascia.

5. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into thegrommet hole to turn part qC 90 de-grees.STI0332

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

6. Insert a J-nut into the license platebracket before placing the licenseplate bracket on the fascia.

7. Install the license plate bracket withscrews.

8. Install the license plate with bolts thatare no longer than 0.55 in (14 mm).

WARNING

O It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area inside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding inthese areas are more likely to beseriously injured or killed.

O Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is notequipped with seats and seatbelts.

O Be sure everyone in your vehicle isin a seat and using a seat beltproperly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourselfwith the following terms before loadingyour vehicle:

O Curb Weight (actual weight of yourvehicle) - vehicle weight including:standard and optional equipment,fluids, emergency tools, and spare

tire assembly. This weight does notinclude passengers and cargo.

O GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curbweight plus the combined weight ofpassengers and cargo.

O GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)- maximum total combined weight ofthe unloaded vehicle, passengers,luggage, hitch, trailer tongue loadand any other optional equipment.This information is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label.

O GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -maximum weight (load) limit speci-fied for the front or rear axle. Thisinformation is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label.

O GCWR (Gross Combined WeightRating) - maximum total weightrating of the vehicle, passengers,cargo and trailer.

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

O Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,Total load capacity - maximum totalweight limit specified of the load(passengers and cargo) for the ve-hicle. This is the maximum com-bined weight of occupants andcargo that can be loaded into the ve-hicle. If the vehicle is used to tow atrailer, the trailer tongue weightmust be included as part of thecargo load. This information is lo-cated on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation label.

O Cargo capacity - permissible weightof cargo, the subtracted weight ofoccupants from the load limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-hicle shown as “The combined weightof occupants and cargo” on the Tire andLoading Information label. Do not ex-ceed the number of occupants shownas “Seating Capacity” on the Tire andLoading Information label.

To get “the combined weight of occu-pants and cargo”, add the weight of alloccupants, then add the total luggageweight to the value. Examples areshown in the following illustration.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Steps for determining correct loadlimit

1. Locate the statement “The combinedweight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXXlbs” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that willbe riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXX kgor XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggageload capacity. For example, if theXXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. andthere will be five 150 lb. passengersin your vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage load ca-pacity is 650 lbs. (1400 − 750 (5 x150) = 650 lbs.) or (640 − 340 (5 x70) = 300 kg.)

5. Determine the combined weight ofSTI0445


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

luggage and cargo being loaded onthe vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargoand luggage load capacity calcu-lated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer will betransferred to your vehicle. Consultthis manual to determine how thisreduces the available cargo and lug-gage load capacity of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirmthat you do not exceed the Gross Ve-hicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or theGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) foryour vehicle. See “Measurement ofWeights” later in this section.

Also check tires for proper inflationpressures. See the Tire and Loading In-formation label.

LOADING TIPS

O The GVW must not exceed GVWR orGAWR as specified on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel.

O Do not load the front and rear axleto the GAWR. Doing so will exceedthe GVWR.

WARNING

O Properly secure all cargo withropes or straps to help prevent itfrom sliding or shifting. Do notplace cargo higher than the seat-backs. In a sudden stop or colli-sion, unsecured cargo could causepersonal injury.

O Do not load your vehicle anyheavier than the GVWR or themaximum front and rear GAWRs. Ifyou do, parts of your vehicle canbreak, tire damage could occur, orit can change the way your vehiclehandles. This could result in lossof control and cause personalinjury.

O Overloading not only can shortenthe life of your vehicle and the tire,but can also cause unsafe vehiclehandling and longer braking dis-tances. This may cause a prema-ture tire failure which could resultin a serious accident and personalinjury. Failures caused by over-loading are not covered by the ve-hicle’s warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weightshifts that could affect the balance ofyour vehicle. When the vehicle isloaded, drive to a scale and weigh thefront and the rear wheels separately todetermine axle loads. Individual axleloads should not exceed either of thegross axle weight ratings (GAWR). Thetotal of the axle loads should not ex-ceed the gross vehicle weight rating(GVWR). These ratings are given on thevehicle certification label. If weight rat-ings are exceeded, move or removeitems to bring all weights below the rat-ings.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

Overloading or improper loading of a trailerand its cargo can adversely affect vehiclehandling, braking and performance and maylead to accidents.

CAUTION

O Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy loadfor the first 500 miles (800 km).

Your engine, axle or other parts could bedamaged.

O For the first 500 miles (800 km) that youtow a trailer, do not drive over 50 MPH(80 km/h) and do not make starts at fullthrottle. This helps the engine and otherparts of your vehicle wear in at theheavier loads.

Your new vehicle was designed to beused primarily to carry passengers andcargo. Remember that towing a trailer willplace additional loads on a vehicle’s en-gine, drive train, steering, braking andother systems.

An INFINITI Towing Guide (U.S. only) isavailable on the website atwww. infiniti.com. This guide includes in-formation on trailer towing capability andthe special equipment required for propertowing.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS

Maximum trailer loads

Never allow the total trailer load to ex-ceed the value specified in the TowingLoad/Specification Chart found later in

this section. The total trailer load equalstrailer weight plus its cargo weight.

Towing loads greater than specified or us-ing improper towing equipment could ad-versely affect vehicle handling, brakingand performance. The ability of a vehicleto tow a trailer is not only related to themaximum trailer loads, but also theplaces you plan to tow. Tow weights ap-propriate for level highway driving mayhave to be reduced on very steep gradesor in low traction situations (for example,on slippery boat ramps).

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from impropertowing procedures are not covered byINFINITI warranties.

Tongue load

Keep the tongue load between 9 and 11%of the total trailer load within themaximum tongue load limits shown in thefollowing Towing Load/SpecificationChart. If the tongue load becomes exces-sive, rearrange cargo to allow for propertongue load.

TI1011M

TOWING A TRAILER


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Maximum gross vehicle weight/maximum gross axle weight

The gross vehicle weight of the towing ve-hicle must not exceed the gross vehicleweight rating (GVWR) shown on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.The gross vehicle weight equals the com-bined weight of the unloaded vehicle,passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongueload and any other optional equipment. Inaddition, front or rear gross axle weightmust not exceed GAWR shown on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATIONCHART

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHARTUnit: lb (kg)

MAXIMUMTOWING LOAD

1,000 (454)

MAXIMUMTONGUE LOAD

100 (45.4)

TOWING SAFETY

Trailer hitch

Choose a proper hitch for a vehicle andtrailer. Make sure the trailer hitch is se-curely attached to the vehicle, to helpavoid personal injury or property damagedue to sway caused by crosswinds, roughroad surfaces or passing trucks.

Hitch ball

Choose a hitch ball of the proper size andweight rating for a trailer:

O The required hitch ball size is stampedon most trailer couplers. Most hitchballs also have the size printed on topof the ball.

O Choose the proper class hitch ballbased on the trailer weight.

O The diameter of the threaded shank ofthe hitch ball must be matched to theball mount hole diameter. The hitchball shank should be no more than1/160 smaller than the hole in the ballmount.

O The threaded shank of the hitch ballmust be long enough to be properlysecured to the ball mount. Thereshould be at least 2 threads showingbeyond the lock washer and nut.

Class I hitch

Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver,ball mount and hitch ball) can be used totow trailers of a maximum weight of2,000 lb (909 kg).

You may add Class I trailer hitch equip-ment to the vehicle that has a 2,000 lb(909 kg) maximum weight rating, but yourvehicle is only capable of towing themaximum trailer weights shown in theTowing Load/Specification Chart earlier inthis section.

TI1012M


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

CAUTION

O Do not use axle-mounted hitches.

O The hitch should not be attached to oraffect the operation of the impact-absorbing bumper.

O Do not modify the vehicle exhaustsystem, brake system, etc. to install atrailer hitch.

O To reduce the possibility of additionaldamage if your vehicle is struck from therear, where practical, remove the hitchand/or receiver when not in use.

O After the hitch is removed, seal the boltholes to prevent exhaust fumes, water ordust from entering the passenger com-partment.

O Regularly check that all trailer hitchmounting bolts are securely mounted.

Tire pressures

O When towing a trailer, inflate the ve-hicle tires to the recommended coldtire pressure indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

O Trailer tire condition, size, loadrating and proper inflation pressureshould be in accordance with thetrailer and tire manufacturers’ speci-fications.

Safety chains

Always use a suitable chains betweenyour vehicle and the trailer. The safetychains should be crossed and should beattached to the hitch, not to the vehiclebumper or axle. Be sure to leave enoughslack in the chains to permit turning cor-ners.

Trailer lights

CAUTION

When splicing into the vehicle electrical sys-tem, a commercially available power-type

module/converter must be used to providepower for all trailer lighting. This unit usesthe vehicle battery as a direct power sourcefor all trailer lights while using the vehicletail light, stoplight and turn signal circuitsas a signal source. The module/convertermust draw no more than 15 milliamps fromthe stop and tail lamp circuits. Using amodule/converter that exceeds these powerrequirements may damage the vehicle’selectrical system. See a reputable trailerdealer to obtain the proper equipment and tohave it installed.

Trailer lights should comply with federaland/or local regulations. For assistance inhooking up trailer lights, contact anINFINITI dealer or reputable trailer dealer.

Trailer brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a brakingsystem, make sure it conforms to federaland/or local regulations and that it isproperly installed.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake system directlyto the vehicle brake system.

Pre-towing tips

O Be certain your vehicle maintains alevel position when a loaded and/orunloaded trailer is hitched. Do notdrive the vehicle if it has an abnormalnose-up or nose-down condition;check for improper tongue load, over-load, worn suspension or other pos-sible causes of either condition.

O Always secure items in the trailer toprevent load shifts while driving.

O Load the trailer so approximately 60%of the trailer load is in the front halfand 40% is in the back half.

O Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure,vehicle tire pressure, trailer light op-eration, and trailer wheel lug nutsevery time you attach a trailer to thevehicle.

O Be certain your rear view mirrors con-form to all federal, state or local regula-

tions. If not, install any mirrors requiredfor towing before driving the vehicle.

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an under-standing of the vehicle’s behavior, youshould practice turning, stopping andbacking up in an area which is free fromtraffic. Steering stability, and braking per-formance will be somewhat different thanunder normal driving conditions.

O Always secure items in the trailer toprevent load shift while driving.

O Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration orstops.

O Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

O Always drive your vehicle at a mod-erate speed. Some states or provinceshave specific speed limits for vehiclesthat are towing trailers. Obey the localspeed limits.

O When backing up, hold the bottom ofthe steering wheel with one hand.Move your hand in the direction inwhich you want the trailer to go. Makesmall corrections and back up slowly.If possible, have someone guide youwhen you are backing up.

O Always block the wheels on both vehicleand trailer when parking. Parking on aslope is not recommended; however, ifyou must do so, and if your vehicle isequipped with automatic transmission,first apply the parking brake and blockthe wheels, and then move the transmis-sion selector lever into the P (Park) posi-tion. If you move the selector lever tothe P (Park) position before applying theparking brake and blocking the wheels,transmission damage could occur.

O When going down a hill, shift into alower gear and use the engine brakingeffect. When going up a long grade,downshift the transmission to a lowergear and reduce speed to reducechances of engine overloading and/oroverheating.However, for long steep grades, donot stay in 1st or 2nd gear whendriving above 35 MPH (56 km/h).

O If the engine coolant rises to an ex-tremely high temperature when the airconditioning system is on, turn off theair conditioner. Coolant heat can beadditionally vented by opening thewindows, switching the fan control tohigh and setting the temperature con-trol to the HOT position.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

O Trailer towing requires more fuel thannormal circumstances.

O Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500miles (800 km).

O Have your vehicle serviced more oftenthan at intervals specified in the rec-ommended maintenance schedule inthe INFINITI Service and MaintenanceGuide.

O When making a turn, your trailerwheels will be closer to the inside ofthe turn than your vehicle wheels. Tocompensate for this, make a largerthan normal turning radius during theturn.

O Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-versely affect vehicle/trailer handling,possibly causing vehicle sway. Whenbeing passed by larger vehicles, beprepared for possible changes incrosswinds that could affect vehiclehandling. If swaying does occur, firmlygrip the steering wheel, steer straightahead, and immediately (but gradu-ally) reduce vehicle speed. This combi-nation will help stabilize the vehicle.Never increase speed.

O Be careful when passing other vehicles.Passing while towing a trailer requiresconsiderably more distance than normalpassing. Remember the length of thetrailer must also pass the other vehiclebefore you can safely change lanes.

O To maintain engine braking efficiencyand electrical charging performance,do not use sixth gear (manual trans-mission) or fifth position (automatictransmission).

O Avoid holding the brake pedal downtoo long or too frequently. This couldcause the brakes to overheat, re-sulting in reduced braking efficiency.

O Increase your following distance to al-low for greater stopping distanceswhile towing a trailer. Anticipate stopsand brake gradually.

O Do not use cruise control while towinga trailer.

O Check your hitch, trailer wiring har-ness connections, and trailer wheellug nuts after 50 miles (80 km) oftravel and at every break.

O When stopped in traffic for long pe-riods of time in hot weather, put thevehicle in the P (Park) position.

When towing a trailer, transmissionoil/fluid should be changed more fre-quently.For additional information, see the “8.Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sectionearlier in this manual.

FLAT TOWING

Towing your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground is sometimes called flattowing. This method is sometimes usedwhen towing a vehicle behind a recre-ational vehicle, such as a motor home.

CAUTION

O Failure to follow these guidelines can re-sult in severe transmission damage.

O Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-ways tow forward, never backward.

O DO NOT tow any automatic transmissionvehicle with all four wheels on theground (flat towing). Doing so WILLDAMAGE internal transmission parts dueto lack of transmission lubrication.


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

O For emergency towing procedures referto “Towing recommended by INFINITI” inthe “6. In case of emergency” section ofthis manual.

Automatic transmission

To tow a vehicle equipped with an auto-matic transmission, an appropriate ve-hicle dolly MUST be placed under thetowed vehicle’s drive wheels. Alwaysfollow the dolly manufacturer’s recom-mendations when using their product.

Manual transmission

O Always tow with the manual transmis-sion in Neutral.

O After towing 500 miles, start and idlethe engine with the transmission inNeutral for two minutes. Failure to idlethe engine after every 500 miles oftowing may cause damage to thetransmission’s internal parts.

DOT (Department Of Transportation) Qual-ity Grades: All passenger car tires mustconform to federal safety requirements inaddition to these grades.

Quality grades can be found where appli-cable on the tire sidewall between treadshoulder and maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rat-ing based on the wear rate of the tirewhen tested under controlled conditionson a specified government test course.For example, a tire graded 150 would wearone and one-half (1 1/2) times as well onthe government course as a tire graded100. The relative performance of tires de-pends upon the actual conditions of theiruse, however, and may depart signifi-cantly from the norm due to variations indriving habits, service practices and dif-ferences in road characteristics and cli-mate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades

represent the tire’s ability to stop on wetpavement as measured under controlledconditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor traction perfor-mance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades A (the highest),B, and C, representing the tire’s resis-tance to the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedindoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reduce tirelife, and excessive temperature can leadto sudden tire failure. The grade C corre-sponds to a level of performance whichall passenger car tires must meet underthe Federal Motor Safety Standard No.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

109. Grades B and A represent higher lev-els of performance on the laboratory testwheel than the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is estab-lished for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either sepa-rately or in combination, can cause heatbuild-up and possible tire failure.

Your INFINITI is covered by the followingemission warranties.

For US:

O Emission Defects Warranty

O Emissions Performance Warranty(See Warranty Information Booklet fordetails.)

For Canada:

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of these warranties may be foundwith other vehicle warranties in your War-ranty Information Booklet (Warranty andRoadside Assistance Information (Canadaonly)) that comes with your INFINITI. If youdid not receive a Warranty InformationBooklet (Warranty and Roadside Assis-tance Information (Canada only)), or it hasbecome lost, you may obtain a replace-ment by writing to:

O INFINITI DivisionNissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 685003, Franklin, TN 37068-5003

O Nissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, you shouldimmediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingINFINITI.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, itmay open an investigation, and if itfinds that a safety defect exists in agroup of vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involved in indi-vidual problems between you, yourdealer, or INFINITI.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153): go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 SeventhStreet, SW., Washington, DC 20590.You can also obtain other informationabout motor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify INFINITI by contactingour Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at 1-800-662-6200.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US only)


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Due to legal requirements in some states/areas, your vehicle may be required to bein what is called the “ready condition” foran Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test ofthe emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”when it is driven through certain drivingpatterns. Usually, the “ready condition”can be obtained by ordinary usage of thevehicle.

If a powertrain system component is re-paired or the battery is disconnected, thevehicle may be reset to a not “ready con-dition”. Before taking the I/M test, checkthe vehicle’s inspection/maintenance testreadiness condition. Turn the ignitionswitch ON without starting the engine. Ifthe Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)comes on steady for 20 seconds and thenblinks for 10 seconds, the I/M test condi-tion is “not ready”. If the MIL does notblink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condi-tion is “ready”. If the MIL indicates thevehicle is in a “not ready” condition, drivethe vehicle through the following patternto set the vehicle to the ready condition.If you cannot or do not want to performthe driving pattern, an INFINITI dealer canconduct it for you.

WARNING

Always drive the vehicle in a safe and pru-dent manner according to traffic conditionsand obey all traffic laws.

1. Start the engine. Allow the engine toidle until the engine coolant tempera-ture gauge needle points between theC and H (normal operating tempera-ture).

2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88km/h), then quickly release the accel-erator pedal completely and keep it re-leased for at least 10 seconds.

3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedalfor a moment, then drive the vehicle ata speed of 53 to 60 MPH (86 to 96km/h) for at least 9 minutes.

4. Stop the vehicle. Leave the enginerunning.

5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55km/h) and maintain the speed for 20seconds.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 at least 10 times.

7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88km/h) and maintain the speed for atleast 3 minutes.

8. Stop the vehicle. Place the automatictransmission selector lever in the “P”or “N” position or the manual trans-mission shift lever in the “N” position.

9. Turn the engine off.

10. Repeat steps 1 through 8 at least onemore time.

If step 1 through 7 is interrupted, repeatthe preceding step. Any safe driving modeis acceptable between steps. Do not stopthe engine until step 7 is completed.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST (US only)


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Your vehicle is equipped with a variety ofcomputers that monitor and control a num-ber of systems to optimize performanceand help service technicians with diag-nosis and repair. Some of the computersmonitor emission control systems, brakingsystems, engine systems, transmissionsystems, tire pressure systems, and airbag systems. Some data about vehicle op-eration may be stored in the computers foruse during servicing. Other data may bestored if a crash event occurs. For example,vehicle speed, brake application, steeringangle, air bag readiness, air bag perfor-mance, and seat belt use by the driver orpassenger may be recorded. These typesof systems are sometimes called EventData Recorders.

Special equipment can be used to accessthe electronic data that may be stored inthe vehicle’s computers (sounds are notrecorded). INFINITI and INFINITI dealershave equipment to access some of thisdata; others may also have this equip-ment. The data may be retrieved duringroutine vehicle servicing or for special re-search. It might also be accessed with theconsent of the vehicle owner or lessee, inresponse to a request by law enforcement,or as otherwise required or permitted bylaw.

A genuine INFINITI Service Manual is thebest source of service and repair informa-tion for your vehicle. Filled with wiringdiagrams, illustrations and step-by-stepdiagnostic and adjustment procedures,this manual is the same one used by thefactory trained technicians working at anINFINITI dealer. Also available are genuineINFINITI Owner’s Manuals, and genuineINFINITI Service and Owner’s Manuals forolder INFINITI models.

In the USA:

For current pricing and availability ofgenuine INFINITI Service Manuals for the2000 model year and later, contact:

Tweddle Litho Company1-800-450-9491www.nissan-techinfo.com/infiniti

For current pricing and availability ofgenuine INFINITI Service Manuals for the1999 model year and prior, see an INFINITIdealer, or contact:

Resolve Corporation20770 Westwood RoadStrongsville, OH 441361-800-247-5321

For current pricing and availability ofgenuine INFINITI Owner’s Manuals for this

model year and prior, see an INFINITIdealer, or contact:

Resolve Corporation20770 Westwood RoadStrongsville, OH 441361-800-247-5321

In Canada:

To purchase a copy of a genuine INFINITIService Manual or Owner’s Manual pleasecontact an INFINITI dealer. For the phonenumber and location of an INFINITI dealerin your area call the INFINITI SatisfactionCenter at 1-800-361-4792 and a bilingualINFINITI representative will assist you.

Also available are genuine INFINITI Ser-vice and Owner’s Manuals for olderINFINITI models.

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION

Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In thisunlikely event, there is some importantinformation you should know. Many insur-ance companies routinely authorize theuse of non-genuine collision parts inorder to cut costs, among other reasons.

EVENT DATA RECORDERS OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE MANUALORDER INFORMATION


w 06.7.7/V35-D/V5.0 X

Insist on the use of GenuineINFINITI Collision Parts!

If you want your vehicle to be restoredusing parts made to INFINITI’s original ex-acting specifications — if you want tohelp it to last and hold its resale value,the solution is simple. Tell your insuranceagent and your repair shop to only useGenuine INFINITI Collision Parts. INFINITIdoes not warrant non-INFINITI parts, nordoes INFINITI’s warranty apply to damagecaused by a non-genuine parts.

Using Genuine INFINITI Parts can help pro-tect your personal safety, preserve yourwarranty protection and maintain the re-sale value of your vehicle. And if your ve-hicle was leased, using Genuine INFINITIParts may prevent or limit unnecessaryexcess wear and tear expenses at the endof your lease.

INFINITI designs its hoods with crumplezones to minimize the risk that the hoodwill penetrate the windshield of your ve-hicle in an accident. Non-genuine (imita-tion) parts may not provide such built-insafety features. Also, non-genuine partsoften show premature wear, rust and cor-rosion.

Why should you take a chance?

In over 40 states, the law says you mustbe advised if non-genuine parts are usedto repair your vehicle. And somestates/provinces have enacted laws thatrestrict insurance companies from autho-rizing the use of non-genuine collisionparts during the new vehicle warranty.These laws help protect you, so you cantake action to protect yourself.

It’s your right!

If you should need further informationvisit us at:

www.infiniti.com (for U.S. customers) orwww.infiniti.ca (for Canadian customers)


w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

10 Index

A

Advanced air bag system ................................. 1-42Air bag system

Advanced air bag system .......................... 1-42Front passenger air bag and status light ... 1-44

Air bag warning labels ..................................... 1-50Air bag warning light ............................... 1-50, 2-13Air cleaner housing filter ................................. 8-20Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation........................... 4-10Air conditioner service............................... 4-13Air conditioner specification label .............. 9-11Air conditioning system refrigerantand lubricant recommendations ......... 4-13, 9-6Heater and air conditioner (automatic) ...... 4-10In-cabin microfilter .................................... 4-13

Alarm, How to stop alarm (see vehicle securitysystem) ............................................................ 2-17Alcohol, drugs and driving ................................. 5-5Ambient temperature, Air conditioner............... 4-12Antenna ........................................................... 4-27Anti-glare inside mirror .................................... 3-32Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)........................ 5-24Appearance care

Exterior appearance care............................. 7-2Interior appearance care ............................. 7-4

Ashtray (See cigarette lighter and ashtray) ...... 2-28Audible reminders............................................ 2-16

Audio operation precautions ............................ 4-15Audio system ................................................... 4-14

Steering wheel audio controls................... 4-27Autochanger

Compact Disc (CD) .................................... 4-24Autolight system .............................................. 2-21Automatic

Anti-glare inside mirror ............................. 3-32Automatic adjusting function ................... 2-38Automatic sunroof..................................... 2-38Automatic transmission fluid (ATF)............. 8-13Drive positioner ........................................ 3-34Driving with automatic transmission .......... 5-11Seat positioner ......................................... 3-34

Avoiding collision and rollover ........................... 5-5

B

Battery............................................................. 8-16Battery saver system................................. 2-23

Before starting the engine ................................. 5-9Belts (See drive belts)...................................... 8-19Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System ............. 4-29Booster seats ................................................... 1-31Brake

Brake and clutch fluid ............................... 8-14Brake fluid ................................................ 8-14Brake system ............................................ 5-23Parking brake operation ............................ 5-18

Warning light ............................................ 2-10Break-in schedule............................................. 5-21Brightness control, Instrument panel ............... 2-23Bulb check/instrument panel............................. 2-9Bulb replacement ............................................ 8-30

C

Cabin air filter.................................................. 4-13Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants .... 9-2Car phone or CB radio..................................... 4-28Card holder...................................................... 2-35CD care and cleaning ...................................... 4-26Child restraints................................................. 1-16

Booster seats............................................. 1-31Top tether strap ........................................ 1-20

Child safety....................................................... 1-11Chimes

Audible reminders ..................................... 2-16Seat belt warning light and chime............. 2-13

Cigarette lighter and ashtray ........................... 2-28Circuit breaker, Fusible link ............................. 8-25Cleaning exterior and interior ..................... 7-2, 7-4Clock ............................................................... 2-27Clutch fluid ...................................................... 8-14Coat hook........................................................ 2-36Cold weather driving........................................ 5-28Command (See Bluetooth Hands-Free PhoneSystem) ........................................................... 4-35

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Compact Disc (CD) changer (See audiosystem) ........................................................... 4-24Compass display ............................................... 2-6Console box..................................................... 2-34Control panel buttons (models with navigationsystem) ............................................................. 4-2Controls

Control panel buttons (display withnavigation system)...................................... 4-2Heater and air conditioner controls(automatic)................................................ 4-10Steering wheel audio controls................... 4-27

CoolantCapacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ................................................... 9-2Changing engine coolant ............................ 8-9Checking engine coolant level .................... 8-8

Corrosion protection .......................................... 7-5Cruise control................................................... 5-19Cup holder ...................................................... 2-30

D

Daytime running light system .......................... 2-23Defroster switch, Rear window and outsidemirror defroster switch .................................... 2-20Display controls (See control panel buttons),With navigation system ..................................... 4-2Door open warning light ................................... 2-11Drive belts ....................................................... 8-19Drive positioner ............................................... 3-34Driving

Cold weather driving................................. 5-28Driving with automatic transmission .......... 5-11

Driving with manual transmission .............. 5-15Precautions when starting and driving ........ 5-2

DUAL button (See heater and airconditioner)...................................................... 4-12

E

Economy, Fuel .................................................. 5-21Emission control information label ................... 9-10Emission control system warranty.................... 9-23Engine

Before starting the engine .......................... 5-9Break-in schedule...................................... 5-21Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ................................................... 9-2Changing engine coolant ............................ 8-9Changing engine oil and filter.................... 8-11Checking engine coolant level .................... 8-8Checking engine oil level .......................... 8-10Coolant temperature gauge......................... 2-4Engine block heater .................................. 5-29Engine compartment check locations .......... 8-7Engine cooling system................................ 8-8Engine oil.................................................. 8-10Engine oil and oil filter recommendation..... 9-5Engine oil viscosity ..................................... 9-5Engine serial number ................................ 9-10Engine specifications .................................. 9-7If your vehicle overheats ........................... 6-10Starting the engine.................................... 5-10

Entry/exit function, Automatic drivepositioner ........................................................ 3-34Event data recorders........................................ 9-25Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide)......................... 5-2

F

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label........... 9-10Filter

Air cleaner housing filter .......................... 8-20Changing engine oil and filter.................... 8-11

Flashers (See hazard warning flasherswitch)............................................................. 2-24Flat tire.............................................................. 6-2Flat towing ....................................................... 9-21Floor mat cleaning ............................................. 7-4Fluid

Automatic transmission fluid (ATF)............. 8-13Brake and clutch fluid ............................... 8-14Brake fluid ................................................ 8-14Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ................................................... 9-2Engine coolant............................................ 8-8Engine oil.................................................. 8-10Power steering fluid .................................. 8-13Window washer fluid ................................. 8-15

Fog light switch ............................................... 2-24Front passenger air bag and status light.......... 1-44Front power seat adjustment.............................. 1-2Fuel

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ................................................... 9-2Fuel economy ............................................ 5-21Fuel economy information (display) ............ 4-4Fuel octane rating ....................................... 9-3Fuel recommendation.................................. 9-3Fuel-filler cap............................................ 3-28Fuel-filler door .......................................... 3-28Gauge ......................................................... 2-5

10-2

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Fuses............................................................... 8-23Fusible links .................................................... 8-25

G

Garage door opener, HomeLink UniversalTransceiver ...................................................... 2-42Gas cap ........................................................... 3-28Gauge................................................................ 2-3

Engine coolant temperature gauge.............. 2-4Fuel gauge .................................................. 2-5Odometer.................................................... 2-3Speedometer .............................................. 2-3Tachometer................................................. 2-4

General maintenance......................................... 8-2Glove box ........................................................ 2-32Glove box (upper) ............................................ 2-33Golf bag stowing ............................................. 2-36

H

Hands-free phone system, Bluetooth ............. 4-29Hazard warning flasher switch......................... 2-24Head restraints .................................................. 1-7Headlights

Bulb replacement...................................... 8-30Headlight switch........................................ 2-21Xenon headlights...................................... 2-20

Heated seats.................................................... 2-25Heater

Engine block heater .................................. 5-29Heater and air conditioner (automatic) ...... 4-10

HomeLink Universal Transceiver..................... 2-42

Hood release ................................................... 3-24Horn ................................................................ 2-25

I

Ignition switch(except Intelligent Key system) ................... 5-6(with Intelligent Key system)....................... 5-8Key positions .............................................. 5-7Manual transmission models ...................... 5-6

Immobilizer system .......................................... 2-18In-cabin microfilter ........................................... 4-13Indicator lights................................................. 2-14INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System................. 2-18Inside automatic anti-glare mirror.................... 3-32Inspection/maintenance (I/M) test................... 9-24Instrument brightness control.......................... 2-23Instrument panel ............................................... 2-2Instrument pocket ........................................... 2-29Intelligent Key system ....................................... 3-9

Key operating range .................................. 3-15Key operation............................................. 3-11Mechanical key and valet key ................... 3-23Operating the engine................................. 3-13Remote keyless operation......................... 3-20Trouble-shooting guide.............................. 3-19Warning light ............................................. 2-11Warning signals......................................... 3-17

Intelligent key warning light ............................. 2-11Interior light replacement ................................ 8-30Interior lights .................................................. 2-40Interior trunk lid release .................................. 3-27

J

Jump starting..................................................... 6-7

K

Keyless entryWith Intelligent Key system(See Intelligent Key system)...................... 3-20Without Intelligent Key system (See remotekeyless entry system).................................. 3-5

Keys .................................................................. 3-2Keys, For Intelligent Key system ........................ 3-9

L

LabelsAir bag warning labels............................... 1-50Air conditioner specification label .............. 9-11Emission control information label ............ 9-10Engine serial number ................................ 9-10F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label .... 9-10Tire and Loading Information label ... 8-34, 9-11Vehicle identification number (VIN)............. 9-9

License plate, Installing front license plate ...... 9-12Light

Air bag warning light ................................. 1-50Bulb replacement...................................... 8-30Fog light switch ........................................ 2-24Headlight switch........................................ 2-21Headlights bulb replacement .................... 8-30Indicator lights .......................................... 2-14Interior lights............................................ 2-40

10-3

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Map lights................................................. 2-41Replacement ............................................. 8-29Room light................................................ 2-40Trunk light ................................................ 2-42Vanity mirror light ..................................... 2-41Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders ................................................... 2-9Xenon headlights...................................... 2-20

Lights, Exterior and interior lightreplacement .................................................... 8-30Loading information (See vehicle loadinginformation) ..................................................... 9-13Lock

Door locks .................................................. 3-3Glove box lock .......................................... 2-32Power door lock.......................................... 3-3Trunk lid ................................................... 3-25

Low fuel warning light ...................................... 2-11Low tire pressure warning light ........................ 2-11Low tire pressure warning system (See tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)).................. 5-3

M

MaintenanceBattery ...................................................... 8-16General maintenance .................................. 8-2Inside the vehicle ....................................... 8-3Maintenance information (display) .............. 4-5Maintenance precautions ............................ 8-5Maintenance requirements.......................... 8-2Outside the vehicle..................................... 8-3Seat belt maintenance ............................... 1-16Under the hood and vehicle ....................... 8-4

Map lights........................................................ 2-41Mechanical key (for Intelligent Key system) ..... 3-23Memory storage, Automatic drive positioner .... 3-35Meters and gauges............................................ 2-3Meters and gauges, Instrument brightnesscontrol ............................................................. 2-23Mirror

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror ............. 3-32Outside mirrors......................................... 3-33

N

New vehicle break-in ........................................ 5-21

O

Odometer .......................................................... 2-3Oil

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ................................................... 9-2Changing engine oil and filter.................... 8-11Checking engine oil level .......................... 8-10Engine oil.................................................. 8-10Engine oil viscosity ..................................... 9-5

Operating the engine (Intelligent Keysystem) ............................................................ 3-13Outside mirrors................................................ 3-33Overheat, If your vehicle overheats.................. 6-10Owner’s Manual/Service Manual orderinformation ...................................................... 9-25

P

ParkingParking brake operation ............................ 5-18Parking on hills......................................... 5-22

PhoneBluetooth Hands-Free Phone System ...... 4-29Car phone or CB radio .............................. 4-28

PowerFront seat adjustment ................................. 1-2Power door lock.......................................... 3-3Power outlet ............................................. 2-28Power steering fluid .................................. 8-13Power steering system .............................. 5-23Power windows......................................... 2-36

PrecautionsAudio operation......................................... 4-15Braking precautions .................................. 5-23Cruise control ............................................ 5-19Maintenance ............................................... 8-5Seat belt usage........................................... 1-8Supplemental restraint system .................. 1-35When starting and driving........................... 5-2

Push starting..................................................... 6-9

R

RadioCar phone or CB radio .............................. 4-28Steering wheel audio controls................... 4-27

Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M)test (US only) .................................................. 9-24Rear active steer (RAS) system......................... 5-27

10-4

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch.............................................................. 2-20Recorders, Event data ...................................... 9-25Registering your vehicle in another country....... 9-9Remote keyless entry

System, Except Intelligent Key system ........ 3-5System, For Intelligent Key system ........... 3-20

Reporting safety defects (US only) ................... 9-23Roadside assistance program ............................ 6-2Rollover ............................................................. 5-5Room light....................................................... 2-40

S

SafetyReporting safety defects (US only) ............ 9-23Towing safety ............................................ 9-18

Seat adjustment, Front power seatadjustment......................................................... 1-2Seat belt(s)

Child safety ................................................ 1-11Infants........................................................ 1-11Injured persons.......................................... 1-12Larger children........................................... 1-12Precautions on seat belt usage ................... 1-8Pregnant women ........................................ 1-12Seat belt cleaning ....................................... 7-5Seat belt extenders .................................... 1-15Seat belt maintenance ............................... 1-16Seat belt warning light and chime............. 2-13Seat belts ................................................... 1-8Small children ............................................ 1-11Three-point type with retractor................... 1-12

Seat(s)Driver-side memory................................... 3-34Heated seats............................................. 2-25Seats........................................................... 1-2

Secondary trunk lid release ............................. 3-27Security system (INFINITI Vehicle ImmobilizerSystem)............................................................ 2-18Security system, Vehicle security system ......... 2-16Selector lever, Shift lock release ...................... 5-14Servicing air conditioner .................................. 4-13Shift lock release, Transmission....................... 5-14Shifting

Automatic transmission ............................. 5-12Manual transmission ................................. 5-15

Spark plugs ..................................................... 8-19Speedometer ..................................................... 2-3Starting

Before starting the engine .......................... 5-9Jump starting .............................................. 6-7Precautions when starting and driving ........ 5-2Push starting .............................................. 6-9Starting the engine.................................... 5-10

Status light, Front passenger air bag ............... 1-44Steering

Power steering fluid .................................. 8-13Power steering system .............................. 5-23Rear active steer (RAS) system .................. 5-27Steering wheel switch for audio controls .. 4-27Tilting steering wheel................................ 3-30

Storage............................................................ 2-29Stowing golf bags............................................ 2-36Sun shade ....................................................... 2-39Sun visors ........................................................ 3-31Sunglasses holder ........................................... 2-30

Sunroof ........................................................... 2-38Automatic sunroof..................................... 2-38

Supplemental air bag warning labels ............... 1-50Supplemental air bag warning light ......... 1-50, 2-13Supplemental restraint system ......................... 1-35

Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem....................................................... 1-35

SwitchAudio control steering wheel switch.......... 4-27Fog light switch ........................................ 2-24Hazard warning flasher switch .................. 2-24Headlight switch........................................ 2-21Ignition switch (except Intelligent Keysystem)....................................................... 5-6Ignition switch (with Intelligent Keysystem)....................................................... 5-8Ignition switch automatic transmissionmodels........................................................ 5-8Ignition switch manual transmissionmodels........................................................ 5-6Power door lock switch............................... 3-4Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch....................................................... 2-20Turn signal switch..................................... 2-24Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) offswitch ....................................................... 2-27

T

Tachometer........................................................ 2-4Temperature gauge, Engine coolanttemperature gauge ............................................ 2-4Theft (INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System)...... 2-18Tilting steering wheel ...................................... 3-30

10-5

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Tire pressure, Low tire pressure warninglight.................................................................. 2-11Tires

Flat tire....................................................... 6-2Low tire pressure warning system............... 5-3Tire and Loading information label ........... 8-34Tire and Loading Information label............. 9-11Tire chains................................................ 8-39Tire dressing............................................... 7-3Tire pressure............................................. 8-32Tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) ................................................. 5-3, 6-2Tire rotation.............................................. 8-39Types of tires............................................ 8-38Uniform tire quality grading ...................... 9-22Wheel/tire size ........................................... 9-8Wheels and tires....................................... 8-32

Top tether strap child restraints....................... 1-20Towing

Flat towing ................................................ 9-21Tow truck towing ....................................... 6-11Towing a trailer ......................................... 9-17Towing load/specification chart................. 9-18Towing safety ............................................ 9-18

TPMS, Tire pressure monitoring system ...... 5-3, 6-2Trailer towing ................................................... 9-17Transceiver, HomeLink UniversalTransceiver ...................................................... 2-42Transmission

Automatic transmission fluid (ATF)............. 8-13Driving with automatic transmission .......... 5-11Driving with manual transmission .............. 5-15Transmission selector lever lock release.... 5-14

Transmitter, With Intelligent Key system (SeeIntelligent Key system) .................................... 3-20Transmitter, Without Intelligent Key system(See remote keyless entry system)..................... 3-5Traveling or registering your vehicle in anothercountry.............................................................. 9-9Trip computer information (display) ................... 4-4Trouble-shooting guide (for Intelligent Keysystem) ............................................................ 3-19Troubleshooting guide (for BluetoothHands-Free Phone System)...................... 4-19, 4-43Troubleshooting guide(for voice-activated control system)......... 4-19, 4-43Trunk

Interior trunk lid release ........................... 3-27Light ......................................................... 2-42Secondary trunk lid release ...................... 3-27Trunk lid ................................................... 3-25

Turn signal switch ........................................... 2-24

U

Underbody cleaning........................................... 7-3Uniform tire quality grading............................. 9-22Up-shift indicator (M/T models)........................ 5-16

V

Valet key (for Intelligent Key system)............... 3-23Vanity mirror light ............................................ 2-41Vehicle

Identification number (VIN) ......................... 9-9Loading information .................................. 9-13Recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) ............. 6-13

Security system......................................... 2-16Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) offswitch ....................................................... 2-27Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ...... 5-25

Ventilators......................................................... 4-9Voice command (See Bluetooth Hands-FreePhone System)................................................. 4-35

W

Warning labels, Air bag warning labels ............ 1-50Warning light

Air bag warning light ........................ 1-50, 2-13Brake warning light ................................... 2-10Door open warning light ............................ 2-11Intelligent Key warning light ...................... 2-11Low fuel warning light................................ 2-11Low tire pressure warning light.................. 2-11Seat belt warning light and chime............. 2-13

Warning lights ................................................... 2-9Warning, Hazard warning flasher switch .......... 2-24Warning, Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders .......................................................... 2-9Warranty, Emission control system warranty.... 9-23Washer switch, Windshield wiper and washerswitch .............................................................. 2-19Washing ............................................................ 7-2Waxing .............................................................. 7-2Wheel/tire size.................................................. 9-8Wheels and tires ............................................. 8-32

Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels ................. 7-3Wheels, Rear active steer (RAS) system ........... 5-27Window washer fluid........................................ 8-15

10-6

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

Window(s)Automatic adjusting function .................... 2-38Cleaning ..................................................... 7-3Power windows......................................... 2-36

Windshield wiper and washer switch ............... 2-19Wiper

Windshield wiper and washer switch......... 2-19Wiper blades ............................................. 8-21

X

Xenon headlights............................................. 2-20

10-7

w 06.6.30/V35-D/V5.0 X

MEMO

10-8

w 06.7.7/V35-D/V5.0 X

MEMO

10-9

w 06.7.7/V35-D/V5.0 X

MEMO

10-10

w 06.7.7/V35-D/V5.0 X

MEMO

10-11

w 06.7.7/V35-D/V5.0 X

MEMO

10-12

w 06.7.7/V35-D/V5.0 X

MEMO

10-13

w 06.7.7/V35-D/V5.0 X

MEMO

10-14

w 06.7.7/V35-D/V5.0 X

Use unleaded premium gasoline with anoctane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octanenumber 96).

If unleaded premium gasoline is not avail-able, unleaded regular gasoline with anoctane rating of at least 87 AKI number(Research octane number 91) can be used,but only under the following precautions:

O Have the fuel tank filled only partiallywith unleaded regular gasoline, andfill up with unleaded premium gaso-line as soon as possible.

O Avoid full throttle driving and abruptacceleration.

However, for maximum vehicle perfor-mance, the use of unleaded premium gaso-line is recommended.

CAUTION

O Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emission con-trol system, and may also affect the war-ranty coverage.

O Under no circumstances should a leadedgasoline be used, because this will dam-age the three-way catalyst.

O Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Yourvehicle is not designed to run on E-85fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage the fuelsystem components and is not coveredby the INFINITI vehicle limited warranty.

For additional information, see “Capaci-ties and recommended fuel/lubricants” inthe “9. Technical and consumer informa-tion” section.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:

O Engine oil with API Certification Mark

O Viscosity SAE 5W-30

See “Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Technical and con-sumer information” section for engine oiland oil filter recommendation.

COLD TIRE PRESSURES:

See Tire and Loading Information label af-fixed to the inside of the driver sidecenter pillar.

NEW VEHICLE BREAK-INPROCEDURES RECOMMENDATION:

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) ofvehicle use, follow the recommendations

outlined in the “Break-in schedule” Infor-mation found in the “5. Starting and driv-ing” section of this Owner’s Manual.Follow these recommendations for the fu-ture reliability and economy of your newvehicle.

GAS STATION INFORMATION

w 06.7.7/V35-D/V5.0 X

1. Engine oil 8-10

2. Meters and gauges 2-3

3. Hood release 3-24

4. Seat 1-2

5. Seat belt 1-8

6. Key 3-2

7. Spare tire 6-4, 8-41

8. Fuel 3-28, 9-2

9. Audio system 4-14Heater and air conditioner 4-10

10. Battery 8-16

11. Engine coolant 8-8

12. Windshield washer fluid 8-15

STI0490

QUICK REFERENCE

w 06.7.7/V35-D/V5.0 X

2007 g35 coupe owner's manual - dealer.com us · 2019. 8. 26. · 23. electric steering column...

Documents